Table of Contents Introduction
Introduction ‘Pagoda,’ a book by Patricia Powell talks about a big secret. Lowe, a Chinese immigrant who runs a shop in Jamaica, is trapped between black and white villagers and faces threats from both groups. After living together with Miss Sylvie for convenience for thirty five years, their marriage changes to be a marriage of love as they come into reality with revelations of their past.
Separation from her daughter for more than twelve years makes Lowe to write a letter with details of the origin of their family. Prior to the completion of the letter, the shop was reduced down to ashes together with Cecil, the person who fetched her to Jamaica, mistreated her sexually and who assisted her in putting up the shop.
As a result of this incident, Lowe began a new life as a result of the freedom from debts of Cecil. She decides to build a Pagoda, school and a social place where all Chinese citizens could meet. As she engaged in these activities, she struggled to come out of the fact that she had lost his livelihood as well as drifting from Chinese culture and the prevailing secret of her family.
Faking identity Lowe had escaped her marriage more than thirty five years ago by going away on a ship to Jamaica, and being unaware that the ship had more than five hundred Chinese men who had been forcefully taken from China and were bound for forced labor. Due to the fact that Chinese women are never allowed to immigrate to foreign countries, Lowe camouflages herself as a man and maintains the same identity for more than thirty years.
The author tries to bring out implications which destiny and freedom can have on an individuals’ life regarding gender and family relationships. Kidnapping of Chinese men to provide cheap labor in the sugar plantations in Jamaica is also documented.
Living conditions in China in the late 1800s was harsh making Lowe to search for new prospects in the Island of Jamaica. Lowe began realizing many losses in life after the grocery shop was burnt down, including the loss of her daughter, language, historical background and identity. These led her to intend to live a genuine life including building the Pagoda, a social cultural centre for the Chinese people.
As she began the new life, a revelation of a life of fake identity, historical violence and betrayal was unfolded. She recognizes that she is not the only one with the dark past, but also Miss Sylvie. Lowe and Sylvie continue sharing their past but something else comes up, Lowe has an affair with a black Jamaican woman called Joyce which makes Sylvie to run away because she could not hold the past experiences.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Afterwards, Lowe realized that she genuinely loved Miss Sylvie and thereby writing a letter to her daughter Elizabeth. Submerged in misery and lamentation, Lowe admits in the letter that she has never lived her life fully but through faking identities.
According to the author (Powell,117), the character of Sylvie as a woman surpassed the boundaries imposed upon women in the late 19th century by depicting her as an autonomous, rich and influential owner of land. She is forced to tackle the past full of wrong choices, deceit and masked identity.
Lowe deals with problems of injustice in Jamaica in an area dominated by the blacks and her target is to cut across racism and get recognition within the society. However, the struggle of Lowe with identity is much emphasized than any other character in the book. The years of lies have lowered Lowes’ spirit to the extent that ‘self’ had no meaning in her life but just a collection of fiction.
She no longer knew the beginning or the end of some things happening in her life, whether her stories corresponded or whether people understood the gaps in links.
Despite the frustrations and difficulties that she undergoes, Lowe goes on with the dream of building the Pagoda so that Chinese living in Jamaica can have a place to refresh and practice their traditions and experience their identities. The author tries to investigate colorfully the fertile heritage and landscape of Jamaica in the late 19th century.
Conclusion The context of the story is interesting because of the nature of the community involved, a Chinese community in Jamaica while Lowe, the main character, revolves around with issues related to gender identity. I was a little bit unsatisfied with the main character in the story because she had big challenges in her life while she kept other people out of her life, at the same time she seemed discontented with her life.
There is lack of connection, relationships among people in the story while the author tries to bring out lack of hope in the bid to build a community of Chinese people in Jamaica. Towards the end of the story, there seems to be optimism concerning pardon and love, but remains only to be hope in the authors’ imagination but not in the written context.
We will write a custom Critical Writing on The Pagoda by Patricia Powell specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Works Cited Powell, Patricia. The Pagoda. New York: Knopf, 1998.
Human Resources: Personnel selection Essay essay help site:edu
Introduction Since the 1960s, personnel selection process has become a center of focus by organizations across the world; the main objective of the process is to get the best human capital from the labor market (Henderson, 2003).
Organizations need human resources with vast experience qualifications, talent, and personalities; to develop an orchestrate team, human resources management team need to develop an effective personnel selection procedure. The strategy adopted should guarantee organization good results qualitatively and quantitatively.
Personnel selection is a strategic tool used by personnel managers to search for quality employees who can assist an organization attain its corporate goals, fulfill its mission, vision, and corporate objectives.
Personnel selection process is part of the larger human resources practice, it follows some steps for its effectiveness (Kleiman, 2000).This paper discusses the process of personnel selection using 3Ws and H (why, what, when, and how) strategy of human resources management.
Why select At an ideal situation, organizations should have the right number of human resources, with wide experience in the area they are engaged in alongside having good interpersonal skills.
Personnel selection is inclined to asking who should be given the available job opportunity given the available number of applicants, qualified and sometimes-experienced people. in modern days, where people have been educated in different areas, it is easy to find a job application filled with a hundreds of qualifies people; the work of the human selection team is to determine the mechanism of choosing the right candidate from the pool of applicants.
Despite the qualified people seeking the post, an organization is limited since it can only have only one or a few of the applicants, the dilemma that faces the human resources management is to seek to realize who has an upper hand among the qualified applicants.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The main aim of the process is to get the best out of the options available; its is an expensive process thus fine result will be of benefit to the organization (Smith
The Interpretative Journey in Ursula K. Le Guin’s The Left Hand of Darkness Essay essay help online free: essay help online free
Christine Cornell’s “The Interpretative Journey in Ursula K. Le Guin’s The Left Hand of Darkness” positions itself against two acknowledged factions which have reservations toward the gender issues as depicted in the book: scholarly critics of Le Guin’s masculine world, and college readers wary of the exclusive use of the masculine pronoun.
As an apologetic for Le Guin’s choices concerning the sexual landscape of the novel, Cornell’s essay attempts to rout critics on two major problems readers encounter with the book; first, that the world of Winter, and the novel as a whole, has been inexplicably stripped of women, and feminine influences have been largely demonized, and second, that the The Left Hand of Darkness is likewise inexplicably blanketed exclusively with the male pronoun.
Cornell approaches these problems with a sympathetic understanding of the novel’s protagonist, Genly Ai. Genly is himself male, and finding himself a lone sex-certain being on a planet of androgens, appears to resolve his own incomprehension through the application of the familiar he.
Beyond linguistic difficulties, his own biases run toward applauding the masculine and suspecting the feminine: Genly embraces the bureaucratic strictures of Orgoreyn on the one hand while “damning [the] effeminate deviousness” of Estraven’s shifgrethor-influenced, oblique communication, for example.
Yet Cornell rationalizes even the most obvious blights on Genly’s diplomatic report as reflective of his naivete, which is subsequently transformed through his travels and particularly through his relationship with Estraven.
Cornell postulates that the reader’s journey from naivete to holistic understanding mirrors that of Genly, whose masculine bias is transformed through a series of trials in communication with Estraven.
Much as the reader will likely find aversion to Genly’s masculinized narration, Genly is at first exasperated by Estraven’s circuitous and indirect speech. This impasse, which has great bearing on Genly’s comprehension of Winter as a whole, is finally crossed during their trek across the ice.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In recognizing the totality of Estraven’s nature – male and female – Genly, at last, sees Estraven as the person s/he is, and finds himself loving Estraven as he was not able to before. In Cornell’s adaptation of Wolfgang Iser’s theory of reader indeterminacy, Genly and the reader arrive at the end of a process of understanding the three steps of which are rejection, perception, and acceptance.
Cornell takes additional measures to justify the universal application of the male pronoun in order to reconcile readers to the novel. To use the female pronoun, she reasons, would have conjured images of Amazons all too familiar to Le Guin’s audience; the neuter, on the other hand, would have drastically affected the reader’s experience and imposed Genly’s final, integrative understanding even on his earliest narrative.
Given the manifest problems readers encounter, Cornell takes a markedly hagiographic tack, going so far as to argue for the exclusive use of the male pronoun where Le Guin herself later recanted on this approach. The objections to The Left Hand of Darkness, moreover, are ameliorated by a process of rejection to acceptance which mirrors Genly’s own.
The analogy is an imprecise one for two reasons. First, Genly’s initial appraisal of Winter sexuality isn’t so much conditioned by rejection as it is by ignorance of the female gender in favor of the male; second, the reader’s journey to acceptance is predicated on a retrospective sympathy for the male whitewashing, when no good reasons for such sympathy are in evidence.
The weaknesses in Cornell’s arguments lie in her selective dependence on Genly Ai as the source of masculinization. Were Genly a 19th-century male, his misogynistic or patriarchal biases would be normative, but we know Genly to be a citizen of a world of not only highly advanced technology but decidedly enlightened philosophy.
The Ekumen is voluntary, not coercive; communicative, not confrontational; mutually supportive rather than fragmentary or martial. It is in no uncertain terms a feminine society, a mystical more so than a political body, and the occlusion of Genly’s background is not only disingenuous; properly speaking, his background obviates the journey he is meant to take.
The dubious basis for this ubiquitous masculinity is far wider than Cornell would see it. While Cornell would tie Le Guin’s choice to Genly despite his antithetical background, it is plain to the reader than the whitewashing is systemic.
We will write a custom Essay on The Interpretative Journey in Ursula K. Le Guin’s The Left Hand of Darkness specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More One of Estraven’s narratives, for example, has him avoiding seduction by a spy in female kemmer; as this is one of the few outright episodes of a Winter inhabitant as woman, it is a less than favorable assessment of the sex.
Again, when Genly observes a Foretelling, two of the participants are a Pervert and a person in presumably hormone-induced female kemmer, without any commentary as to how the Pervert’s apparent harassment of the woman augments the Weaver’s vision.
Even more blatant masculine whitewashing is on display in the society of Winter itself. In defiance of Cornell’s assessment of Genly as responsible for projecting masculinity over the culture, Winter is in word of fact a society of trappers, prison guards, indentured laborers, factory workers, truck drivers, spies, bureaucrats, and politicians.
Given this list of labor-intensive and power-based trades, anyone might reasonably assume Winter is a society exclusively composed of men, and this throws into doubt Cornell’s belief that the use of the masculine pronoun merely reflects Genly’s masculinity.
Considering Genly’s feminine societal origins and the fact that the masculinization is not isolated to the narrator, but systemic, Cornell’s apologetics are insufficient to account for the problems readers and critics have voiced.
The problem seems to rest with Le Guin herself, who in Cornell’s own excerpts of her response to criticism is defensive and appears to interpret their comments as a misreading of the intent and content of the novel.
It may be that Cornell has transferred the real problem from Le Guin to Genly, and that in fact Le Guin has projected her own experience and contemporary gender landscape, both certainly fraught with sexism and patriarchy, onto the faraway world of Winter. In accounting for reader difficulties by this approach, Le Guin’s audience can appreciate the merits of the novel as well as its Earthly downfalls.
Cornell’s extraneous scaffolding, which acquits Le Guin by shifting culpability and asking the reader to come to accept the sexism of the book, discredits the simplicity and elegance of the original narrative, in which Estraven and Genly Ai arrived at an understanding between worlds through genuine communication.
Not sure if you can write a paper on The Interpretative Journey in Ursula K. Le Guin’s The Left Hand of Darkness by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More
Human Resource (HR) Management in Facilitating the Individual Adaptation Research Paper essay help online
Introduction The department of human resource (HR) is extremely important in the proper functioning of any given organization. This is because it controls and manages the most important resource: the human resource.
It is usually a tremendous challenge to HR managers to coordinate the activities of all employees in the running of the organization as one unit. This is because there are changes every now and then in terms of organization’s activities and policies and introduction of new employees.
The HR managers have to take up this role of orienting new employees to the organization for them to fit in effectively and the role of orienting the existing employees to new changes in the organization.
In doing this, the HR managers need to ensure that there is effective communication which will bring about cooperation and coordination among the employees and in relation to their superiors. Proper training which requires, patience as one deals with a diverse workforce is vital in facilitating individual adaptation to the new environment or the new changes (Christensen, 2006).
Validity Validity is the level to which a given study may answer scientifically the question/s it is set to answer by relating to the real word. The conclusions made after the end of a study should be connected to the study design. There are various types of validity. They include among others external, internal and construct validities.
External validity refers generalized conclusions. It is related to the actual real world studying whether for example a sample selected to study a given population is representative of that population. Internal validity on the other hand involves the cause relationship between the variables in a given study.
It involves studying the how dependent variables may be influenced by independent variables. Finally construct validity refers to concepts of a given constructs show or measure what they are said to be doing. It is measuring the strength of research tools like for instance questionnaires.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More These validities although different as has been described are all integrated in a research project. They should all conform to the research theory as this the central aspect of the research. In a research project, for instance you can not only concentrate on the external environment without considering the internal environment and in both you have to ensure that the tools used do measure up to attaining plausible results.
A major threat to external validity is determining whether the correct sample to represent the entire population has been selected. There could be biases also in selecting a representative sample of a population. If incorrect or non-representative sample is selected, then the whole research project may be jeopardized.
Construct validity may give wrong conclusions regarding a research tool. If for instance interviewing is carried out in place, where questionnaires were required could lead to problems in data collection. These among many other problems should be carefully addressed for a research project to be successful (Christensen, 2006).
Validity issues are vital in any research. For instance in studying the role of human resource management in facilitating individual adaptation of the employees, one has to ensure that a representative of data of both the managers and the employees is collected. You also have to determine which construct tool is the most effective in gathering of information as noted by Christensen (2006).
References Christensen, R. (2006). Roadmap to Succesful Strategic HR Management. New York : American Managemnt Association.
The Role of HR Management in Facilitating the Individual Adaptation of the Employees Research Paper essay help online: essay help online
Table of Contents Introduction
Maslow’s theory of need and Hierarchy
McClleland’s Need Theory
Job Design Theory
Introduction The role of HR management in facilitating the individual adaptation of the employees can be based on several theories. These can be educational, psychological, organizational and economic theories. In tackling this topic, this research paper describes Maslow’s theory, McClelland’s need theory, equity theory and job design theory.
Maslow’s theory of need and Hierarchy This is one of the main psychological theories of motivation postulated by Abraham Maslow. He perceived human needs to be hierarchical and observed that after a set of need ceases to be a motivator after it has been satisfied (Weihrich
Trust and Power in Strategic Supply Chains Research Paper best essay help: best essay help
A Mult-Theoretic Perspective on Trust and Power in Strategic Supply Chains What Are the Functions of Strategic Supply Chains as Sources of Competitive Advantage? The article under consideration is about the four main strategies which can be used in order to improve the strategic supply chain and cooperation between organizations. In this article, the authors touch upon numerous aspects in order to give clear and reasonable grounds of why the offered strategies are chosen.
From the very beginning, it is defined that strategic supply chains are such “chains whose members are strategically, operationally, and technologically integrated, underscored by long-term relations based on stability yet flexibility” (Ireland and Webb 2007, p.482). With the help of such definition, it becomes clear that any supply chain needs a certain strategy and some operations to be maintained on the proper level.
In the tree-diagram presented above, the main ideas and functions that are performed by the strategic supply chains are clearly identified. It is also mentioned why and how improvements need to be implied. Power and trust are considered to be the two main issues of these chains. They are characterized by numerous aspects such as trust in partners and situations and coercive and non-coercive types of power.
And what is more, the relations between power and trust have to be developed by means of four strategies which are described at the top of the tree. These strategies as well as concepts of power and trust are regarded as the central points of the article and the diagram.
The authors underline the importance of the strategies during the whole article and admit that “establishing an authority, forming a common supply chain identity, interlocking organizations trough the use of boundary spanners, and maintaining organizational justice” are the major steps which have to be taken to promote optimal use of power and trust under the certain circumstances each organization may face (Ireland and Webb 2007, p.494).
This diagram represents a clear picture of how the events are developed in the article and what aspects have to be highlighted to get an informative picture of strategic supply chains.
Reference List Ireland, RD
Impacts of Financial crisis on Bahrain Essay custom essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Impacts of Financial crisis on Bahrain
Introduction Rapid globalization of international markets has given rise to global crisis and emerging markets like that of Bahrain characterized with strong fundamentals attributed from sudden inflows and outflows of foreign investment has not been an exception.
Impacts of financial crisis on the country’s economy have accelerated debate within the mainstream of economics and many market analysts have devised economic stimulus plan to confront the crisis. Global Financial Crisis has provided valuable lessons to both regulators and financial industry hence the need for stronger regulatory frameworks and monetary policies.
Impacts of Financial crisis on Bahrain Financial crises that usually follow inflation often destroy large volume of wealth causing financial meltdowns. Although GCC countries are endowed with natural resources such as oil and petrochemical products, they are not shielded from the financial crisis. For example, the collapse of Lehman Brothers subjected the economy into unpredictable phase of financial crisis.
There were reports of increase in risk aversion in financial markets, as indicated by rise in risks premiums and steep fall in global stock markets. It is however, important to note that, a continuing period of low risks premiums could mean prolonged downturn of asset price inflation and devastate the economy of a nation which may subsequently reverberate beyond the country’s borders.
Collapse of Lehman brothers led to immediate liquidity in international financial markets and large bank hence deepening the current economic status of the country (AMEinfo 2009, online).
Further research to substantiate the impact of financial crisis on Bahrain suggest that other sectors of the economy such as financial services, tourism and real estate were affected as well. Some of the impacts included loss of sovereign wealth funds, decline in capital inflows, global trade, unstable oil prices and major investments projects were scaled back.
Since majority of Bahrain economic stimulus package was proposed to come from corporate earnings, AME info (2009, online) proposes that in order to mitigate the impacts of financial crisis, banking sectors will be required to recapitalization their funds and offer guarantees on deposits and to maximize exposure by publishing daily, monthly and quarterly reports on their liquidity positions.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Studies have consistently found that impacts of financial crisis are intertwined between there sectors of the economy that include; financial sector stability, key economic sectors and economic performance. The three dimensions are further divided into growth, inflation, external balance and public finance in measuring the extent of financial crisis.
In economic growth aspect of GCC countries, the global recession that hit the countries in 2009 resulted to a decline in real GDP rates by 3%. According to Markaz News (2010, online), Bahrain was anticipated to experience fiscal deficit of -2% of GDP in 2010 since most foreign investors pulled out of the capital markets and there were reports of decline in international reserves.
The Bahrain government however did step up by drawing contribution from reserves and external balance to stimulate the economy. In public finance sector, GCC countries recorded sharp decline in oil revenues which subjected Bahrain to risks of running budget deficit.
AMEinfo (2009, online) reports however indicated that the country high spending prior to the crisis and massive public investment programs depleted the country’s reserves hence making it vulnerable to any fiscal retrenchment.
Other non-financial that reported to be adversely affected by the financial crisis include real estates and tourism sectors. Real estates for instance recorded significant drop in demand and decline in prices during that period and GCC hotels on the other hand reported less revenue and lower occupancy rates.
Amidst the crisis, banks in emerging markets such as Bahrain should implement high standards of risks management offer incentive for adequate self-regulation, corporate governance and internal controls to prevent excess risks taking. The correction of this market margins would require Bahrain to undertake several reformatory measures such as regularity changes, corporate governance and transparency in the monetary system to attract foreign investment (AMEinfo 2009, online).
Impact on financial crisis on financial systems in Bahrain limited its credit growth and the banks inability to lend. On key economic sectors, the country recorded a sharp decline in oil and gases exports and other new investment projects have either been deferred or cancelled.
We will write a custom Essay on Impacts of Financial crisis on Bahrain specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The upstream projects were reported to put pressure on inflation because of the amount of materials and energy services required to put up the project. The country should try and use its future excessive capital in financing the underway projects such as the construction of energy production firms to increase the production capacity and boost the economy (AMEinfo 2009, online).
Since most Arab economies are dominated by family owned businesses, the financial crisis had huge impacts on these private businesses to their exposure to foreign markets. Azour quoted in AMEinfo (2009) stated that “Several family businesses are facing financial difficulties from deterioration in their asset quality, the increase of corporate risks, their lack of focus on core businesses, exposure to hard-hit sectors, and high levels of debt” (online).
In order to recover from the global crisis, GCC countries will be required to work together to recover its financial activities in oil demand by strengthening their fiscal policy and external balances.
Stimulus programs and policy actions towards economic diversification, adopt modern fiscal management infrastructures in investment and social reforms such as subsidy programs and labor policies that will encourage macro-financial stability. Azour also encourages GCC countries to prioritize private investments mostly in non-oil industries, service sectors and high-value industrial services to stimulate the economy.
Bahrain overdependence on foreign financing might have subjected to it to global crisis. Findings summarized by International Monetary Fund (2008, online) reported that banks in Bahrain borrowed from foreign banks to support their credit growth and the sudden inflows of cash might have greatly contributed to high rates of inflation in the country.
This is because inflation accelerated the inflow of capital into banks and which was later flushed out due to the global crisis making the economy liquidity strapped. It’s equally important to note that economic crises that usually follow inflation often destroy large volume of wealth causing financial meltdowns.
Conclusion In order for Bahrain economy to mitigate the impacts of financial crisis, economic stimulus plans such as investing in robust government spending and good external demands will be required in order to promote corporate economic growth. The country should also improve its regulatory structure and encourage foreign involvement to boost stability and enhance transparency in the banks monetary activities.
Lastly, banks should be encouraged to publish credible reports on annual, monthly and quarterly basis as a strategy to improve transparency on the flow of capital and attract foreign interest. Potential investors reviewing financial statements of the banks will have well informed knowledge of the company to invest in due to the comprehensive notes provided by the reports.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Impacts of Financial crisis on Bahrain by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Reference List AMEinfo 2009,’One year on:the GCC region’s post-economic crisis prospects’. Web.
International Monetary Fund 2008,’IMF Survey Magazine: Interview’. Web.
Markaz News 2010, ‘What to expect in 2010 for GCC Markets’. Web.
Alternative Dispute Resolution Essay writing essay help: writing essay help
Table of Contents Abstract
Abstract This essay elaborates An Alternative Dispute Resolution that I would apply among a group of learning members. For this situation, I identified mediation as the most appropriate ADR. Mediation is a framework or program specifically designed for solving disagreements between two or more people with the help of a volunteering third party, who is always an agreed choice of the conflicting members.
Because of its inherent characteristics, I found mediation to be the most appropriate for dispute resolution among learning members of the same class. The major goal of Mediation in Dispute solution is to provide a satisfactory solution to both aggrieved parties without compromising interests of any party. The rest of this essay elaborates more about mediation and gives a clause that learning members can use to resolve conflicts.
Introduction Dispute resolution is always part of daily life among members living, learning or working together. Alternative Dispute Resolution (ADR) involves solving conflicts between two or more people out of court (Totaro, 2008, p.15). Many ADRs do exist but it requires people to assess the conflict at hand before seeking the best ADR technique to use.
Clause Description The goal of mediation is to solve a dispute between two or more parties with the help of a mediator. The process of mediation is always informal and voluntary. This ADR is subject to disagreements between members of a learning team. It ensures that at the end of the process, both members are satisfied and without any feeling of negligence to any party.
Clause Design In its design, this clause has various requirements. First, a mediator, (one or more individuals), should be present. S/he must be neutral and is always a choice of the disagreeing class members. The mediator can talk to the parties separately or together. During the mediation process, the mediator’s role is to help the disagreeing members to adjust their demands and make an agreement that benefits both parties.
S/he listens to each party’s interests and helps them to reach a common ground. For effective working of this clause, the mediator should not impose solutions on the mediation process but should leave it to the disagreeing parties. This method is applicable for the entire course of study of such a group because no changes in learning group that can hinder its application. It only requires an agreement by both parties.
Conclusion If people implement it properly, mediation is a good way of solving conflicts between two or more members of a learning group. The mediator should be a choice of both members in disagreement and should always maintain neutrality. At the end, no party should feel shortchanged as consensus is the final element of a mediation process.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Reference Totaro, G. (2008). Avoid court at all costs. The Australian Financial Review, 5, 14-19.
Crisis Communication and Conflict Management in Health Care Environment Essay (Article) college essay help near me
Table of Contents Crisis Communication
Risk Management, Experience and Training
American health care organizations face unique challenges presented by crises and conflicts that pose risk to the attainment of the organization’s goals (Borkowski, 2011). Conflicts arise out of stressful and emotional encounters and form a natural part of relationships. Conflicts are necessary for organizational growth depending on their management.
In hospitals, the unexpected is always arising and personnel are always dealing with life-and-death issues that require most immediate actions and there are no provisions second trials. Health care organizations are social systems that involve people interacting with each other to preserve the health and personal integrity of patients.
Damaging crises may befall hospitals at any time. Disasters like staff-related disgrace immediately put the specific hospital on the limelight. Crisis communication determines the impact of the crisis on a health care organization.
Crisis communication and response have a large significance in restoring the organization’s status and their effectiveness depends on skills of the crisis communicators and their understanding of crisis management (Braun, Wlneman, Finn, Barbera, Schmaltz,
Global and local organizational networks Report (Assessment) essay help site:edu
To enhance training and effective leadership in an organization, leaders have the main role of creating frameworks and environments that can enhance team learning. Learning is a continuous process whereby human resource intellectualism is improved via direct and indirect mechanisms. Learning facilitates products development and hatches invention and innovativeness within an organization.
Team learning takes the shape of two main dimensions: to coach and to mentor staffs coaching involve the daily routines where leaders and managers interact with their staffs and help them recognize their talents and nature them (Crother-Laurin, 2006).
As much as managers have the primal role of guiding their teams to the attainment of an organizations goals, they should realize that every step they make has a lesson that it give to the employees; they should always act in good faith of the company and encourage innovation, teams work and good human relations.
When it comes to mentorship, it is a delicate training programs that are made by the management to address different areas that they feel that the organization has a deficit: training, mentoring and to some extent coaching offers and employee the basic knowledge required in doing something, however they do not build to positive results.
To enhance team learning, management should go further than coaching and training, it should offer employees a chance to face challenges; this will enhance teamwork and team spirit.
When a company has well managed team learning system then it assists in:
New entreats appreciate the culture of the team (knowledge of organizational culture and quicker adoption of change.
Leads to improvement of processes and products
Creates orchestrate teams and high team spirit (Parker, 2009).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Zellmer-Bruhn and Gibson Article In the article, by Zellmer-Bruhn and Gibson, called “Multinational Organization Context: Implications For Team Learning And Performance,” the writers are of the opinion that MNC (multinationals) have a chance of exploring getting higher talents, experiences and intellectual capacity form the diversity of their employees.
However, the approach they take to tap the human assets is what determines whether they will attain the objectives of an effective team learning strategy. The article is of the view that organizations that encourage and emphasis on knowledge management policy and respect for diversity, are more likely to build teams that are open to learn.
The organizations have an emphasis on task-organizational culture and their teams are more goal-oriented teams that they are leader-oriented; however, they do not disregard the role that leaders play in enhancing team earning.
On the other hand, those MNCs that adopt policies of globalization culture are less likely to grow team-learning spirit within their organizations; the writers are of the opinion that learning take place with respect among people and respect for each other’s opinion.
Expatriates are also addressed in the article where the writers advise that they should be well managed and integrated in the culture and believes of the community that they are working in, doing this will facilitate the interaction and transfer of knowledge from and to the team members. The writers feel that globalization has come at the right time to aid development of talents, knowledge and to enhance innovation and invention.
At the end of the article, the writers are of the opinion that multinationals should maximize internal team processes and strengthen knowledge management policies. MNCs should not emphasize on global integration; however, they should focus on improving task performance and interpersonal relations (Zellmer-Bruhn and Cristina, 2006).
References Crother-Laurin, C. ,2006. Effective Teams: A Symptom of Healthy Leadership. The Journal for Quality and Participation, 29(3), p. 4.
We will write a custom Assessment on Global and local organizational networks specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Parker, G. ,2009.Team Leadership: 20 Proven Tools for Success. New Jersey: Human Resource Development Press.
Zellmer-Bruhn, M., and Cristina, G.,2006. Multinational Organization Context: Implications for Team Learning and Performance. Academy of Management Journal, 49(3), PP.501–518.
Hotel Industry: Human Resource Management Report (Assessment) custom essay help: custom essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Introduction In most hotels, employees work for six or seven days in every week. These policies are applied by the majority of the employers in the hotel industry, despite the adverse impacts of this arrangement on the working environment. In the contemporary business world, there have been changes in the human resource management due to various concerns.
In every organization, an employee is a very important asset, as he/she has a significant impact on the productivity of the organization, as well as its profitability (Alleyne, 2006). However, the productivity of employees will significantly be determined by how they are managed.
Discussion The policies used in the hotel industry in managing the length of time employees work can significantly affect the entire working environment. It can have a significant impact on the social lives of the employees.
This is because the more the number of days an employee works in an organization, the less time he or she has for interaction with other people. Consequently, this can affect the entire employment environment. According to Peper et al (2005), working for a longer period without having enough off time can also affect the employee’s career in the long term.
In the hotel industry, it has been a tradition for employees to work for six or seven days per week (Lockyer, 2007). This has denied employees a chance to socialize and interact with their families as well as other employees.
This has been used as a strategy to maximize profits as they try to reduce the operational costs. Many hotels have been clinging on these arrangements without making any efforts to balance the benefits against drawbacks of having their employees work for many days in a week.
There is a need to consider organizational change in the modern business world in order for any organization to retain its productivity in the competitive business world (Netta, n.d). This consideration is of great importance in making such decisions on the duration of working of each employee.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In the contemporary business world, things have changed in the hotel industry, as more leaders realize the importance of allowing employees more time to rest. By giving employees enough time to rest, they get motivated thus leading to improvement in efficiency (Anonymous, 1998).
Many hotels are now having their employees work for five days in every week. However, this threatens the profitability of the hotel in question since it will be forced to hire more workers to compensate for those having days off. Bearing in the mind the level of competition in the hotel industry, it may sound uneconomical to have the employees work for five days in a week.
However, the hotel management can recover on this by letting employees work for longer hours. At the end of the day, employees will be able to work for almost the same number of hours per week and still have two days to stay with their family members.
Conclusion In conclusion, this discussion has clearly shown that employee management is of great importance to a hotel industry. In the hotel industry, employees need to be motivated in order to provide good services to the customers. Reduction of the number of days employees work in the hotel per week can significantly improve their productivity.
They will be able to get more time to stay with their families and also engage in other social interactions. This improves on the employees’ social life and hence they will be able to engage in a productive interaction with other employees.
Reference List Alleyne, P. (2006). Approaches to HRM in the Barbados hotel industry, International Journal of Contemporary Hospitality Management, Vol. 18 Iss: 2, pp.94 – 109.
Anonymous. (1998). Importance of Motivation. Retrieved from https://www.managementstudyguide.com/importance_of_motivation.htm
We will write a custom Assessment on Hotel Industry: Human Resource Management specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Lockyer, T. (2007). The International Hotel Industry: Sustainable Management. New York: Routledge.
Netta, L. (N.d.). The Role Of Organizational Culture In Organizational Change – Identifying A Realistic Position For Prospective Is Research. Finland: University of Oulu, Finland.
Peper, P. et al. (2005). Flexible working and organizational change: the integration of work and personal life. Cheltenham: Edward Elgar Publishing.
Psychological Types Essay college essay help online
Carl Gustav Jung’s Humanmetrics Typology Test assesses individual’s personality type. His theories are about the cognitive functions, the rational or judging function that includes thinking and feeling, and the irrational or perceiving functions that focus on sensing and intuition. This is a self-assessment tool that helps an individual in planning and selecting a career based on skills, interest, values, and personality.
Answering the questions in Jung Typology Test helps to discover the individual’s strength preferences and identify the certain fields that will help shape the person’s outlook in life and in choosing the right career.
Jung’s Typology test uses three criteria’s. The first criterion is extroversion-introversion. Extrovert is set to express about the external world that contrasts with the introvert, which directs on the internal world and concerns with one’s own life. The second criterion is sensing-intuition.
Sensing defines how the person accepts the information that directly comes from an external source while intuition is how the person conceives the information from within. The last criterion is thinking-feeling. Thinking is processing information based on logic while those who prefer to be affective empathize with the situations and considers the needs of the people in the environment.
The last criterion is judging- perceiving by Isabel Briggs-Myers. Judging is how an individual structured enough to adhere to his plans. Perceiving, on the other hand, prefer to have flexibility and spontaneity in completing the task and on how to improve such a task.
Based on Jung Typology Test, acquiring the following personality scores consider an individual as ENFJ. A 56% in strength is moderately expressed extrovert. They seek excitement and loves social interactions. They appreciate people and the focus is on them.
A 62% in intuitive, is as distinctively expressed intuitive personality. The power to influence people and the opportunity to offer solutions that will benefit other people in the organization is the main goal.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More With the percentage of 62% in the third criteria, regards the individual as a distinctly expressed feeling personality. The willingness to give everything for the betterment of the humanity is a big factor for this type of personality. It is very apt to say that the need to control one’s emotion is important if one considers a career in counseling.
A 44% in the last criteria shows a moderately expressed judging personality and signifies the tendency to organize schedules and engagements ahead of time to keep up with the commitments.
In general ENFJ is friendly, outgoing, and has good communication skills geared toward finding potentials in others. They value people’s sentiments and get satisfaction in helping others and are natural role models.
Career wise, they have drawn to academia, entertainment, religious groups, and envisioned mentor. They have the talent to influence groups and can take leadership roles because of their verbal ability.
Serving in the military concerns not only about the physical tasks, but it also involves the social aspect of life. Because of the love for people, they find ways to reach out to them and making sure that they are not only confined to the four corners of the room.
They will make a good counselor and a teacher. The interest in the joy of connecting with people can inspire individuals to develop their potentials. The leadership status that they have is a clear presentation of what ENFJ can do.
History of Hockey in Canada Essay a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
History of Hockey in Canada
Importance of Hockey for Canada
Introduction Sports have been one of the main aspects through which some countries have gained their recognition. Some countries are found to be good in certain sports activity with respect to others and this is usually used to give them identity worldwide. For example in athletics and especially long races, Kenya has been seen to dominate. This is still observed in hockey as Canada has always performed better than other countries.
Hockey is commonly regarded as the national game in Canada, and the importance of this sport is rather high. On the one hand, this defines the national identity of the Canadians and forms a healthy habit for those who admire this kind of sport.
Actually, hockey is a serious reason for national pride in Canada, and there are some instances in history, when the hockey background defined the national status of Canada in international negotiations. The aim of the paper is to describe the significance of this sport for Canada from the perspective of national identity, as well as its effects on international relations. 1
Hockey Hockey is an example of a game which is both indoor and outdoor and whose popularity is high all over the world. This game is usually played by two teams who usually try to score each other. The game can be played by people of both genders. Most commonly, the game is played by teams consisting of one gender although the two genders can be incorporated together in one team.
The game can be played on various play grounds such as ice and natural grass among other. The field on which the game is played or the location such as beach usually gives rise to the various types of hockey. The playing of this game usually takes into account the physical challenge such as disabilities and giving such people a chance to participate in it.
History of Hockey in Canada The hockey game was found to originate in some countries in Asia as well as northern Africa. In these countries the game was played using the locally available materials to the residents such as sticks. In Canada the game is believed to have been brought in by the European colonies.
It is believed that they are the one who took field hockey to Canada. In the 19th century some residents of Canada were found to play a game on the ice. This game has evolved and is recognized as ice hockey in the modern days. This thus shows that this game originated in some parts of Canada.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Toward the end of the 18th century, the game had attracted some followers who even included the queen. Due to the affection to the game, a trophy was bought. By then the infrastructure in Canada was not well established.
The improvement of the infrastructure acted as a great weapon for the spread of hockey to other parts of Canada especially the west. As time passed by it was observed that most of the people were attracted to ice hockey instead of field hockey.
In the awake of the 19th century, the number of players in a hockey match from one team had reduced from nine to seven and there were some modification on the rule and regulations governing the game.
The game had improved with the use of nets being present. This helped to avoid conflicts on whether there had been some scoring in some cases. It also allowed efficient time management by during the game by regulating the rolling of the ball after scoring.
Actually, the aspect of the root source of hockey in Canada gives rise to lots of discussions and arguments as there is no definite answer where hockey was played first in Canada. The clubs appeared in different times in different cities, and each notable hockey city, such as Montreal, Halifax, or Kingston claims to be the first. This thus brings difficulty in understanding the exact origin of hockey in Canada.
To ensure good governance and development of the game in Canada on the already established clubs such as Montreal, an overseeing body equipped with the rules and regulations was established.
The association which was known as Amateur Hockey Association of Canada initially covered a smaller area of Canada but with time it expanded and was able to cover the other parts. This helped in maintaining uniformity in the games played by the different clubs.
We will write a custom Essay on History of Hockey in Canada specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More To increase motivation to the players and ensure the continuous development of the game, some leagues were introduced. These leagues gave the players a chance to gauge their fitness in the game so that they would make the necessary improvements. This was also attributed to the continuous changes provided to the rules governing the game.
In Canada, the game was divided into two groups; professional and amateurs. In the recent times there has been improvement in the hockey with great attention coming from minor teams. This has attracted more young people into the game.
The presence of different financing organizations has enabled the continuous advancement in management as well as field performance in Canada. Currently, the central organization is Hockey Canada, that was formed in 1968, which was created in order to amateur, university and professional leagues. 2
Due to the establishment of the game at early stages of development of the children, they grow up being well equipped with the necessary skills required. This usually places Canada at a better position to compete with other countries. There are some institutions that usually train the children when they are as young as 12 years. In such cases there are challenges that usually face the development of hockey field.
At that age the children and the parents are usually attached to each other too much. This thus brings the inconvenience incase the children is to be taken to a different place for the training. These problems have been there since the establishment of these academies. To overcome it there have been continuous education on the parents.
Importance of Hockey for Canada The significance of this game for Canadians was clearly shown by astronaut Marc Garneau, who took his hockey puck and stick with him. This revealed the fact that hockey is valued all over the country, and few Canadians stay ignorant when their favorite teams are involved into ice duels.
Although the game is mainly played during winter, it can be played throughout the year with some games taken in-door. The game provides recreation to all the people irrespective of their age. To avoid the occurrence of injuries, proper clothing is used by the players.
Recreation is good for both mental and physiological relaxation. Thus this form of relaxation usually has more good returns than one could actually quantize. It is observed that people who do not always spend all their time working but usually allocate some to some form of recreation are usually healthier. On the other side playing hockey is a form of physical exercise which is still very important in human health.
Not sure if you can write a paper on History of Hockey in Canada by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Hockey is found to play a significant role on the social life of people. When there are hockey games to be played, there are so many spectators who avail themselves. When these people come together, they usually chat with each other on issues concerning the game as well as other spheres of life. This usually improves interaction between them.
The people usually get a chance to make various friends who are usually useful in various sectors of life in future. In the case of international games, the interaction between the various states players and other stakeholders are crucial in improving international relations. The various players learn about the others and their interaction are gain more knowledge on different economic and social aspects.
Several facts are given by Holman (2009)3. Hence, it is stated that the six central NHL teams generate up to $ 200 million annually in taxes for the government. NHL teams have improved the reputations of their home towns. These taxes are used to develop other sectors of the country.
This leads to the development of other departments which are either directly affiliated to the game or not. When the events of hosting such tournament are in a country, the country usually benefit from improved tourism as well as business activities between the residents and the visitors.
The growth and development of hockey in Canada has created a lot of job opportunities. These include the large number of players, coaches as well as the support team. The resources received by these people usually assist others either directly or indirectly. This enables the citizens to meet their needs.
The excess money is usually invested and is usually very useful in the economic development of the country. Up to eleven thousand people are employed in the sphere of hockey. This has led to the incorporation of hockey in school education. Children are studying the history of hockey in schools, and most schools have skating rinks for physical education lessons.
Hockey is a lifestyle for Canadians, as it is everywhere 24/7. As Jenish (1998, p. 312)4 stated:
Hockey has influenced the lives of Canadians. Love it or hate it, you cannot escape it. At sunrise, the morning paper and radio broadcasts provide all Canadian homes with information and statistics on the game played the night before.
Television allows fans to watch games, sometimes with a better view of the action than if they had been there themselves. Drivers should be on the lookout for the many young people playing hockey in the street. Even our language has borrowed expressions from hockey, for example, when someone is retiring they are said to be hanging up their skates.
The effect of hockey on international relations is associated with reputations of international NHL teams. Nevertheless, the most notable international event in hockey world is the summit series in 1972. These events exceeded the sports frames, as politics was also involved into the contests. The cold war circumstances could not allow this event to be held in precisely sport frames.
Therefore, the contests were regarded as the necessity to protect the reputation of the States. Hence, inconveniences, messes, and even conflicts were involved into the course of the series: arrest of Soviet team’s equipment, mess in training schedule of the Canadian team, suspects in overseeing and overhearing the hotel rooms, etc.
Nevertheless, both sides showed perfect techniques and strategies, and, in spite of the loss of the Soviet team in the series, the reputation of the Soviet Union increased essentially. Hence, as Gruneau and Whitson (1993, p. 45)5 emphasized: “Canadians went from scoffing at their [Soviet] antiquated equipment and strange training methods and practices, to admiration for their talent and conditioning.”
The contest in general was rather tense; nevertheless, players did their best from both sides. Actually, this was the contest which was followed by the entire world. It was a unique series. It was unique by the subject: the results of the contest that lasts for 480 minutes, or 28 800 seconds of pure gaming time had been defined by the 34 seconds till the final siren of the eighth and the last match of the series.
This was the hockey of the highest level. Every duel of Canadian and Soviet teams collected nearly 100 million watchers in Soviet Union, and up to 25 million in Canada and the USA, let alone several millions of fans all over Europe. 6
A lot has been already written about that series, and a lot has never been, and, probably, will never be written or stated.
Anyway, this series was of great significance for Canada and for the USSR, and, regardless of the victory in the series, Canadians felt that there was a worthy contestant for them in the game that was considered purely Canadian. The clubs should be funded to ensure continuous development competition encouraged through trophies as it usually leads to continuous development.
In order to ensure the continuous growth and development of hockey in Canada, there should be good cooperation between the stakeholders. The children should be taught the game from early age to ensure that they have good experience when they grow up.
Conclusion Finally, it should be stated that the actual importance of this game is defined by Canadians themselves. They adore hockey and that is why they attribute so much value to it. Kids are growing in the atmosphere of love to hockey, and do not mention how they start loving it themselves.
The evolution of the hockey in Canada has been good and the game yield good results to the country currently and still shows good prospects for the future. The good infrastructure and the presence of good management by the hockey organization have contributed significantly to the continuous evolvement and development of the game since the 18th century.
Annotated Bibliography Gruneau, Richard S., and David, Whitson. Hockey night in Canada: sport, identities, and cultural politics. Toronto: Garamond Press, 1993.
Hockey night is the research and memories dedicated to the hockey history and hockey destiny of Canada. Considering the fact that identity is the key value of hockey for all of Canadians, the author of the book aims at describing the attitude towards hockey, as well as its significance for Canada and its citizens.
Holman, Andrew C. Canada’s game: Hockey and identity. Montreal al: McGill-Queen’s University Press, 2009.
Hockey is the number one thing that is associated with Canada. That is why Andrew Holman is aimed at defining the key reasons of Canadian identity, and explains why it is associated with hockey. It is impossible to imagine that Canada will stop playing hockey, therefore, the book is written in order to give the idea of its importance.
Jenish, D’Arcy, and Michael Benedict. Canada on ice: 50 years of great hockey. Toronto: Viking, 1998.
History of hockey in Canada is the additional reason for pride. It was invented in Canada, the first game was played in Canada, and Canada is regarded as the country of Hockey geniuses. Consequently, it will be a shame for the entire country if Canada loses its top ranking in the world.
Macintosh, Donald, Thomas Bedecki, and C. E. S. Franks. Sport and politics in Canada: federal government involvement since 1961. Kingston: McGill-Queen’s University Press, 1987.
Cold War was a period of total interference of politics and security services into every sphere of life. Hockey was not an exception, especially when it became the ring for defining the top ranking between USSR and Canada. Donald Macintosh describes the history of federal control over hockey since 1961.
Macintosh, Donald, and David Whitson. The game planners: transforming Canada’s sport system. Montreal: McGill-Queen’s University Press, 1990.
Sport system needs to be evolving in order to challenge the circumstances. Therefore, evolution of hockey system in Canada is of particular importance, as it has been developing since the creation of Amateur league in 1914, and lasts till nowadays.
Pagnucco, Frank. Heroes: Stars of hockey’s golden era. Scarborough, Ont.: Prentice-Hall Canada, 1985.
Golden era of hockey is the reason for nostalgic memories for most Canadians, and not only Canadians. In fact, this was the epoch of extensive hockey development, as the team had a worthy contestant.
Footnotes 1 Pagnucco, Frank. Heroes: stars of hockey’s golden era. Scarborough, Ont.: Prentice-Hall Canada, 1985.
2 Macintosh, Donald, Thomas Bedecki, and C. E. S. Franks. Sport and politics in Canada: federal government involvement since 1961. Kingston: McGill-Queen’s University Press, 1987.
3 Holman, Andrew C. Canada’s game: hockey and identity. Montreal al: McGill-Queen’s University Press, 2009.
4 Jenish, D, and Michael Benedict. Canada on ice: 50 years of great hockey. Toronto: Viking, 1998.
5 Gruneau, Richard S., and David Whitson. Hockey night in Canada: sport, identities, and cultural politics. Toronto: Garamond Press, 1993.
6 Macintosh, Donald, and David Whitson. The game planners: transforming Canada’s sport system. Montreal: McGill-Queen’s University Press, 1990.
Smart Growth in Jersey Essay custom essay help: custom essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Origins of Smart Growth in New Jersey
Major Management and Political Issues of the Case
Major Interests Involved
Introduction Devolution of development to localities and regions is a process that has been taking place for a considerable period of time in various countries led by the United States. Ideas of decentralizing development to locals and regions has been largely informed by the reaffirmation of liberal democracy values and ideals following demise of the cold war in 1990s.
The notion of free enterprise expresses the idea behind intensive devolution of development, that is, the belief, that people should be at liberty to develop as they wish through free trade and free exchange of goods and ideas Somerville (2011). Free development of people and communities has however raised concerns about protection of our environment from adverse effects of our socioeconomic activities.
The concerned authorities have thus attempted to come up with strategies that can help in safeguarding our core natural resources from the negative impacts of our socioeconomic activities.
Politicians too have been on the front line in striving towards coming up with strategies that can mitigate negative impacts of our activities upon the natural resources of our states. This task is a case review on the article titled “The Struggle over Smart Growth in New Jersey”
Origins of Smart Growth in New Jersey According to Kennedy School of Government (2011) development strategists of twentieth century endorsed the idea of directing development into regional cities, suburbs, restraining the expansion of sprawl and safeguarding farmlands and natural resources. These ideas were christened smart growth.
Smart growth ideas were largely informed by the urgent need to promote development while at the same time protecting the natural resources from excessive degradation especially within the cities and suburbs.
While running for the governorship in New Jersey in 2001democrat James E.McGreeevey understood the idea of smart growth as a potential solution to the adverse effects of suburban development that had eroded natural environments, had brought decay of the urban centers and had led to an increase in property taxes.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More McGreevey also perceived the idea of smart growth as political opportunity and went ahead to campaign for New Jersey Governor’s seat and won Kennedy School of Government (2011).The school also notes that the ideas behind smart growth has a long history going back to the 1920s.
Major Management and Political Issues of the Case After his election to the governorship of New Jersey there was a brief stopping in the progress of his smart growth ideas. However, he began to get back his momentum for smart growth towards the end of year 2003 aiming to restrict development in the farms, mountains, lakes and in northwestern Highlands.
Kennedy School of Government (2011) points out that it was socioeconomic factors that helped to put smart growth on the political agenda in New Jersey. For instance, factors such increase in traffic congestion called for a change on New Jersey’s urban roads.
Management wise New Jersey is known as one of several states that put a lot of effort on smart growth initiatives from a state level Wiewel and Knaap (2005). Wiewel and Knaap (2005) argue that New Jersey’s plan has its foundations in the state plan which illustrates growth management needs for New Jersey State which is the most densely populated in US.
The year 2001 state plan was particularly initiated as a response to the dilapidated economy and quality of life in urban centers, increased traffic congestion, degradation of natural resources and loss of open space Wiewel and Knaap (2005).It is against this background that Democrat James E.McGreeevey was elected the governor of New Jersey in year 2001.
As governor of the state and knowing too well that the residents of New Jersey urgently wanted a solution for the above mentioned problems McGreevey embraced the smart growth as a solution to those problems. However, he was to face fierce opposition from other stakeholders in his bid to implement his ideas of smart growth through legislation Knaap (2007).
New Jersey’s state plan is its version of a statewide smart growth initiative through which it mobilizes communities to develop more compact, mixed-use designs that protect the environment and provide for more efficient infrastructure systems while at the same time allowing envisaged growth to take place Wiewel and Knaap (2005).
We will write a custom Essay on Smart Growth in Jersey specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Major management and political issues regarding New Jersey’s case of struggle with smart growth revolves around the efforts made by governors like McGreevey in ensuring that his state’s development legislation and plans remained safeguarded and the interests of other stakeholders including developers, lawmakers, environmentalists as well as his political opponents.
For instance, Salmore and Salmore (2008) argue that the Smart Growth Act given McGreevey was dismissed by his opponents as “fast track”. Environmentalists were equally unhappy with Sierra Club state chapter dismissing Smart Growth Act by McGreevey as a bad bill.
Major Interests Involved Major interests involved in this case revolve around the efforts of various stakeholders including state authorities, developers, environmentalists, lawyers among others.
On one hand the state was concerned about safeguarding environment from adverse economic activities through state plan and further legislation that would make smart growth its part while on the other hand other stake holders are concerned about protecting their interests from legislation deemed bad and unrealistic in relation to their development interests.
Reference List Kennedy School of Government. (2011). The struggle Over Smart Growth in New Jersey.
Knaap, G. (2007). Incentives, regulations and plans: the role of states and nation-states in smart growth planning. New York: Edward Elgar Publishing Edward Elgar Publishing.
Salmore, B. G.,
Company Analysis: AGL Energy’s Risk Management with Reference to ISO 31000 Essay essay help online free
Table of Contents Introduction
AGL Energy’s Risk Management Methodology
Introduction The ISO 31000 is a set of standards that govern the implementation of the process of risk management across different organizational functions, projects, and other activities (Broadleaf Capital International, n.d.). Accordingly, these standards are designed to offer the best practices and guidelines to all activities related to risk management in an organization.
Here, the ISO 31000 standards guide the process of developing and sustaining different frameworks related to risk management as shown in figure 1 below. In figure 1, it is worth noting that the process of developing and sustaining a good risk management framework involves five major steps whose objectives include:
Emphasis on continuous process improvement,
Provision of comprehensive and acceptable standards of responsibility relative to risks, risk treatment duties, and risk controls,
Alignment of all decision making processes to adequate consideration of the risks involved and application of the process of risk management within all organizational operations,
Continuous communication within and without the organization,
Continuous reporting of risks and the risk management tasks enacted, and
Making risk management the center of all organizational management processes.
Source: (Broadleaf Capital International, n.d.).
Furthermore, the steps illustrated in figure 1 above play a pivotal role in the development and sustainability of a risk management framework such as the one described in figure 2 below.
Source: (Broadleaf Capital International, n.d.).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Thus, the ISO 31000 standards provide different organizations with a practical framework in the examination of all the existing approaches required to develop and sustain a healthy risk management process (Broadleaf Capital International, n.d.).
As a result, this essay reviews the risk management methodology employed by AGL Energy. Additionally, the essay looks at how the process of risk management in AGL Energy is aligned to the ISO 31000 standards.
AGL Energy’s Risk Management Methodology AGL Energy is a leading organization in the operation and development of renewable energy products such as hydro, wind, solar, geothermal, biomass, and landfill gases (AGL Energy Limited, 2011). In this line of business, AGL views risks as part of the internal and external functions of the organization, and thus it is committed to effective management of risks across all operating business environments.
Relative to ISO 31000 standards, risk management in AGL Energy is an inherent function of the management processes (AGL Energy Risk Policy, 2010). Consequently, the organization has developed an effective, fully structured, and consistent policy that describes the objectives and responsibilities of the management processes regarding risk management.
AGL Energy’s policy statement states that the organization is committed to entrenching effective risk management practices into all organizational functions, processes, and operations (AGL Energy Limited, 2011). This policy ensures that consistency, effectiveness, and accountability are maintained in decision making and management practices.
Therefore, the risk management policy within AGL Energy aims at promoting and integrating risk management in all business strategies, insurance, specialist risk functions, and general governance processes (AGL Energy Risk Policy, 2010). Additionally, the policy ensures consistent and transparent assessment and management practices across the organization.
Moreover, the policy recognizes the contribution of external factors and uncertainties in all business strategies and operations.
We will write a custom Essay on Company Analysis: AGL Energy’s Risk Management with Reference to ISO 31000 specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Finally, the policy enables the organization to take note that timely, effective, and accurate communication, review, reporting, and monitoring of risks entail timely warning mechanisms, provision of assurance to stakeholders, and provision of a sound platform for organizational growth (AGL Energy Risk Policy, 2010).
Furthermore, AGL Energy’s risk management policy sets out the responsibilities of the AGL Board, the Audit and Risk management Committees, the Group Audits, the Group Risk
The Adoption of Feminist Doctrine in Canada Essay essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu
Political dissension has taken place in Canada throughout history. Various movements, from liberalism to conservatism through socialism, have practiced this dissent. Although politics in Canada have been male-dominated, women have not been left behind.
Radical feminist standardized norms have found their way into state politics under the umbrella of different coalition organizations, including the NAC and the Action Groups that are composed of women (Andrew and Tremblay 22).
However, there have always been arguments opposed to women’s movements. Radical, social, and liberal feminists have stood their ground, arguing that if any societal change is to be achieved in Canada then there must be a change in ways of life as well as ways of thought. Historically, Canada was designed to be the country where the first feminist revolution was bound to take place.
The country has regularly witnessed the emergence of feminist movements and feminist ideas. The idea of feminism has been formed here since time immemorial, though it was connected then with issues of liberalism.1 Canadian women’s routes through power structures and politics are not smooth at all.
Women in Canada have been marginalized for a long time; thus, it has not been possible to use small groups in the political arena where there has been a need for the considerations of collaborative structures. At the same time, radical feminists in Canada have rejected already-existing authority structures.
The term feminist, as presented in this discussion, means the group of women who view discrimination as the major contributor to the political system. This has been enhanced by inequality, even though in the fight against discrimination, women have found their way into the political system.
The term politics is broad in its definition, based on the fact that it goes beyond political gatherings and parties and the law-making structure. The following discussion is inclusive of the feminist power structure in Canada.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More To start with, it is important to look at the historical background with regards to feminism (women) power, structure, and politics in Canada. Current liberal feminism comes from the systematic coercion of women in Canada, as women were regulated to the domestic sphere.
The social patriarch forced women to dominate at home; thus, there was no room for them to go public in power or politics. The liberal theory in which feminist ideology is rooted comprises liberal and feminist ideas. Social feminism aims to offer women social roles that were initially designated exclusively for men. Finally, radical feminism suggests that women play greater role in organizations.
However, at present, social and radical theories have fused into a single entity.2 In the 1960s, feminist activities in Canada gained forward motion in reference to social modification when they emphasized the obliteration of the so-called patriarchal rule structure.
Because of the adoption of feminist doctrine in Canada, the women’s movement led to an increase in legislative representation in family dynamics as well as to their reconfigurations.3
There were no such expectations of the re-emergence of the women’s movement in the 1960s with regards to political stability in addition to Canada’s prosperous post-war economic status. Traditionally, there had been a feeling of security if just one woman was found in the federal legislative body.
Feminist theories—including liberal, socialist, and radical—have played a significant role in Canadian women’s politics. The structure of these three theories is similar, even though their methodologies happen to be different.
All of them have common goals of improving the social status of Canadian women, economic progression, and the political arena of women. Liberal feminist theory is based on the promotion of the freedom that is supposed to be enjoyed by all women, as well as equality, which should be achieved by all autonomously.
We will write a custom Essay on The Adoption of Feminist Doctrine in Canada specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In this theory, sexual discrimination is not at all acceptable. It becomes difficult for women to pursue individual self-interest because they are denied equal rights. Even though liberal feminists have put great effort into freedom for women, they are slightly less meticulous by the fact that these feminist still hold the idea on all political decisions being made within the official political process as prescribed by the Canada constitution.
Liberal theory does not see the need for the change or modifications in the decision-making structures affected by women’s inclusion or equality. Therefore, there is a room that is created by this theory where men were to have more room in the social structures for any feminist change to occur in the female counterparts.
Decision-making structures and law formation were exclusively in men’s hands, which led to the continual governance of women. Socialist theory came into existence to address the inadequacies in liberal feminist theory.
Socialist theory is the second feminist theory with a big part to play in Canadian power, structure, and politics. Socialist theory is based on the argument that women need to attain economic means as well as power, so as to attain the goals of political liberalism. Women in Canada have experienced, and still experience, oppression, even though change has come about as a result of the efforts of feminist movements.
They experience alienation, especially in the work force, have jobs subordinate to those of men, and provide domestic labor as housewives. Socialist feminists argued that there was a need for women to enter the public sphere as much as they carried the greater part of the private sphere.
Domestic labor does not provide monetary compensation; therefore, social changes were needed. The social changes would provide substitutes for the capitalist production and the construct of the family setup. This position led to the manifestation of a third theory, radical feminism, which agreed with socialist feminist analysis of women’s socioeconomic status.
Radical feminist theory was spawned as a result of the disillusionment created in politics. Women came to realize that they were being exploited for sexual purposes. According to radical feminists, what was referred as private and individual was not just private; it was also political. This was an attempt to signify the ways in which individual experiences of Canadian patriarchal family structure disadvantaged women.
These experiences included rape, wife abuse, and gender stereotyping. Even though radical feminists put great effort into what is referred as “the personal made public,” the Canadian regime could not allow any sort of public intervention in the case of rape or even sexual abuse, which happened mostly at the family level.
Not sure if you can write a paper on The Adoption of Feminist Doctrine in Canada by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Socialist theory focuses on the politics of daily life in the same manner as the radical feminist notion of private spheres. This sexual analysis differs altogether from liberal theory.
The daily experiences that Canadian women went through within the family, such as rape and wife abuse, perpetuated more oppression. The argument for maintaining privacy within the family protected the family politically from undergoing any scrutiny.
Radical feminists, however, were determined to bring up domestic violence in politics. Men held the legally supported power to control women’s labor, as well as other social powers. Radical feminists felt that there was a need to overturn these powers.
Many similarities can be drawn between feminist theories and the current liberal democracy. What is meant by liberal democracy is a structure that is referred to as representative democracy, where elected representatives hold decisive powers that are moderated constitutionally. In the constitutional setup, there is more emphasis on promoting individual liberties as well as minority rights and equality.
Based on this description of liberal democracy, it holds more of qualities in the state of promoting the minority tyranny which the above three theories emphasized.
The ultimate ideal, common to both liberal democracy and feminist theories, is the desire to achieve all rights of life and freedom with the promotion of dignity and a considerable moral worth to all. This idea is based on the fact that liberalist principles in both theories are not meant to limit specific rights, which should be provided in opposition to the majority.
Just as feminist theories received mixed reviews, current liberal democracy is faced with the same problem. Canadians remain ambivalent when pluralism and diversity accommodations are put into place.
Both feminist theories and the liberal democracy have a greater role to play in reference to autonomy, diversity, the enlightenment of women, and the necessity to accommodate differences in the political setup.
Feminists tried for a long time to fight for equality without fully achieving it and this kind of life seems normal and natural in a Canadian context. Liberal democracy seems be the same with regards to pluralism and diversity. Based on these two systems—liberal democracy and feminist theory—it seems as though Canada has already made accommodation for power and inequality in governing the nation.
When Canada is compared to the rest of the world, evidence shows that over twenty percent of the Canadian enjoy a considerable level of political freedom. Currently, legal equalities are practiced to some extent, and economic opportunities for women are improving. All these advantages have been achieved as a result of women’s activism over decades.
This activism is still ongoing among feminists inside the halls of power, together with those who are outside. Feminists achieved essential political freedoms such as voting rights, being able to run for office and the consideration of the Canadian woman as a “person” under the law by insisting that women were equal to men and had the capability to lead a democratic life in Canada.
Putting into consideration the above factors, it would seem reasonable enough to expect a greater representation of women in polities worldwide. This is not the case; in fact, they are underrepresented. Despite the progress that women have made in education, the workforce, and contribution to public life, their political interests do not exceed those of men.
At the same time, they are less knowledgeable in the official political field compared to men. The fact that men remain the majority in Canada’s political arena sends a subtle message that the political world seems closed for women.
Focusing on Canadian politics of today, there has been accommodation lines which have occurred within the women that have led into significant division in the nations as well as the leaving out and subordination by the minority communities. Women in Canada have a very significant role in promoting politics that involve pluralism and the rights of the minority.
According to recent studies on to women’s leadership, political representation is subjected to economic circumstance. This decisively affects whether a woman is able to run as a candidate for elected office. In Canada, a politician’s responsibility is viewed as carrying more weight in the capacity of a patron rather than an administrator.
This proves to be a challenge for women, and has led to many women not putting forward their names as candidates. It also attests to the fact that not many of the local elite are willing to change, especially when it comes time to recruit nominees. Thus, male competitors always find their way forward. The life of a Canadian woman involved in politics is a series of challenges.
They are supposed to meet the requirements, nearing the same political responsibilities as men do, which creates certain problems. Despite the endless attempts to establish equality in politics, women are still nominated far more seldom than men.4 In addition, Canadian culture is not ready yet to see women as politicians. Mass media is another problem.
Women are still “regarded as novelty”5 by most Canadian journalists. Often women are reluctant to continue the struggle, knowing the opposition they will have to face. However, Canadian women do not despair, but resort to numerous political means to fight these challenges.
Further exploration of the challenges faced by Canadian women in politics shows that there is a need for cultural change, which will promote the desire for more women candidates and allow them to win in considerably higher numbers. The cultural role of childrearing, a responsibility that is largely left to women, proves to be a major challenge to women’s involvement in politics.
Canada’s social and cultural expectations for women demand that they be always with their children. This is itself a hindrance to the involvement of the women in federal politics.
Canadian members of parliament spend at least thirty-two weeks per year without their children, as they must be in Ottawa for five days per week and return to their respective constituencies over the weekend, where they still hold some office hours as well as attend constituency events.
Party nomination, as illustrated earlier in this discussion, proves to be another challenge for the women involvement in politics. Since one must first be nominated before entering party politics, the winnable seats are never open to new candidates. Financial barriers prove to be a challenge to most of the women wanting to get into federal politics.
In Canada, the nature of politics has never been friendly, especially to women. Women are not as confrontational as compared men, who usually find confrontation to be a means of one-upmanship .
Media plays a great role in the many questions that are asked of politicians, leading to a life that is referred to as fishbowl life. Women are always presented in relation to how they dress, their body type and structure, their hairstyles, and their voices. These issues are the first to be covered by the news, which does not happen to men.
Women are still challenged in politics by their unwillingness to run for positions in office. This has led to a small supply of women who come forward in politics, however much of the blame is pushed for Canadian culture on their male counterparts.
Conversely, there are women who profess an interest in running for office, but are not inclined on the need to step forward; rather they wait to be asked to do so. There is a need for political parties to form committees whose sole responsibility would be to encourage well-qualified women candidates. At the same time, many women have little interest in pursuing political careers.
Women have experienced different barriers in Canadian politics, thus calling for the breaking down of these blockades through the implementation of action policies by the government as well as political parties. Political party leaders should at the same time hold political will and improve in their commitment that it is one tool, which is necessary for the promotion of equality.
Political recruitment of women candidates should be provided by their political parties, so as to support them in running winnable positions. All parties must address the historical problem of inequality and identify the relevant processes that are necessary to address them in order for women’s political equality to occur.
Promoting changes in the representation of women in politics and their involvements will not only improve the welfare of women in Canada, but will also develop opportunities for others who are underrepresented. This will create the benefit of a healthier political system, in which Canadian democracy will take the lead.
Despite the above challenges that Canadian women face in politics, women have continued to get involved in politics, an act that can be termed as “miracles happening.” It is also necessary to understand what happens once they find themselves elected to the provincial legislature and other political positions.
The big question is whether these women work to change representative institutions or are forced to incorporate the existing political culture once they attain the political positions. Do they struggle to achieve credibility in hostile environment?
Once women attain these positions, they have reported discrimination from their male counterparts. At the same time, many report being dissatisfied once elected, as they consider political life to be more frustrating. The future progress of women in politics in Canada seems to be uncertain; once one considers that they have not yet achieved a better position in politics.
Total equality is difficult to achieve in Canada, but no one can negate the fact that it is desirable. Women in Canada have made great efforts in the fight for equality despite minimal progress, which needs to be acknowledged. Around twenty percent of women are always elected in the parliament since 1993.
Women account for around fifty-two percent of the total population of Canada, which is approximately twenty-one percent of the municipal councils and legislatures.
Canada has enjoyed economic stability with fewer women who are elected, but on the political representation in the international set-up, Canada ranks 47th on the elections which took place 2007. Polling data shows women place more value on different issues. Women should be given chances to hold the same positions as men.
Moreover, equality is important in decision-making in order to empower women. This will bring about successful development of public policies. A critical mass is needed in which the largest populations in Canada will be women.
For the Canadian democracy to be deemed legitimate, it must represent at least half of the population that is composed of women. There should be a genuine partnership in gender, where to some extent Canada has made efforts to adopt the charter which is composed of rights and freedom for all (Andrew and Tremblay 290).
In conclusion, there is still a long path for women’s equality in the political assembly. Feminist efforts have improved Canadian politics, although at a slow rate. Achievements include the creation of women programs meant to improve the lives of Canadian women. These efforts also led to the creation of a position for a minister whose responsibility is to promote women’s equality.
These movements have led to women’s involvement in politics. They have acquired official positions and put into place some policies such as those dealing with childcare. Evidence clearly shows that gender representation in Canadian politics has been an issue for a long time.
Achievement of gender parity has never taken place in Canada. Women represent the larger population, but they do not hold equal positions to men in politics.
Despite the challenges women face in Canadian politics, some of them are already involved in politics and many more desire to be. What pushes women toward participating in the political assembly is the desire to make changes in party nomination processes, media coverage, and parliament operations, which are in the hands of Canadian cultural change.
There is a great need for Canadian women to get involved in politics, so as to secure as many parliamentary seats as possible in order to demand the necessary changes. In summary, politics have been downgraded far beyond on what was being referred as important profession in Canadians mind in reference to them that make decision to serve more on the few women who find their way in politics.
There is a need for a better regime, represented by dedicated politicians coming from both genders, which can only be achieved if equality is valued.
Bibliography Andrew, Caroline and Manon Tremblay. Representing women in parliament: a comparative study. New York: Taylor
Sempra Energy Essay college essay help near me
Table of Contents Logistics and operations of the company
Employment and forms of energy production
“Ethics and Social Responsibility”
Changes and effects of transitional demographics
Logistics and operations of the company Sempra Energy is a globally known company in the supply of energy. It is probably the biggest company in the sector. The company’s center is in San Diego, although it has branches in several places, which traverses the world. Its mother company, Sempra Global, houses several other companies.
Employment and forms of energy production Upon initiation in 1998, it has grown to employ more than 13,800 people who served in excess of 25 million consumers in 2009 alone. The company’s presence is evident in Fortune 500, which ranks the top 500 companies and corporations in the country.
The strengths that define Sempra Energy entail employing competent workers in all levels of energy production. The employees possess all the equipments they need; furthermore, their working environment is pleasant (Ashby, Miles
Cultural sensitivity in the globalized workplace Research Paper college admissions essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Role of cultural sensitivity in globalization of business
The role of leadership
The role of business education
Cultural changes that Americans and foreign employees face
Effects of the need for cultural sensitivity
Introduction Cultural sensitivity is important in today’s global business because it incorporates diverse definitions of appropriate business practices by individuals from different backgrounds. It is incumbent for any business that aims at globalizing its practice, to be aware of the cultural orientation of its employees, clientele, and its partners globally.
If a business organization becomes more sensitive to its diverse employees’ backgrounds, it will decrease the chances of missing the opportunities and disrupting projects. Thus, cultural sensitivity helps in creating effective teams that will collaborate well in the business environment.
There are many factors that are involved in creating a good working environment for individuals from different backgrounds. The structures of a globalized workplace must be set in such a way that they can accommodate diverse views, opinions or methods of conducting business.
The degree of cultural sensitivity should be optimum so that every employee feels free to express their views and define the business environment according to their own ways. It is also important to note that diversity of such elements as culture and income should have a definition different from inequity in the workplace. This will create a good atmosphere for effective business operations.
Other factors to consider include the interrelationship between effects of globalization of a business and cultural sensitivity in a business setting. Leadership, communication, and business education should also be given an upper hand when globalizing a business.
This is because cultural sensitivity is a two way process whereby foreigners will have to embrace the American culture of doing things as Americans embrace the cultural diversities of the foreign employees. This paper discusses some of the above factors in detailed.
Role of cultural sensitivity in globalization of business Different countries have different ways of conducting businesses depending on their cultural affiliations. A business organization must have the knowledge of cultural sensitivity of its partners and employees who come from different countries. For instance, some countries are said to have the culture of bonding before any business deals are sealed.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More There are also many other factors that have to be considered when conducting business in different countries. The party that sets the subject of conversation in any business transaction is a factor sensitive enough for consideration before starting any business activity in a foreign country.
Some cultures go so deep that they can affect a business transaction just by using the wrong hand to offer something. Social interactions between the management and employees also include things such as refusing to take alcohol, refusing to sing and refusing an invitation to a meal (World- Traveler 3).
The role of leadership Responsible leadership and governance is quite essential in global business. It is important to note that leadership should be taught in business schools broadly and in depth in terms of their ethics and social and environmental responsibility (Doh and Stumpf 390).
Effective global business leaders must therefore be responsible for the social and environmental welfare of the diverse cultures represented by different individuals in a business organization.
In order for leaders to develop cultural sensitivity, there needs to be a global meeting place in business programs, where students who have leadership qualities can come to work with colleagues who have different methods and experiences in order to sharpen their international business skills.
A multicultural environment is therefore of paramount importance because the diversity of cultures, languages and experiences can be shared among the students who are participating in the programs (Doh and Stumpf 394).
Such programs can work extremely well in business schools because the schools can also have subsidiary programs which can increase the proportion of international students and incorporate exchange programs. Business organizations can also structure partnership with schools in other countries in order for students to do projects in a multicultural environment.
We will write a custom Research Paper on Cultural sensitivity in the globalized workplace specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The entire leadership of a business organization should be well versed with multicultural environment. This will make them develop a global mind-set whereby they will possess the ability to develop new perspectives and to hold multiple and competing perspectives.
A leadership that has its members fluent in at least two languages and the experience of living and working in multiple cultures is therefore competent enough to handle a multicultural workforce (Doh and Stumpf 394). There are various methods which can be used to develop such kinds of leaders.
They include; undertaking courses that incorporate foreign travel and company visits, undergoing through courses that are offered on campus that are team taught by faculty from business schools in different countries using videoconferencing or on-line technologies, study or consulting projects that bring students from other schools in other countries such as India and China together with American students, overseas work programs, and the development of multicultural environments at home.
This way, the success of future leadership in a global business is almost certain.
The role of business education Business education plays a vital role in the process of globalization of business. Currently, there are many programs that require courses across a broad range of business functions such as marketing and strategy.
The development of responsible global business leaders requires significant amount of the course content in the core courses or in elective address international business, leadership and social and environmental responsibility issues. This will create a strong foundation of global knowledge (Doh and Stumpf 393).
It is worth noting that unskilled and semiskilled workers are increasingly becoming less and less needed. This implies that countries must put more and more effort into developing high-quality education systems in order to prepare students for more skilled jobs in the future (Marquardt, M. et al 164).
Education and vocational training is important especially in contemporary world where there are changes in global market dynamics, technology, and the structure of labor. This has created a much complex work environment that has increased the number of jobs that need high level skills like problem solving, interpersonal, and other work place skills.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Cultural sensitivity in the globalized workplace by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More It is therefore very important for leaders to utilize organizational development skills to sustain an environment in which professional education can work effectively and students can learn successfully in order to become effective global leaders (Marquardt et al 164).
Therefore, knowledge, rather than physical assets should define competitive advantage. This will make the administrative and managing process an easier task to undertake in a business environment that has diverse culture.
Since societies are transitioning from the industrial era to the global knowledge era, job requirements are becoming more challenging.
It is also not surprising to see the importation or exportation of knowledge through hiring of expatriates in a globalized business environment. It is therefore the duty of the management to come up with an administrative framework that will assimilate the diverse cultures arising from hiring of foreign employees.
Cultural interests and sensitivity, self awareness, and global mind-set act as solid foundations of international business skills. This is a set of competence that leaders ought to develop in order to accommodate diverse cultures and remain competitive in the global market.
The development of these competencies can be initiated through foundation courses that focus on cross cultural management issues and skills (Doh and Stumpf 393). In addition to the above, leaders need to be exposed to a variety of experiential assignments, that address not only cross cultural sensitivity but also self awareness.
For instance, some business schools like Wharton School require some of their students to participate in out-of-class experiences such as treks in the Himalayas or Patagonia. The reason behind this is to develop decision making skills under stressful conditions.
It also serves to expose the students to different countries and cultures at the same time (Doh and Stumpf 393). Other universities are known to offer in-class simulations to practice leadership skills, and also assign leadership autobiography to develop self awareness.
Global leadership skills can also be obtained through learning from other people’s experiences and reading comprehensive surveys. Some books are known to provide diagnostic surveys, learning objectives, cases, practice exercises and experiential activities to enhance self awareness. The books are also good especially because they give important ideas and opinions that are important for global business leaders.
Thus, leaders can find ways of managing personal stress, problem solving, coaching and counseling, motivating, managing conflict, empowering and delegating, and building effective teams with diverse cultures (Doh and Stumpf 394).
In addition to the preceding methods, business schools can benefit from the inclusion of specific country or area studies and diverse out-of-class activities like speakers, events, and competitions that address culture and leadership. Honesty, integrity, ethics and social and environmental stewardship is also an important factor that leaders should have.
Some countries such as Philippines offer good courses that are designed to produce social responsible leaders who are experts in Asian culture and management styles. The contents of the courses in the curriculum reflect these underlying values (Doh and Stumpf 394).
Cultural changes that Americans and foreign employees face The contemporary American work place has changed in terms of culture, race, religion, age and gender. This is because many business organizations have realized that their long term success depends on a diverse body of talent. Diversity brings about new ideas and can also change the perspective and views in the organization.
It is worth noting that once in a multicultural organization, American employees’ experience a dramatic shift from their original culture to the culture in which they have been introduced to.
There are however several problems that accompany the cultural changes. For instance, people will become paranoid when in a multilingual working environment or be filled with assumptions. This can lead to them being estranged thus plummeting their productivity and morale.
A particular study was done in an American subsidiary of a global bank based in Japan. It was found out that the Japanese female workers complained to the management that their older Japanese male bosses did not respect them. When the human resource manager questioned all of the women in the office, all Japanese ladies complained about the Japanese men.
However, the American female employees said that there was no problem at all. The human resource manager was left in a confused state and he had to consult with the Japanese male managers. To this, the Japanese men asserted their comprehension of American expectations related to sexual harassment against women. So they were more careful when they spoke to the American female employees.
Thus, it was found out that the Japanese men didn’t mean anything and that any Japanese person would understand that. This implies that communication is turning out to be more complicated even as business organizations interact with their international partners (Zeromillion.com 5). This situation implies that cultural sensitivity is an important element in any global business activity.
One very important thing to note is that in today’s business world, diversity no longer applies to color, race, gender or age. It is the relatedness, connectedness and interactions of employees within a business organization.
Diversity also acts as a bridge between the organization’s life and the reality of employees lives. It builds corporate capability and is also the framework on which the interpersonal relations of employees are built.
In order for American international companies to remain competent, they have outsourced work force from other countries. India, the Philippines, Malaysia, and other countries have seen some functions of many American companies being shifted to these countries. Thus it is unsurprising to find that some business organizations hire more employees outside of their head quarters countries than within their native countries.
Effects of the need for cultural sensitivity Just a few years ago, people used to say that the world is getting smaller. However, it is quite clearer now, that the world is already small. This is because of the advances in technology related to transport and communication. The development of a world economy has also made the world to get smaller than before.
These two factors combined have caused people from different cultures, languages, and nations all over the world to meet and do business in a nutshell. For this reason, some people feel that the new found closeness has resulted into a better understanding of people all around the world thereby leading to a decline in cultural diversity.
People who do business find out that their cultural differences intensify once they realize that the rest of the world does not think like they do. The need to incorporate foreign colleagues in a business organization comes about because business is an international operation. Thus, for a business to grow, it has to occupy the space offered by an international opportunity.
Western organizations have continued to face stiff competition from emerging economies. This is why these organizations are shifting from doing things their way to trying to do things the way they are done in the country they invest.
Thus they are feeling the negative effects of emanating from their lack of cultural sensitivity on business performance. It is becoming a norm that many organizations are investing heavily in providing their staff members with diverse language lessons. This is because the organizations want to find their way into foreign markets.
Globalization has enhanced grater mobility in international capital and labor markets which creates a global marketplace that offers more opportunities due to the availability of more customers. However, globalization is known to cause conflict between the nations involved.
This scenario is exhibited when technology for manufactured goods becomes synchronized internationally. Thus, nations with different sets of norms and other characteristics compete in the markets for goods that are similar. This creates tension in trade especially when it releases forces which tend to overshadow those policies that are set in place in local workplace operations.
Business leaders of a globalizing business organization should bend on recruiting only those professionals who can cooperate effectively. The professionals should also be able to interact with each other with minimum amount of risk. It is quite natural that the situation where a leader hires employees who share the same set of values, rules and cultural norms is ideal.
However, this situation is not ideal in the modern business environment. Since the modern workplace environment is multicultural, the leader must work to enhance the smooth operations of the business with employees from India, China, Germany, Poland and Philippines working together with minimum conflicts.
Thus, the organizational culture should be neutral and without any bias to any set of cultural norms and values (Custom Essay 4). This is why emphasis must be placed on recruiting employees who can easily adapt to the multicultural business environment.
As a result, many prudent leaders usually recruit employees who have had some level of experience of working with culture of the country they are working in. These employees must be familiar with another culture different from their own and hence should be accustomed to the difference of other cultures from that of their own.
The employees should be familiarized with the organizational culture and the orientation of the employees to these cultures need not be complex. The multicultural environment should be based on principles that are of universal humanistic values and those values that can accommodate all people regardless of their origin and their cultural background. A good example of a universally agreeable value is the mutual respect of employees.
Conclusion Cultural sensitivity is important in today’s global business because it incorporates diverse definitions of appropriate business practice by individuals from different backgrounds. Different countries have different ways of conducting businesses according to their cultural affiliations.
A business organization must have the knowledge of cultural sensitivity of its partners and employees who come from different countries. The contemporary American work place has changed in terms of culture, race, religion, age and gender. This is because many business organizations have realized that their long term success depends on a diverse body of talent.
Diversity brings about new ideas and can also change the perspective and views in the organization. It is worth noting that once in a multicultural organization, American employees’ experience a dramatic shift from their original culture to the culture in which they have been introduced to.
The multicultural environment should be based on principles that are of universal humanistic values and those values that can accommodate all people regardless of their origin and their cultural background.
Works Cited Custom Essay. Cultural sensitivity. 2011. Web.
Doh, Jonathan and Stumpf, Stephen. Handbook on responsible leadership and governance in global business. Cheltenham, UK: Edward Elgar Publishing Limited, 2005. Print.
Marquardt, Michel, et al. HRD in the age of globalization: a practical guide to workplace learning in the third millennium. New York: Basic books, 2004. Print.
World- Traveler. Cultural sensitivity training for international business success in Japan, China, with up to the minute news. 2011. Web.
Zeromillion.com. Diversity in the workplace. 2011. Web.
Motivated teacher mark a chapter of students academic lives Term Paper cheap essay help: cheap essay help
In the classroom, there are many factors that influence the motivation of both the teachers and the students. These factors can either be external or internal. Internal factors are mainly the characteristics for each person such as the capability, interests and the responsibilities. External factors include practises in the school that may either prevent or influence motivation.
Examples of external factors are characteristics of the classrooms, instructional methods used and the peer groups. In the EFL and ESL classes, motivation has been a major problem. It is one of the essential factors for both the students and the teacher since most of the students have a very low motivation in learning English while others think that English may not be very useful in their future.
EFL and ESL students are well motivated by pairing them so that they can work in groups. This is more successful to both the teacher and the students because language is better learned through communication that takes place among the students. This type of teamwork and cooperation is very beneficial since learners assist each other in various tasks (Little Wood 45).
Secondly, a slight change in the seating arrangement for the students results to their satisfaction and may also determine the success or failure of that lesson. In addition to that, the number of the students in a class may also motivate or discourage the teacher. For instance, an average class motivates the teacher since it is more manageable as compared to a large class.
Moreover, during error correction, the teacher should do it in way that the student will not feel hurt or humiliated. The teacher gets motivated after correcting the student in the right way since most of the students participate during the lesson. This is very important for the ESL and EFL classes because there is a lot of debate and discussions.
An example of a quotation that motivates the teacher is, “a teacher who is attempting to teach, without inspiring the pupil with a desire to learn, is hammering on a cold iron” (Mann 213). Students also get motivated when they are corrected in the right manner.
The teacher gets motivated when he is using an audio or visual material such as a video or a computer during the lesson because explaining becomes much easier and students tend to concentrate and understand better. The students also get motivated because the lesson becomes very enjoyable and their minds become focused thus leading to success.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Besides, the use of realia and flash cards is very motivating to both the students and the teacher especially when introducing a foreign language. They act as a facilitator especially on the vocabularies. The following is an example of a quotation that motivates the students; “anyone who stops learning is old, whether at twenty or eighty. Anyone who keeps learning stays young” (Ford 147).
One of the advantages of motivation by use of group work is that there is mastery of the skills by the students which is very essential in language. The teacher then enjoys marking good grades from the students. Motivation of any kind encourages the students thus making them put more effort and creates much interest in the teacher towards that class.
A disadvantage of using visual and audio materials for motivation is that they are very expensive and so much time is needed for the preparation of the lesson. Use of the first language (L1) in the ESL and EFL class as a motivation may be quite disadvantageous because it can lead to the students becoming dependent on that language or make them translate the context, which is not acceptable while learning language (Little Wood 68).
Motivation is therefore an important concept to use in the teaching of ESL and EFL since it arouses the students as well as the teacher. A teacher who is motivated will always work hard towards the success of the students. A student who is highly motivated will strive hard to achieve better grades.
Works Cited Ford, Henry. “Moving Forward”. Garden City. New York, USA. 1930.
Little Wood, William. “Foreign and Second Language Learning”. Language Acquisition. 1987
Mann, Horace. “The Life and Works of Horace Mann”. With introduction by his second Wife.1859. Mary Peabody Mann. online edition
We will write a custom Term Paper on Motivated teacher mark a chapter of students academic lives specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More
Virtual School Consultant Project Report college essay help near me
Virtual schools in the U.S. Virtual schools were conceived in 1996 in two regions of the United States with the establishment of the Virtual High School and the Florida Virtual School. Five years down the line, between 40,000 and 50,000 learners enrolled in virtual classes (Clark, 2001, as cited in Barbour, 2006).
About a decade later, Seltzer and Lewis (2005, as cited in Barbour, 2006) postulated that there was approximately 328,000 public schools recruitment, excluding home schools and charter schools, in video-based or online learning.
Watson and Ryan (2006) elucidate that by September 2006, 38 states had implemented virtual curriculum, or important rules controlling virtual schooling, or both. They further, affirm that the previous year saw many states adopt new state-led curriculums or set up online learning policies.
These states include Nebraska, South Dakota South Carolina, and Missouri. Increase in the amount of students in different virtual programs has been observed with diverse increase made at various virtual schools; 18% growth of Louisiana Virtual School, 22% of joint Ohio’s eCommunity Schools, more than 50% of Idaho Digital Learning academy and Florida Virtual School, and 24% of Virtual High School.
Virtual school program Mission
Clark (2001) argues that many virtual schools were established with different mission in mind. However, they share one major objective of increasing access to superior curricula. For instance some like the West Virginia Virtual School was established to provide the quality courses using Internet technology, in spite of the size or location of a school.
Virtual school program design can be based on the target consumers, wherein it can be intended to serve remote regions such as a school district with limited road networks. Regardless of the target consumers, “the mission of Virtual School is to allow for two way interactive learning anytime anywhere for any student” (Clark, 2001, p. 3).
The federal government regards educational technology and virtual learning as instrumental in education reforms and upgrading endeavors (Clark and Else, 1998). The federal government has supported this trend of education through grants for enlargement of large-scale virtual high school study.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Noteworthy, state authorizations on the required characteristics of K-12 education and seat-time obligations for tax grant have effect on virtual in-schools models (Clark, 2001).
According to Clark (2001), certification and accreditation are mainly based at the state level. Regional certification bureau house their personnel for every state in the state education bureau, and work directly teachers accreditation, program appraisal and general SEA personnel.
Every state needs virtual teacher own accreditation, or cross-agreements if done in other states with which it share effect. A virtual school based in any state needs both state appraisal and regional accreditation to attract students at the district status.
The persons dealing with unbiased education opportunities have previously raised concern for impartial access to school curricula. Several state education departments have utilized a fraction of their Advanced Placement (AP) grants to procure services from virtual schools providing AP courses, and incorporate them in virtual schools allover the state to handle curriculum availability and equity concerns (Lorenzo, 2001).
Implementation and sustenance
Thomas (2000) argues that, in spite of their area of resident, students are able to access quality courses via the Web. In addition they have flexibility in regard of time and place to take the necessary courses.
Nevertheless, by virtue of this technology being new, fewer courses have been designed; fewer instructors have been trained on Web courses utility and unequal access to computers by teachers and students. However, the author asserts that concerns related to policy, management and instruction have to be resolved first in order for states, schools and students to gain fully from Web-based courses.
Several concerns on which funding and policies are based require being amended or removed to allow widespread application of Web-based teaching in high schools. Thomas (2000) further, asserts that the issues that need to be considered include student turnout and credit demands; states dissemination of grants to boost student education; teacher tasks; as well as the mandates for teacher accreditation.
We will write a custom Report on Virtual School Consultant Project specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The application of the Web-based courses prerequisite states to perceive education differently; for instance, they will be mandated to change from sponsoring schools depending only on class dimension and turnout.
Virtual school administration, instructors, guidance counselors as well as parents require substantial information and support so that they adapt to applying this novice technology for student education.
Teaching will require to be tuned to satisfy students’ needs; specific students will demand greater interface with colleagues and their teachers relatively. Nevertheless, there is not much evidence for exorbitant drops out of Web-based courses at al levels.
Further research is prerequisite to invent new instruction strategies, so as to reduce the dropout rates. To attain success in these Web-based courses, instructors as well as students will require continuous technical support (Thomas, 2000).
Models for state-based virtual programs There are various models for state-led programs, namely:
Under the state education bureau, such as Alabama ACCESS and Idaho Digital Learning Academy.
Under the State Board of Education, such as Illinois Virtual High School.
As a self-reliant entity, such as Colorado Online Learning.
As a distinct local education bureau or school district, such as Florida virtual school.
Confined in a university, such as University of California College Prep.
Certain states accommodate statewide charter schools that could transform into a model for a state-led program. For instance, University of California College Prep has established a charter high school and is projecting to expand it the following years, which may eventual attain a state of a statewide charter.
In fact the state already has numerous multi-county cyber charter schools, although none is has attained statewide operation. The aforementioned models are absolutely rigid and a program can emanate from an existing model.
For example, Colorado Online Learning emerged from a syndicate of district into a self-determined unit, while the Florida Virtual School started as an interschool school districts project, afterward was funded by appropriations for many years, and currently is funded by state public education full-time equivalent (FTE) funds.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Virtual School Consultant Project by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Recommended model The recommended model for this particular state district is the consortium and the regionally-based model. Presently, several virtual school consortia have been developed in the United States. The virtual school consortia are characteristically national, regional, state-level and multi-state. Numerous regional education agencies have incorporated virtual K-12 courses in their service options for different schools.
Majority of the virtual schools consortia serve as brokers for outside supplier opportunities or divide courses amongst affiliates (Clark, 2001). The author affirms that the nonprofit VHS Inc. in Massachusetts is the most effective barter or collaborative model of virtual schools present, expecting continuation via its wide network of engaged schools.
According to Tinker and Haavind (1996), the Virtual High School (VSH) Consortium Project tests a joint model of virtual teaching via NetCourses and netseminars. Based on His and Tinker (1996), NetCourses refers to those that uses the internet as the key instrument to disseminate information, conduct discussion, and evaluate student education.
This project examines important aspects virtual learning including:
the feasibility of forging a strong liaison and communities linking teachers, content experts, technologist, and school administrators through collaborative technologies;
the replicability and scalability of the electronic communities to sustain secondary school teachings and;
the endorsement of constructivist teaching practices consistent with the worldwide education reforms.
A standard virtual school model possesses the following characteristics:
Various mathematics and science networking scheme and virtual teaching settings have shaped the design of the NetCourse representation. The fundamental model of the VHS NetCourse engages one instructor and twenty students in a unit teaching collaboration.
Every school in collaboration put in a minimum of 20% FTE of a unit teacher’s time to build and instruct a Web-based course. In addition, schools donate computers, personnel time, and internet connectivity. Moreover, each school is obliged to afford a VHA site coordinator accountable for VHS project administration and sustenance of teachers and students at their district VHS.
Noteworthy, His and Tinker (1996), asserts that the VHS funds facilitates financial maintenance for the site coordinator and training, technical, and software support. Every school member of the cooperative may admit 20 students to pursue NetCourses for every episode of a teacher’s session of the pool.
Quality teaching is sustained by ensuring that all teachers effectively accomplish a graduate-level NetCourse, on the design and expansion of web-based courses, counting teaching in constructivists learning philosophies and cooperative learning methods.
This design facilitates a low-cost process of broadly augmenting the set of courses a school can offer without increasing enrollment. It allows schools to provide their students with NetCourses varying from higher academic courses and innovative central courses, to elective technical courses and specialized courses intended for language minority learners.
The consequential flexibility will greatly facilitate schools to correspond their teaching abilities to meet the needs of the students. Because, schools provide additional teaching time, they are able to increase student capacity, and develop more NetCourses to disseminate among all the schools in the collaboration. Thus, the VHS cooperative can expand smoothly and with minimal additional grant.
An assortment of students are enrolled in this new learning environment, ranging from students who pursue online lessons in a computer lab within their district schools to home school learners or students who require a exceptional challenge. The initial Virtual High School was occupied by students who had timetable challenges or students who required a particular lesson from an instructor situated from far.
On the contrary, the contemporary population comprises of primary students taking lesson from home, and higher placement scholars who pursue college lessons from high school. State financial support has motivated numerous academically or socially challenged students to enroll in virtual schools.
Every state is granted the liberty to invest in internet connections and computers to accommodate virtual students by the contemporary political status impacted by the No Child Left Behind Act recognizing poor performing schools, so that students are given the chance to select their preferred schools, augmenting the diversity of students in the setting (Schulz, 2003).
Eng (2003) asserts that school organization are focusing their per pupil disbursement to implement charter or substitute schools equipped with an online provider. The provider affords the curriculum, whereas the district school provides internet access and a computer for the learners, and also employing teachers to work in this background.
The variation in online environment is directly proportionate to the variety of students in virtual schools. Initially, the delivery of online courses was facilitated via teleconferencing in appropriately designed TV lab, although presently they happen in computer labs besides a TV lab, or even at home.
Certain schools integrate motion videos with sound and music, at the same time preserving a humanistic setting (Hammonds
The Long Years of Fighting with Piracy: Evaluating the Changes Essay best college essay help: best college essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Assessing the Reasons for Piracy in Somali
Considering the Court Verdicts
The Evaluation of the Changes
Introduction In the past few years, the problem of Somali piracy raised a number of questions, making people fear the cruel robbers and causing economic instability in a number of countries. Due to the actions undertaken internationally to eliminate the Somali threat, the piracy threat has been gradually reduced.
However, the economic misbalance within Somali remained on the same level, which can cause another outburst of violence from the local pirates.
However, it must be admitted that much has been done since the problem emerged. With help of the decisive actions of the people involved, and the international security system together with the action undertaken by volunteer peacemakers, the problem poses great threat no longer.
What must be considered at present is the state of affairs in the state of Somali, for further economical degradation might be the reason for another piracy threat.
Considering the articles discussed below, one can say that they suggest a lot of food for thoughts, enriching one with sufficient background knowledge on the subject and giving examples of what Somali piracy is. In addition, the articles analyzed below deal not only with the roots of the problem, but also with the means which have been used to tackle it, as well as the advantages and the disadvantages of the measures undertaken.
With help of these pieces, one can have clear idea of what Somali piracy is and what it has resulted in. In addition, the articles also give n insight on the relationships between the leading and the developing countries. Thus, the given articles shape the idea of the issue and contribute to a deeper understanding of the problem.
Assessing the Reasons for Piracy in Somali The article which is dealing with the origins if Somali piracy and its reasons suggests another viewpoint to consider the problem from. With help of Robin Hunter’s article, it becomes obvious what exactly makes the Somali pirates commit crimes and rob the ships sailing by. As it has turned out, the reason for the sea piracy is old as the hills – the Somali pirates are looking for the so-called “easy money”.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More It seems that this is a perfect example of the way in which time and space relationships between different countries can be traced clearly. It is evident that Somalia is distanced in both space and time from the European countries, since its economical and political systems are out of date and require considerable changes.
Such state of affairs predetermines the fact that the country must be suffering severe economical crisis, which results in inflation, lack of money and workplaces. Therefore, the country is wallowing in poverty, unable to sustain the life of the people living there.
Such conditions have predetermined Somalia piracy. With no hope of finding job to sustain their lives, people have resorted to the only possible means of surviving which they had at that moment. According to Susan Rice, ”Somalia’s long-standing poverty and instability have also fostered piracy, now well established in the major shipping routes off the Horn of Africa”.1
Therefore, poverty is one of the core reasons which drove Somali to such means of making money. Explaining the true conditions which caused the Somali dwellers resort to crime, Hunter also makes it clear that such detail does not rehabilitate the pirates, but helps to understand the roots of the problem to fight it more efficiently.
It is clear that Hunter emphasizes the necessity to eliminate the cause of piracy first. However, the author must understand that the issues of national well-being cannot be solved in a blink of an eye.
With its insightful descriptions of Somali piracy and the reasons which led to it, Hunter makes it possible to take a look at the problem from a different angle. With help of this article, one can see clearly the division of identity between the European countries and Somali.
Relating to different worlds, Europe and Somali are unlikely to come to terms before Somali establishes stable economical position and starts the process of state policy renewal.
We will write a custom Essay on The Long Years of Fighting with Piracy: Evaluating the Changes specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Considering the Court Verdicts Another cause for concern was the way in which the Somali pirates were treated in courts. According to what Xan Rice says, the Somali pirates will not get the proper punishment for their actions due to high rates of corruption within the Malaysian judicial system. As long as the pirates are handed over to the Malaysian court, the process of fighting piracy in Somali will go over and over again.
Due to the fact that the Somali pirates bribe judges to avoid being imprisoned, they will continue their criminal actions and are likely to become even more aggressive. Therefore, the given article offers that sufficient changes should be made to the existing situation.
With help of Rice’s report, one can see the drawbacks of the existing judicial system in Somali, which not only leaves the pirates unpunished, but also encourages them on further crimes. There is no doubt that something has to be done about the existing situation, the author claims.
With help of Rice’s report, one can see the peculiarities of the geographical relations between the countries. What is illegal in Europe and America is treated in rather composed manner in Somali and Malaysia, which brings people to a culture clash. To avoid such problems, people have to make cultures merge and create certain law which will be efficient in all continents, Rice hints.
However, the author understands that the differences in the world picture are rather hard to overcome. Due to the different world vision of the countries, it becomes practically impossible to cope with piracy in Somalia, no matter how sad this might sound.
The Evaluation of the Changes Despite the efforts which have been undertaken to improve the situation, the changes which have occurred already are not enough to make the world a safe place. According to news reports, piracy still takes place in the water area around Somali, which means that the piracy has not been eliminated.
In addition, the growing gap between the Malaysian and the European countries is well worth thorough considerations. Therefore, it is far too early to speak of any improvements. As Aust puts it,
Today piracy is a modern, and growing, phenomenon. Although the area of sea most threatened by pirates is Somalia, pirates have operated for many years (and still operate) in other waters, not just the Caribbean, as Hollywood might like us to believe.2
Not sure if you can write a paper on The Long Years of Fighting with Piracy: Evaluating the Changes by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More It seems that the process of Somalia development has been hindered so hard that it is now almost impossible to cause any positive changes. The articles above make it clear that no further efforts can improve the conditions in which Somali is at present, as well as fight the terrorism of the Somali pirates.
Taking a closer look at the core of the problem, one can see clearly that the problem concerns the time and spatial gap between Europe and Malaysia. Living detached from the civilized countries, Somali is doomed to be stuck between poverty and piracy, if considering the statement made by Willinsky:
With Hegel’s theory of relativity, a large part of the globe does not participate in the progress of time experienced by the West, creating a differentiating time-space continuum that further ensures the lasting division of the world in the Western imagination.3
Creating the “spatial matrix”4 which Fabian was speaking about, European countries refuse the admission of the Malaysian countries into the progressive world. Although Pickles claims that “there is a difficulty of mapping something that cannot be counted as singular but only as a mass of different and sometimes conflicting subject positions.
There is difficulty in mapping something that is always on the move, culturally, and in fact”5, the piracy in Somalia still can be tracked. Looking at the maps dating 2008 and 2011, one will be able to see the level of piracy in the Somali area.
Fig. 1. Image NASA. Digital Globe, 2008 Piracy in Somalia.
Comparing these data to the ones obtained in 2011, one can say with certainty that the progress in fighting piracy is quite hard to spot. Despite all the attempts to make piracy cease, it continues growing rapidly, and pirates start hunting not only cargo ships, but also the yachts of the civil citizen, which means that the pirates’ cruelty has reached its top. The map below shows that the areas where piracy flourishes have grown considerably larger.
Fig. 2. TerraMetric, 2011. Piracy in Somalia.
Conclusion Drawing the conclusions from the abovementioned, one can claim with certainty that the time and spatial boundaries between countries were predetermined by the differences in culture, development and the pace of progress in certain countries. Due to the fact that the process of development took various shapes in different countries, conflicts are unavoidable.
In addition, it is obvious that to eliminate piracy in Somalia, it is necessary to make the gap in time and space between the countries close. Since such actions are impossible at present, the rapid spreading of piracy can be hindered, but not eliminated. Though this might sound pessimistic, Somali piracy will cease only as the difference in time and space between Somalia and Europe is reduced to zero.
Bibliography Aust, Anthony. Handbook of International Law. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2010.
Fabian, Johannes. Time and Other: How Anthropology Makes its Object. Columbia, OH: Columbia University Press, 2002.
Pickles, John. A History of Spaces: Cartographic Reason, Mapping and the Geo Coded World. New York, NY: Routledge, 2004.
Rice, Susan et al. Confronting Poverty: Weak States and U. S. National Security. Washington, D. C.: Brookling Institution Press, 2010.
Willinsky, J. Learning to Divide the World: Education at Empires End. University of Minnesota Press,1998
Footnotes 1. Susan Rice et al. Confronting Poverty: Weak States and U. S. National Security (Washington, D. C. : Brooklings Institution Press, 2010), 8
2. Anthony Aust. Handbook of International Law. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2010. Print.
3. John Willinsky. Learning to Divide the World: Education at Empoire’s End (Minneapolis, MN: University of Minnesota Press, 1998), 132
4. Johannes Fabian, Time and the Other. How Anthropology Makes Its Object (Columbia University Ptess, 2003)
5. Pickles, John. A History of Spaces: Cartographic Reason, Mapping, and the Geo-Coded World (New York, NY: Routledge, 2004), 11
Changing labor market as a potential causal factor in declining immigrant outcomes in Canada Research Paper writing essay help: writing essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Argument analysis. Labor Market Niches
Introduction A critical analysis of the research on the downward trend of employment success of immigrants in Canada paints a picture that suggests that it is in a relatively elementary shape. A perspective analysis provides a tactical description of the trend across various periods within a restricted amount of time. This analysis shows that the difference arises in the specific criteria adopted in the definition of what is in decline.
The analysis provides differing accounts of the effect of the resultant decline as well as the implications of such reduction. Among the studies that have been done (Frenette and Morissette, 2003) has claimed its place as a reliable generalization of this situation.
It indicates that the period since the 1970s, even as it is earmarked for the characteristic increases in the levels of educational among immigrants, and taking keen interest in the significant maturity of the account of business-cycle fluctuations that was experienced in the labour demand, the period still had to put up with a decline of up to 20 percent in the minimum general entry-level gains that were received by newly-arriving immigrants, regardless of considerations such as gender.
The trend, therefore, suggests a continuous decline in rates of immigrants hired. This state of affairs prevailed up to the early 1990s when signs of a positive trend were seen in the new arrivals.
Frennete and Morissette (2003), suggest that the problem can be narrowed down to seven statistical irregularities that characterize the labor market processes and form a basis for the construction of a tentative answer to this problem from the perspective of the transition to the knowledge economy :
The characteristically conspicuous reduction in the levels of earnings received by new labor market entrants;
Lack of consistency in the origins of emigrants;
An increased initiative by immigrants in increasing their educational levels
Reduced value of education due to the characteristic increase in educated immigrants
Lack of emigrant access to prestigious high end professional occupations due to the lack of influence.
Low levels of foreign experience among the immigrants
General competition based labor market imbalance
In a strict sense the relevance an influence of these explanatory factors will vary, depending on factors such as the period in consideration. The scope of labor market processes related concerns in the immigrant employment concern is fairly thin, and the extent of relevance of each factor differs in both extent and length.
However, the majority of them point toward the labor market processes an aspect that has very little supporting evidence. A sense of ambiguity exists specifically with regard to statistical reports concerning the market process. For instance, the role of declining marginal returns received by immigrants has generated a diverse list of explanations with each explanation targeting the different circumstance.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The even more ambiguous aspect here is the market process that specifically influences the underlying trend. This lack of fit cuts across the seven factors in varying extents ad therefore forms the object of our analysis and interrogation in this paper.
The paper seeks to know whether the Canadian labor market processes related to the transition to the knowledge economy have underpinned the decline in immigrant employment success (Worswick, 2004).
Argument analysis. Labor Market Niches It is common ground that the trend displayed by immigrant employment is one that heads towards specific occupations, enclaves, and work settings. As it were some circumstances have worked to provide an advantage in as far as origin is concerned, for instance, the allocation of engineering jobs towards Chinese.
Even so this presents in its own level a degree of disadvantage, especially when racial and ethnic considerations take the center stage In the distribution and allocation of manual labor, service jobs, or shift work. More often than not these jobs do not fall under the umbrella of unions and therefore, they do not receive the benefits that accrue to unionized employments.
Reitz and Breton (1994), expresses this position in light of the little interest given to these jobs by unions. He acknowledges that Canadian immigrants receive little attention in as far as unionization of their jobs is concerned, despite the fact that over time they have continuously acquired knowledge to allow them to gain access to these jobs.
Consequently any racial concerns have been reduced leaving the employment process to market processes. Even more compelling value-added to the jobs due to unionization is marginally little as compared to those without union representation.
The big question to be asked here is whether labor market concentrations contribute in any extent to disadvantage the place of immigrants.
We will write a custom Research Paper on Changing labor market as a potential causal factor in declining immigrant outcomes in Canada specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More It also begs the question as to whether such cycle operates to perpetuate this state of affairs over time, thereby constituting in a strict sense a hypothetical workplace ‘ghetto,’ It also creates a need to understand whether these market-based factors represent opportunities to avoid discrimination as well as motivate economic well-being (Wanner, 1998).
The majority of positive results are attached to individual entrepreneurial engagements that create self-employment. Many immigrants find it more productive to own small businesses, especially within societal groupings that allow for gatherings of groups of people with a common good as well as secure the interests of members of their group.
Research develops a picture of immigrant employment in the light of impact of individual concentration of efforts toward the employment process setting aside the impact of ethnic concentration. The conclusions made vary in great degrees across groups; they propose an impression is that the relevance differs positively in some and negatively in others (Swidinsky
People with Disabilities and Abuse of people with disabilities and criminal justice Research Paper cheap essay help
Introduction In the contemporary environment of judicial system, it is common to see more and more people with disabilities taking part, as either offenders or victims than they were years ago. Indeed, according to Williams (1999), people with disabilities are ten times likely to experience violence or abuse than people without disabilities.
In order to cap and punish people who deliberately abuse disabled people, the government has established measures to protect disabled people in its criminal justice. Moreover, disabled people require empowerment in order to identify and respond to abuse or violence.
Besides, people with disabilities need to know that there are supportive services and systems, which include victim assistance programs, the criminal justice system, and advocacy services.
However, the law does not provide adequate remedies and there is inequality in the criminal justice system. Moreover, “it takes little cognizance of the special circumstances of people with disabilities” (Parry et al. 2009, p.47).
The shortcomings exhibited by the judicial system have contributed significantly to the tribulations of the disabled who are left “exposed and defenseless, resulting into their further injury during investigative and legal procedures” (Henderson
Can Iranian Adults Reach Same Level of Proficiency as Children? Essay a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help
Introduction Foreign languages such as English are taught through a context restricted environment in Iran. In this situation, second language is acquired by classroom practices that restrict use of specific textbooks and defined teacher’s classroom work management. Outside this restricted learning context, learners do not get support from social contexts outside the classroom (Menashri, 2001, p. 45).
As a foreign language, English was formally taught in after the Islamic Revolution in Iran. It was taught to learners from the age of 10-11 (first grade of junior high schools) (Abrahamian, 1982, p. 43). The textbooks are compiled, developed and published by the Ministry of education and used in schools. The Ministry of Education also publishes teaching materials for both public and private schools throughout the country.
This paper explores the role age difference in determining whether adult Iranian learners reach same level of proficiency in pronunciation as children (Diesel. 2000, p. 131). The paper also reviews extensive literature to compares the levels of proficiency in pronunciation reached by children and adults.
Background to Second Language Learning among Iranian Learners
In Iran, proficiency in pronunciation in foreign languages such as English are taught through a context-restricted environment. In this environment proficiency in pronunciation is learnt by classroom practices that use specific textbooks and teachers’ classroom work management for children and adult learners. Learners in Iran do not experience support from social contexts outside the classroom.
Proficiency in foreign languages such as English was formally taught from the second grade of junior high school after Iranian Revolution. Presently, proficiency in English is taught from the first grade of junior high schools (at the age of 10-11).
All textbooks used are compiled, developed, and published by the Ministry of Education. The Ministry of Education also publishes teaching materials for public and private high schools nationwide (Hosseini, 2007, p. 11).
The rate of proficiency in pronunciation acquisition is favorable to adult learners than children learners when the amount of exposure to the language is controlled. However, the amount of exposure of foreign languages to Iranian adult learners is restricted, thus cannot reach high levels of proficiency on graduation.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Most emphasis of proficiency in pronunciation learning in 1990s concentrated on reading skills to allow learners read and translate English texts more easily. Iranian general curriculum placed emphasis on developing learners’ grammatical knowledge in reading and translation.
It placed less focus on proficiency in pronunciation. Therefore, most techniques used by high school English teachers involved grammar translation to prepare learners for expectations of Iranian national curriculum. Thus, it is not easy for adult Iranian learners to reach high proficiency levels in pronunciation as children.
Proficiency in pronunciation of second language demands contact with native speakers. Tourism and travel is another factor to be taken into consideration to Iranian learners’ mastery of English as a second language. Few tourists visit Iran, and only visit historical cities like Isfahan and Shiraz, and only a few make visits to Tehran where majority of Iranian students are learning English (Menashri, 2001, p. 11).
Tourists make it possible to individuals to communicate in English even if the state restricts media for learners on religious grounds. Travelling also assist greatly in terms of practicing the language. Due to prohibitive bureaucracy, Iranians find it extremely difficult to travel abroad.
It is also difficult for Iranians to get visas to travel overseas, that is, to English speaking countries such as the UK and US. As a result of all these restrictions and difficulties, it is not easy for Iranian language learners to reach high levels of proficiency in second languages (Gass, 1997, p. 112).
Consequently, Iranian learners are denied contact with native speakers a factor that is crucial language mastery. This is only possible after learners have received formal instruction. The more formal education learners receive, the more benefits they get from contact with native speakers.
Having close relations and contact with native speakers in ones own country is more helpful in proficiency in pronunciation acquisition. This is a drawback to Iranian adult learners on proficiency in pronunciation (Hosseini, 2007, p. 14).
We will write a custom Essay on Can Iranian Adults Reach Same Level of Proficiency as Children? specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Effects of Age on Proficiency in Pronunciation
Substantial variability in achievement of proficiency in pronunciation among learners exists. A number of factors underlie this variability in proficiency among learners of which age difference being one of the factors. In order for an individual to achieve high proficiency in pronunciation, one has to begin being exposed to new language at an early age.
The impact of age on proficiency in pronunciation is a factor widely used in explaining individual differences in language acquisition. There are substantial studies that support the assumption that children are more efficient in L2 learning compared to adults. We may wonder whether one needs to begin new language before attaining a certain age in order to achieve proficiency in pronunciation.
In studying the influence of age on proficiency in pronunciation, one needs to separately consider its impact on the route of acquisition, rate of acquisition, and achievement of proficiency or fluency in pronunciation. The age factor does not have much effect on proficiency in pronunciation as regards to the route of acquisition.
Krashen (1979, p. 221) showed using bilingual syntax measure, that adults acquired grammatical morphemes in a manner similar to L2 learning children. However, age effect is essential in the case of pronunciation.
In normal adaptive settings, children learners’ achieve more proficiency in pronunciation than teenagers or adult. The scenario is different In formal learning environments due to the amount of exposure required for the age advantage of young learners to emerge is not enough.
The success of Second language acquisition (SLA) in any learning environment relies on second language acquisition approaches (Ellis, 2000, p. 3). Learners need to understand what is to be learnt, how to learn it, and why it should be learnt. However, the process of second language acquisition is complex and involves a number of interrelated factors (Ellis, 2000, p 4).
These perspectives discuss how SLA is clearly influenced by individual differences (Brown, 2009, p. 329). Although these approaches have resulted to success in learning second language, it remains that some individuals attain proficiency faster than others. Studies in this area have looked at learner variables and other individual differences in one’s capacity to learn second language.
Period of Second Language Exposure to Iranian Learners
Iran has a very conservative society. Considering the development of global relations with other countries, and the growing interest of new technology and science globally, Iranians find proficiency in L2 necessary (Hosseini, 2007, p. 11). There is increasing interest of parents to allow their children to be proficient in pronunciation especially of English.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Can Iranian Adults Reach Same Level of Proficiency as Children? by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Cognizant with the fact that these children achieve proficiency faster and naturally than adults, Iranian parents allow their children to learn English at an early age of six years. According to Sadighi (2000, p. 40) majority of Iranian adult learners do not attain proficiency in pronunciation levels after graduation.
They are usually faced with inability to communicate and handle foreign languages such as English after graduation (Sadighi, 2000, p. 40). Iranian adolescents and adult learners have restricted opportunities to apply functionally and are not motivated to learn it. This is in sharp contrast to Iranian children who are exposed to foreign language at an early age.
Iranian public schools do not seem to enhance proficiency in pronunciation among adult learners. For these reason, many Iranian learners join English private institutions to study English as an extra curricula activity after school hours. Private English institutions in Iran have three levels; children, juniors, and adults. Learning materials for children differ from those of juniors and adults.
All learners under the age of 7 who do not know how to read and write are placed in children level. Materials children learn at this level are simple and mostly with pictures. These materials get more advanced as they progress to other levels and more reading and writing added.
At children level, a learner begins from first level where children are taught picture naming, simple sentences, and classroom language. Junior and Adult levels as well, consist of several levels starting from the easiest one to the most difficult.
In the words of Federico Fellini, “A different language is a different vision of life.” Although there is much truth to this quote, it does not touch on another truth about learning a different language; that it is a complex process that many people may not ever fully achieve.
This is due to the fact that there are many factors that can affect one’s ability to reach second language proficiency. Some of these factors include: gender, socioeconomic status, the amount of exposure to the language, the amount of exposure to the culture, and also age. Age is the most common factor that affects second language acquisition.
A significant amount of this research has been focused on determining the ages of a “critical period” during which language abilities peak, and after which they level off and language proficiency becomes more difficult to achieve. Ellis (2000, p. 6) has suggested that this period ends at puberty, which makes learning a second language past the age of twelve a more difficult task.
As a result, the age at which one begins learning a second language influences the rate of acquisition and ultimate proficiency in various aspects of that language. This applies perfectly with Iranian SLA as well.
For Iranian learners, motivation is one of the complex variables applied to explain individual differences in achieving proficiency in pronunciation (Sadighi, 2000, p. 42). Many studies on SLA in Iran explore learners’ integrative and instrumental motivation in achieving proficiency in pronunciation. This approach has two types of motivation; integrative and instrumental among different levels of learners.
Integrative L2 learners in Iran show interest in learning about Iranian culture and people of the intended language. Instrumentally motivated Iranian learners’ on the other hand, have pragmatic considerations in their minds regarding second language acquisition. For instance, acquiring language for employment, or earning more pay (Sadighi, 2000, p. 10).
Adult learning of proficiency in pronunciation among Iranians is not easy. Sadighi (2000, p. 11) cites research carried out at Azad University to determine the effects of both integrative and instrumental motivation on senior students proficiency in English. The outcomes of investigation indicated marked difference between the means of English proficiency grades of integrative motivated learners and instrumentally motivated learners.
The study deduced association between students’ English in English with integrated and instrumental motivation. In addition, learners’ motivation in achieving English proficiency was also affected by factors which were of personal, social and educational.
A Review of Related Literature on Effects of Age on Second Language Acquisition
Normal developing children become proficient in pronunciation at the same rate world over. This occurs despite the fact that there are differences in patterns of interaction between parents and children. Children tend to learn in a specific pattern that is systematic inherently.
As an individual difference, age plays an important role in enhancing proficiency in pronunciation of second language. Ellis (2009, p. 329) believes that children are more successful in being fluent in SLA compared to adult. There is a relationship between age of learning and attainment in some aspects of second language with age being strongest predictor of success.
This is backed by Critical Path Hypothesis approach. In this hypothesis, Lenneberg (1967, p. 240), posits that proficiency in language must occur before puberty for the learner to achieve native like proficiency.
Age as a factor of individual differences affects achievement of proficiency in pronunciation of second language.. According to Ellis (2000, p. 32), it is not easy to arrive at a coherent picture of individual differences. He categorizes the variables involved in individual differences into three main classes: learner’s belief about language learning was classified as the main type.
Learners under this category have pre-conceived ideas about matters such as significance of language aptitude, nature of learning new language, and strategies that work well; secondly, Ellis (2000, p. 5) recognizes affective states as the second main type of variable that affects proficiency in pronunciation of second language.
He cites fear of beginning to learn the second language by some learners, and over confidences by others as reason. For Iranians fear of embracing Western values compounds this fear. Other learners develop anxiety due to competitive natures and how they perceive whether or not they are progressing (Coppieters, 1997, p.545).
The Critical Path Hypothesis explains the effect of age on acquisition of second language (Lenneberg, 1967, p.112). This hypothesis has been tested by a number of studies by comparing findings on adults and children in the area of pronunciation. Collier (1988, P. 334) in her publication the “Effect of Age on Acquisition of a Second Language”, dismisses studies that are concentrate on pronunciation specifically (Ellis, 2000, p. 12).
After evaluation of learners” acquisition of proficiency in pronunciation after exposure to a second language, these studies reveal that younger learners attained proficiency in pronunciation that was accent free compared to adults just past puberty (Ellis, p. 15).
Collier (1988, p. 330) dismisses these studies as the import to test the hypothesis concentrates more on the pronunciation domain of language proficiency, more o, to the dichotomy of child and adult. Collier is of the opinion that researchers and educators should do more than just pronunciation.
For this reason, she came up with a comprehensive analysis of the critical period needed to attain proficiency in numerous content areas. She discovered that within four and five years, children of age 8-12 years attained set norms first. Children of the ages of 5-7 attained the set norms in a period approximated to be about 5-8 years.
The older group aged 12-15 years had the greatest challenges attaining age and grade norms. Positively, Collier discovered that age effect diminishes over a period of time as the learner becomes more proficient in the new language (Collier, 1988, 333).
Piaget (1956, p. 1112) in his research “The Language and Thought of the Child” differentiated egocentric and socialized talk and discovered other aspects of speech that were fascinating in children.
His studies opened the floodgates to numerous studies about the important area of language development in childhood (Piaget, 1926, 1114). Observations made by Piaget (1926, p.1112) and Lenneberg’s (1967, p. 110) hypothesis, explain that the important changes of a child’s brain occurs during the ages of between two and twelve (Prabhu, 1987, p. 232).
There is a common say that describes a child’s brain as being like a sponge. Seemingly, this is brought upon by young children’s innate ability to grasp on things rather faster compared to adults. Among other interesting things, these include language. In this interest, De Houwer (2006, p. 229) cites a specific study done to weigh lexical grasp in child bilinguals.
The study deduced that children as young as thirteen months can be considered bilingual because they have ability at this tentative age comprehend translation equivalents (De Houwer, 2006, 330). Translation equivalents describe words from two or more languages that have the same adult meaning.
In addition, the study points out comprehension as a central characteristic of bilingual learning process, and this begins to happen actively as early as infancy (De Houwer, 2006, 331).
Szuber (2006, p. 125) posits that most studies on language tend concentrate on early childhood compared to adulthood. In this regard, adolescence as an interesting period is commonly ignored. World over, majority of adolescents are either born in a foreign country or speak a language other than their native languages (Szuber, 2006, p. 121).
Acquisition of second language in this group is first rising and more attention must be accorded by researchers and educators alike (Szuber, 2006, P.126). It is fact that young children acquire language in more natural setting, whereas adult acquire it in a structured setting such as classroom.
There is no mention of adolescents who fall in between young children and adults. These adolescents have the advantage and drawback of changing liberally from one environment to the next, and thus control amount of language they are exposed to.
This can be a disadvantage in that when adolescents feel uncomfortable, there is possibility of hiding behind their native language and thus receiving limited exposure to second language (Ruiz de Zarobe, 2005, p. 106).
This happens among Iranian learners as well. Compared to younger immigrants in the US who are immersed in English, and adult learners who in most cases learn by comparing second language with their first, adolescents face variety of alternatives concerning amount of interaction in either language both in and outside classroom.
In essence, they may communicate either language while at school, with parents and siblings at home, their peers in neighborhoods, and others (Szuber, 2006, P.136).
Szuber (2006, p. 126) cites a study conducted in Chicago on about sixty Polish immigrants which indicated that majority of adolescents speak least English with their parents, with their siblings, and English more with peers and teachers at school.
The Critical Period Hypothesis, on the other hand, depicts the time frame these adolescents learn new language as past the period they can easily learn second language (Birdsong, 1992, p. 123).. Adolescents need to be very conscious and put more effort to learn the new language. However, they will most likely not achieve proficiency as native speakers.
Szuber (2006, P. 127) explains other reasons that may it difficult for immigrants to acquire a second language during puberty. Adolescents confront anxiety from having to adjust to a new environment; and also face traumas related to typical pubescent. These include; problems of self image, low levels of self esteem, self consciousness and others.
This explains why adolescents who feel anxious normally retreat to their native language and shy or are timid of speaking the second language at that period in their lives. Hence, biological and environmental factors combined greatly influences adults second language learning (Gass, 1998, p. 300)..
Clearly, adults are disadvantaged in trying to learn and speak second language proficiently. Lenneberg (1967, 334) cites arguments that support two different positions on this matter, such as; nativist approach which includes contributions from Chomsky.
Lenneberg (1967, p. 335) notes approaches developed by Chomsky in language learning. First, he notes Chomsky’s claims that humans have a Language Acquisition Device in their brains from birth. Unknowingly, humans apply this mechanism to learn their first language.
Secondly, Chomsky devised Universal Grammar idea which consisted of basic rules of grammar found in all human languages they acquire from birth. The Critical Period Approach by Lenneberg (1967, p. 337) also explains the loss of inborn language potentials in adults. Despite the fact that adult learners tend to indicate initial quick progress, proficiency in most cases is not achieved as it tends to level out.
Learning Style approaches that Influence on Second Language Acquisition
The notion of learning as postulated by Pask (1972, P. 217) is viewed as deriving from the psychological behaviors of learners. Psychological behaviors as envisaged are necessary as they are seen as indicators on how second language learners’ associate with, view, and respond to the learning environment (Schleppegrell, 2003, P. 231).
This argument was fully backed by Willing (1987) that the style of learning shows “the totality of psychological functioning”. A number of distinctions in terms of learning styles have been made in cognitive psychology domain. For example, Bruner et al (1959, P. 641) differentiates focuses and scanners. Learning styles that confront a problem by putting emphasis on one feature at a time are known.
Scanners on the other hand are those learning styles that tackle several features at a time. Pask (1972, p. 222) differentiates serialists and holists in terms of whether learners perform with hypotheses that are either simple or complex.
Other differences are pegged on learners’ personality in as much as differences in learning styles. Such differences involve both; impulsive and reflective thinkers, divergent and convergent thinkers and others (Reid, 1987, p. 87).
Concerning second language acquisition, attention has been centered in field dependence and field independence. Field independent variables included; adolescents and adults, males, object oriented jobs, urban, technological societies, free social structures, and individualistic people.
Field dependent variables included; children, females, people oriented jobs, rural, agrarian societies, rigid social structures, and group centered people (Reid, 1987, p. 87).
Asher (1971, P. 541) posits that field independent peoples mode of perception is to a larger extent dominated by the complete organization of the surrounding field. On the other hand, in field dependence people’s perception modes, sections of the field are experienced, as distinct from organized ground.
Richards (1986, p. 27) highlights studies that examined the relationship that exist between Field Independent variables/Field Dependent variables and second language learning. Together with such factors as; sex of learners’ social environment, personality, social structure, and social environment, the age of learners’ is also involved in Field Independent/Field Dependent differences.
This implies that adults and adolescents are Field Independent learners and children are Field Dependent variables. One hypothesis of the features involving field independent learners is that they display a better performance in a formal second language learning environment. Field Independent learners on the hand, perform better in an informal environment.
This hypothesis interestingly relates to the evidence in the age factor which indicates that in an environment such as classroom where formal language instruction is issued, adult learners do better than children (Asher, 1967, P.331). Contrastingly, children perform better than adults and adolescents in a natural language learning environment (Asher, 1967, p. 332).
Doubts were however, registered in the analysis between Field Independence/Field Dependence and second language results. D’Anglejan (1985, P. 19) for instance, discovered a number of overlaps between Field independence/Field Dependence and verbal intelligence. It also reported that Field Independent variables only explained less than one percent variance in tests of four language skills.
The investigation of FI/FD difference caused little outcome on the relationship between cognitive style and second language acquisition (D’Anglejan, 1985, p. 20). Despite the fact that adults and children are classified as Field Independent and Field Dependent respectively, it is not well known how age differences affect the learning of the second language.
In addition, fewer studies have been done on the relationship between FI/FD and age, especially to find out whether children being field dependent and adults/adolescents being field independent applies to learning both first and second languages (Asher, 1967, p. 332)..
The influence of Age on Second Language Acquisition Rate
When discussing the influence of age on second language acquisition, many studies tend to differentiate the rate of language acquisition and achievement. For example, Krashen (1979, P. 43) suggest that the rate of second language at an early stage and long term achievement should be treated separately.
Incase such distinctions are made, it can be deduced that older learners, including adolescents are much faster than children at an early stage, and children are superior that adult learners in long term achievement. This means that children may not be fast learners, but they may be higher achievers in the long run.
Adults including adolescents on the other hand, do not achieve such high proficiency. Furthermore, studies by Krashen (1979, P. 42) argue that adolescents learn more quickly than younger children at initial stage of second language.
Additional studies by Snow (1978, P. 1114) support their findings of adolescents being superior at initial stage of second language learning. As concerns morphology, and syntax, adolescents did best, followed by adults, with children coming last.
Small differences were however discovered on pronunciation and grammar. Olsen (1973, 263) experiment deduced adults performing better significantly than children in the German language pronunciation.
In circumstances where fluency is concerned, adults are shown by many studies to progress slowly compared to children. A good example is a study by Cochrane (1980, 28) which examined the ability of Japanese children and adults to distinguish English I and r sounds. The two control groups were naturalistically exposed to the sounds. Children were found to out perform adults.
Both groups were subsequently subjected to another experiment, where they were both given same amount of formal instruction on phonemic differences of sounds before they were tested. Adults outperformed children in this case.
This evidence from Cochrane (1980, p, 29) studies seems to be more applicable to grammar than pronunciation among Iranian learners. This is because children seem to learn faster than adults, although in the case of formal learning circumstances, adults do better even in the area of learning.
In sum, when time and exposure to second language is controlled, adults and adolescents make quick initial progress than children (Cochrane, 1980, 32).
Again, older children progress faster than younger children specifically in learning morphological, and lexical aspects of the second language, and acquiring phonological aspects as well. This has been happening especially when the exposure takes place in a formal environment such as classroom.
Conclusions In summery, Iranian adult learners cannot reach same level of proficiency in pronunciation as children. Children can learn any language well, even several languages at once, by the time they are six years old without any formal instruction just by being raised in an environment where the language is spoken. However, this is no longer an option when one attains the age of six and over.
Linguists’ postulate that, physical changes occur in human brain at this age. Lenneberg (1967, p. 221) cites known cases of children who were raised in complete isolation who were discovered after the age of six show that they were never able to learn a human language later in life.
Lenneberg further postulates that SLA is a process that is innate and dependent on biology of the brain (Lenneberg, 1967, p. 111). Certain biological factors restrict the brain to a “critical period” for language acquisition from age two to adolescence.
Lenneberg believed that after the complete lateralization of the brain, it no longer had the ability to “reopen” the part of the brain that deals with learning language. When brain lateralization occurs, it loses plasticity making it more difficult to acquire a second language past puberty (Lenneberg, 1967, p. 112).
However, this does mean that adult Iranian learners never learn any new languages after the age of six. Rather, it is suggestive that they cannot learn them by the same methods with which they learn their first language as children. An adult needs structure, grammatical structure as well as discipline, in order to assimilate the dizzying array of sounds and phrases that make up the language they are trying to learn (Ellis, 2002, p. 143).
If you have a savant for languages, or if this is your third or fourth foreign language, you may get by with a good instructional book instead of a flesh-and-blood instructor. However, even accomplished polyglots will benefit from actual classroom experience. Everyone else should not do without it.
In children, second language acquisition is similar to first language acquisition because they do not need to ponder about it. The critical period of language acquisition comes to a halt as children reach puberty. During adolescence, individuals attempt hard to acquire the new language while tackling the common challenges they face.
In learning the second language, adults have a daunting task a head of them. However, if the techniques applied to teach adults second languages continue to be enhanced, adults may attain second language proficiency.
References List Abrahamian, E. 1982. Iran Between Two Revolutions. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press.
Asher, Price B., 1967. The Learning Strategy of the Total Physical Response: Some Age Differences. Child Development, 38, 1219-1227.
Birdsong, D., 1992. Second Language Acquisition and the Critical Period Hypothesis. New Jersey: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Brown, H. D.,.2000. Principles of Language Learning
Brand Image and Brand Association Essay best college essay help
Executive summary This marketing research has been carried out to study the importance of brand image and relate it to brand association. Two major hypotheses have been formulated after extensive literature review following already preset objectives.
These hypotheses have been appropriately named H1 and H2, where H1 suggests that there is a correlation between brand image and brand association and H2 is based on the proposal that brand image and brand image influence how customers respond to a product in the market. A proper analysis of figures and facts collected has served to illustrate to prove the above hypotheses true.
Introduction The importance of market research cannot be underestimated in today’s competitive business atmosphere. Information collected by the researchers comes in handy in helping the decision makers come up with functional strategies to help the business cut a niche in the market.
By identifying the customers’ needs, businesses can come up with creative ways to attract the attention of the public to a product that is targeted at addressing this need. In order to serve the purpose of market research, this essay seeks to underscore the value of both brand image and brand association in relation to how products and services are received by the public.
To this end, a proper literature review will be provided to study on common trends and influences of branding and specifically brand image and brand association.
Accompanying the literature review is a set of primary data collected from the public through questionnaires and analyses of the data collected alongside their interpretation. Finally, limitations of the two aspects of branding-brand image and brand association will be pointed out before recommendations are made.
Literature review Brand imaging is by far the most important component of marketing that will help a company get its product off its stores and into the houses of the intended customers. According to Aaker (1991), the more a brand appeals to the customers the more they will develop the need to purchase the product.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In this way, the brand image adds to the value of the product. The definition of brand image has come to be the subject of debate amongst scholars and researchers in the field of marketing (Dobni
Nike Distribution Essay argumentative essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Overview Nike Inc.
NIKE’s Distribution Channels
Introduction This presentation examines and outlines how one of the marketing concepts, distribution, is employed by Nike. The analysis of Nike’s distribution management practices is based on Kotler et al’s ideas on distribution; provided in part six of chapter fifteen in their book ‘marketing management’.
Distribution refers to channels that a product follows before it reaches or is accessed by the final consumer. A distribution channel is defined by the number of intermediaries between a producer or manufacturer and the final consumer.
Distribution has a very close connection with other elements of marketing. Distribution channel characteristics have a direct impact on the other elements of marketing According to MacCalley (4), through a marketing channel “manufacturer or marketer motivates, communicates, sells, ships, stores, delivers and services the customer’s expectations and the product’s needs”.
Through the channel, the marketer communicates brand qualities. Unless outlets are well managed, brands can be compromised because brand contact points convey brand qualities (Kotler et al 165). A product can be sold through a single channel, dual channels or multiple channels. The channels can either be exclusive i.e. only distributing a particular product or inclusive i.e. used for distribution of other products as well.
Overview Nike Inc. Nike Inc started operations in 1968 by Frank Knight and Bowerman. From humble beginnings, the American firm has grown steadily to become one of the greatest multinationals specializing in sporting wear. Nike currently has its headquarters in Oregon, a suburb in Portland.
However, it operates in more than 160 countries around the world. It has a diversified product mix with a number of product lines. It has five major product lines which include footwear, club gear, national teams gear, and apparel. The product lines deep i.e. are very diverse with many products.
NIKE’s Distribution Channels Nike employs both direct and indirect channels of distributions. The direct channels include the fully owned distribution subsidiaries and retail outlets. Indirect channels include independent distributors and other licensed agents.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Nike goes for short distribution channels consisting of not more than two intermediaries. Through its subsidiaries and retail outlets it is able to deal directly with consumers.
Where independent distributors are engaged or licensed agents, two channel levels are used. The use of both direct and indirect channels helps to ensure high market penetration.
Nike pursues intensive distribution due to its strong brand. Intense distribution strategy ensures that people do not have to travel to find Nike products. However, for some specific products, some sort of exclusivity is exercised. Due to design characteristics, some products are distributed exclusively by given channels.
Figure 1: Showing Nike’s distribution channel
As figure 1 above shows clearly, Nike uses a multi-channel mode of distribution (NikeBiz). Through a multi-channel system, it has achieved a well choreographed distribution mix. Through its own subsidiaries and retail outlets, it’s able to do direct marketing and use of sales force. It has independent distributors and licensed agents who help distribute its goods. What is not well developed in Nike is online selling and telemarketing.
The bulk of its sales happen through retail accounts. As a multinational, NIKE distributes its products in many countries of the world, using its own outlets and contracted agent outlets. One of the biggest subsidiaries that Nike operates is called Converse Inc. Another important subsidiary that Nike runs is called Exeter Brands Group LLC (NikeBiz). Through the subsidiaries it manages to move volumes or different brands under the big or umbrella NIKE brand.
Nike chose to go international due to waning sales in the USA. Initially, it used independent distributors in countries such as the US and European markets e.g. England. However, to consolidate control over the distribution channels, the company bought off all its independent distributors.
We will write a custom Essay on Nike Distribution specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Nike operates distribution subsidiaries but engages in outsourced manufacturing This strategy helps in avoiding extra costs in terms of import duty and management costs. In some countries like Japan, Nike has formed a strategic partnership or joint venture with a company called Nissho Iwai. The company had well established trading outlets, and the partnership helped NIKE to easily break into the market.
Nike has five very diverse product lines. It combines a number of distribution channels because it uses single channels to distribute all of its products. The use of a single channel to distribute many products helps cut down on costs thus increasing competitiveness. In some areas, Nike uses parallel channels of distribution to ensure proper distribution or market penetration.
To accommodate the different product lines, NIKE developed special retail outlets in a number of towns across the world. The outlets are called NikeTown and aim at offering both a diversity experience to customers as well as providing the whole assortment of NIKE products under one roof. The cool response to the NikeTown experience led to Nike expanding that chain to more areas especially in Europe and USA.
Nike has been able to compete favorably against its competitors by being relevant to market characteristics and delivering goods where they are most needed. At the conception stage, Nike concentrated on the American market because the Jogging frenzy was providing ready market for its products. Overtime, Nike has been able to diversify and expand into other markets.
In each market, it chooses a distribution strategy or channel that best suits the characteristics of the country. In England for example, it sought partnership with independent distributors. However, due to need to control distribution channel some more, it did away with the independent distributors and instead established its own fully owned subsidiaries (Nikebiz 1).
Good distribution strategies and general visionary leaders have seen the company continuously record growth and profits. Table1 below shows how Nike compares with other major competitors in the industry
Item Nike Puma Reebok Market share 47% 6% 16% Sales 53% 8% 15% Market capitalization 63% 12% 7% From the table, based on Van Dusen (1), it is clear that over the years, Nike has been able to chart a growth path that has ensured phenomenal growth. Through innovation and awesome marketing, Nike Inc managed to beat the long time leader in the footwear industry, Adidas (NikeBiz).
It got listed on the stock market in 1980, a public offering that helped it expand its operations even more. At the moment the company has a strong presence in the world especially in the US and European Markets. At the moment, it is estimated that Nike holds a global market share of close to 40% (NikeBiz).
Not sure if you can write a paper on Nike Distribution by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Conclusion Nike has become an iconic brand in the world market; towering above earlier leaders like Adidas which later merged with Reebok. Despite the merger between the two, Nike has maintained its market leadership position.
The phenomenal success of Nike is attributed to good product designing and awesome marketing. Part of the marketing efforts involved creating a working distribution mix that enables access to demand rich markets. By using a multi-channel system, Nike has continued to capitalize on every available market opportunity.
Works Cited Kotler Porter, Keller Kevin Lane and Suzan Burton. Marketing Management. Melbourne: Pearson/Prentice-Hall, 2008
McCalley, Russell, W. Marketing Channel Management: People, Products, Programs, and Markets. Westport: Greenwood Publishing Group, 1996
NikeBiz. Company Overview: If You Have a Body You Are an Athlete. 2010. Web.
Van Dusen, Steven. The manufacturing Practices of the Footwear Industry: Nike Vs Competition.1998. Web.
Linking Human Resource Management Essay scholarship essay help: scholarship essay help
Introduction The last few decades have witnessed the evolution of debates linking Human Resource Management (HRM) to organizational strategy. Decisions made by Human Resource Managers have notable influences on the performance of organizations. It is important to define the link between HRM and the wider organizational strategy.
This study tries to determine how organizations deal with HRM and relevant issues to the organizations’ approach to HRM. The study also seeks to examine possible links between HRM and wider organizational strategy, their rise and effects to the organization. For the research to meet its goals, the roles of HRM management in organizations and the organizations approaches to HRM issues will be discussed. The study will use St. James hospital a study case.
Roles of Human Resource Management Human Resource Management (HRM) is an important discipline in all establishments. HRM concerns itself with the control of human resources to support organizational objectives. St. James hospital has a HRM department that is responsible for managing its human resources. The HRM department deals with:
Recruitment of new employees
The HRM department conducts interviews for prospective candidates and hires them to promote the best interest of the society. This section determines the functioning of the entire organization in terms of human labor and intelligence advice in decision-making. The department also deals with appraising and rewarding employees for their work.
Employee Development and Training
Matters concerned with employee training and development activities are handled by the HR department. HRM facilitates workshops and seminars that empower employees with more knowledge and skills to move the organization to its full capacity.
Employee Relations and Conduct
The department has a responsibility of dealing with problems that affect employees and hinder them from performing efficiently. Therefore, this department makes sure employees maintain discipline in their profession. This makes sure that all policies governing the organization are observed and enforced.
Creating and Implementing Policies
The HR department has a duty to review company policies, amend changes and proposes the adoption of new policies that cater for the demands and growth of an organization. These policies make sure that organizational goals are achieved, and promote the interests of the company and safeguard interests of employees.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Organizational Approaches to Human Resource Management All issues discussed above are relevant to the organization as regards to the functions of the HR department. The HR department acts as a strategic partner towards the implementation of the organizations goals and objectives. The organization employs the use of strategic HRM to meet its goals. The concerns of the organization are competitiveness, flexibility, efficiency and integration.
To do this, the HR department will, provide the organization with a competitive, responsive, flexible and efficient personnel environment. Application of an effective strategy in HRM enables the organization improve its competition and efficiency. In that case, HRM is concerned with factors that affect the organization internally.
Strategic Human Resource Management
Human resource management strategies are important sources of competition among organizations (Pfeffer 1994). The strengths of strategic HRM are on the actions implemented by organizations to single themselves out from their competitors (Purcell 1999).
It involves complementing HRM policies into organizational strategies to achieve a common goal. Strategic HRM concerns itself with issues relating to changes in organizations structures and culture to improve performance. Strategic HRM deals with human resources, their development and abilities to be efficient and effective.
Deb (2006, p. 54) notes that strategic HRM builds ‘high performance human resource management functions’. Human resource functions add value to organization’s core business ideas.
Strategic HRM also makes sure that business strategies and human resources support implementation of the organizations’ goals towards achievement of better results. In strategic management, HRM acts as a strategic partner towards the achievement of organizational goals and objectives.
One of the major functions of HRM in strategic human resource management is establishing high performance practices. To accomplish this, the HR department makes sure that there is quality and qualified human resource powers to enable an organization achieve desired goals. Strategic HRM emphasizes on maintenance of mutual commitment between all parties involved (Walton 1985).
We will write a custom Essay on Linking Human Resource Management specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Strategic HRM is geared towards the provision of results and is associated with high productivity rates and notable financial outcomes (Ichiniowski 1990). High productivity is achieved when organizational strategies are met. Therefore, this entails the application of strategic HRM techniques that involve the introduction of a qualified working human resource force to complete set tasks.
Linking Human Resource Management and Organizational Strategy Deb (2006, p. 55) identifies a ‘positive link between sets of human resource management practices and business performance.’ He employs universalistic, contingency and configuration approaches to organizational performance. His analysis yields positive organizational outcomes characterized by quality, service and productivity (Deb 2006). HRM can be linked to organizational strategy through the following ways.
Regenerating an Organization
HRM re-generates the performance of an organization through the employment of various HR techniques and practices that harmonize work ethics and organizational cultures. Techniques used include the setting of human hierarchy, introducing information technology, re-generating policies and centralizing decision making processes.
Creating a positive learning environment
Strategic HRM creates formal and informal learning environments in the workplace. Deb (2006, p. 56) notes that strategic HRM ‘develops action plans for transferring learning to the organization.’
Strategic HRM brings together intelligence and cultivates ways having its input to the system. To accomplish this, organizations nurture human talent leading to the creation of a learning environment that breeds innovation hence enhances competition.
Creating high-performance management
Strategic HRM creates a high performance management by applying the use of HR management practices. To accomplish this, the HR department employs recruitment and selection processes and offer periodical relevant training. The HR department also strives to make sure the handling of human resource is managed professionally. High performance management is also the self-regulation of individual behaviors in relations to the organization (Wood 1996).
Creating high-involvement management
The link between HRM and organizational strategies pops out when the overall management partners with its human labor. Therefore, management is achieved creation of a dialogue environment between the management and human labor.
Examples Case 1: Employment of business leaders in Martin Company
Martin Company needs marketers to market its new products. They have targets to meet by the end of the year. They seek the services of a HRM agency to hire business leaders on their behalf. In business leadership, consensus highly depends on the HR leadership. Strategic HRM identifies key human resource services to offer to the business. This includes material and personnel support.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Linking Human Resource Management by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The HR department designs strategic services and policies to meet strategic objectives laid down by the business. Strategic HRM is positioned to meet business needs due to its experience in the economic system. Business leadership in this sense requires HRM services. In cases that there is no application of HRM, the recruitment of personnel qualified to carry specified tasks may not be attained. This would lead to partial or lack of positive outcomes in business objectives.
Case 2: Employment of Nurses at King James Hospital
Two years ago, King James Hospital lacked personnel. The management decided to carry out direct interviews and employ the missing personnel. After one month, patients started complaining of poor services. In that case, the hospital management did not seek HRM services to recruit personnel. As a result, unqualified personnel were recruited, and services were poor.
In service provision, the use of HRM technique to achieve strategic objectives is important. Service provision requires experienced personnel to handle client’s needs. A qualified and productive workforce would achieve the specified strategic objectives. This would employ the use of HRM services for recruiting. When HRM is not utilized, then the service provision is below average, and poor outcomes are recorded
Conclusion Business challenges in this vigorous economy are forcing organizations to reposition functions of the HR department. Business leadership is becoming more depended on strategic leadership acquitted from HR. The driving force behind notable business achievements is through support from human resources.
A strong link exists between HRM and Organizational Strategy. The link should be build up for the achievement of better results in organizational management. So far, this paper has analyzed the roles of HRM, strategic HRM and has established a link between HRM and organizational strategy.
List of References Deb, T 2006, Strategic approach to Human Resource Management, Atlantic Publishers, India, New Delhi.
Ichniowski, C 1990, Manufacturing businesses. NBER working paper, National Bureau of Economic Research, Cambridge.
Pfeffer, J 1994, Competitive advantage through people. Harvard Business School Press, Boston.
Purcell, J 2006, ‘Best practice and best fit: cimera or cul-de-sac?’, Human Resource Management Journal, Vol. 9, no. 3, pp. 26–41.
Walton, R 1985, ‘From control to commitment in the workplace’, Harvard Business Review, Vol. 63 no. 2, pp. 76- 84
Wood, S 1996, ‘High commitment management and payment systems’, Journal of Management Studies, Vol. 33, no.1, pp. 53–77.
Computer Forensics Related Ethics Term Paper college application essay help
Abstract Computer crime which is referred as an illegal access to a computer system is on the rise in the recently. Computer crimes ranges from; hacking, phishing, cyber stalking, computer viruses and identity theft. Due to advancement in technology, data in various institutions is no longer kept in file papers but in computers.
Human beings have found a way of reaching this information without permission with an aim of using it for personal gain. To counter all these evils, the US congress had to introduce some ethical values in form of laws which act to protect all important forms of data and to ensure privacy security of personal information.
Such laws include; Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA), Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 (Sarbox), Children’s Online Privacy Protection Act of 1998 (COPPA).
California Database Security Breach Act of 2003, Computer Security Act, Privacy Act of 1974, Uniform Electronic Transactions Act, electronic Signatures in Global and National Commerce Act and Uniform Computer Information Transactions Act. All these were introduced with an aim of protecting information in various departments from being accessed.
Computer crimes have various negative results such as alteration, modification and loss of important information through computer crash. Therefore there is an agent need for measures to protect such forms of impacts and to promote privacy of personal information.
Introduction The rate of computer crime committed at the present is alarming, especially with the advent of the internet. Computer crime can be defined as a criminal act whereby information technology is used to reach admission into a computer system with the sole intention of damaging, erasing or modifying data in an illegal manner. Electronic plagiarism, data theft and copy right manipulations are also activities considered to be crime.
Apart from the physical destruction, alteration of private data and important information, software theft whereby privacy settings are interfered with, is also considered to be crime. Due to these crimes, measures have been put in place to ensure security. These crimes that are committed can be categorized into different types as described below;
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Hacking; this is a case whereby one breaks into a computer system and illegally accesses the information saved in there. It is the most common crime and it involves an authorized disclosure of passwords and IP addresses with the aim of carrying out business transactions with a vague identity.
Phishing; this is where sensitive information such as usernames, passwords and credit card particulars are obtained through the use of popular websites; usually, the user is requested to give such details. Because the trust entrusted to such websites, one ends up being lured to give such useful information.
Cyber stalking; cyber stalkers usually gather information about the user through social sites such as face book, chat rooms and websites and use this information to harass the users. False allegations, giving of threat, spoil of records and equipment, offensive phone calls and obscene mails can be put under this category.
Computer viruses; these are programs that deletes files, replicates them or completely crashes a computer system. They are transferred through removable devices such as the CDs, flash disks and others. Virus infections lead to ultimate crash down of the computer resulting into loss of a huge amount of data.
Identity theft; a false identity is used in order to steal money from other people’s accounts. This involves use of someone else’s credit card details or pretence of being someone in order to obtain what is not rightfully he’s/hers. The above forms a list of identifiable crimes today.
Information technology is of great importance but when such acts come into play; it can be considered a curse (Oak 2011). Due to these crimes, some acts have been enacted to look into security issues, they include the following:
Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA)
It was enacted in 1996 by the US congress due to the increasing need by the patients to keep their health records in privacy. Title I of HIPAA is concerned with the health insurance cover for workers, in case of job loss or shift while Title II or Administration Simplification (AS),ensures security sand confidentiality of health record.
We will write a custom Term Paper on Computer Forensics Related Ethics specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Here, institution of nationalized principles for electronic healthy care business, identifiers for providers, health cover policy and employers are required. All these protocols are aimed at promoting the health care service delivery. They improve it by providing a widespread utilization of electronic data exchange in the United States.
Title II of HIPAA identifies various offenses pertaining to health care and provides its civil and criminal punishment. It also safeguards against fraud in the health care system by requiring the Department of Health and Human Services (HHS) to provide standards for information pertaining to health care use and distribution. Some of the rules set are given below which only apply to the covered entities.
Privacy rules; it is mainly for controlling the use and revelation of information such as medical service givers and health insurer involved in a business transaction. It also looks at the security of Protected Health Information (PHI).This information can only be disclosed to an individual 30 days after a request has been made, when required by law for example when filling a case regarding child abuse to the welfare agencies.
Transaction and code set rules; this concerns medical givers who file electronically. HIPAA helps track their payments. Various EDI are used in this transaction such as EDI Health Care Claim Transaction set, EDI Retail Pharmacy Claim Transaction and many others.
Security rule; it concerns Electronic Protected Health Information (EPHI). A provision for administrative, physical and technical security is made here. An example of violation of HIPAA is the case of a health officer who reached out records on celebrity in California, Los Angeles and transacted the information with the tabloids.
In this case those who were affected were required to file a case with the HHS. Heavy punishment of not less than $2,500 is executed on this law violates as it can jeopardize everyone’s health data (Privacy rights clearinghouse 2003).
Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 (Sarbox)
This act is concerned with exposure and control of fraud in the financial statement. Acts of fraud has greatly affected the world’s economy over the past recent. It is more evident in popular and big companies such as the Enron Corporation and the WorldCom.
The US congress passed the law to protect investors against fraud by improving the precision and trustworthiness of company disclosure.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Computer Forensics Related Ethics by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The above two mentioned corporations collapsed due to recompense plans that were set by the senior management and the executives whereby they wanted to have large gains by incorporating liability receptors such as the special purpose entities (SPEs) which scrubbed off large amount of dollars of debts in the balance sheet.
After which they abandoned the companies leaving the shareholders with nothing thus contributing to their collapse. Such acts reduce shareholder’s trust in the share markets.
It was after the collapse of Enron that the then US president George W Bush commissioned senator Sarbanes and Congressman Mike Oxley to come up with tough rules that would counter the chances for such scandals.
Such laws are evident in various sections of the constitution such as the following few; section 406 requires executive managers to sign a code of ethics, section 409 calls for a timely announcement in the change of financial materials, section 802 and 1101 forbids any modification, damage or fabrication of any documented information so as to hinder inquiry on any issue.
These and many more ensures that all companies or shareholders in the US stock market comply to the SOX (Holt 2008).
Children’s Online Privacy Protection Act of 1998 (COPPA)
Here, children under thirteen are involved whereby they are requested to give information. The Federal Trade Commission (FTC) is accountable for giving regulations and effects COPPA.It also ensures a secure harbor such as that given to TRUSTe, ESRB, CARU and Privo. It ensures a sliding scale on which the consent of the parents is based, giving accountability of the way information is acquired and the uses it is put into.
Violators of COPPA regulations are subject to fines, for example, Xanga websites was made to pay USD $1 million because of letting children under 13 to sign up for service on several occasions without their parents knowledge and UMG Recordings gave a fine of USD $400,000 for promoting the Lil Romeo and supporting children games.
Website operators should ensure that they deal with the parents by maybe doing one of the following; making use of the credit card particulars, a digital signature via emails, parent’s signed forms through poster and calling them through a suggested telephone line. Following such rules safeguards against disclosure of private information by a person disguising parenthood (Bro 2004).
California database security breach act of 2003
This is meant to protect citizen’s private information against theft whereby the details can be used to carry out a transaction with the thief disguising identity. The act came into effect on 1st July 2003 and it was warmly welcomed by the citizens due to the then increased cases of identity theft.
The act concerns organizations that are accountable for guarding vital information; these organizations are to report any case of crime in the most appropriate time. It does not only apply to the businesses in California but also to those outside though affiliated to the state.
The act is also responsible for alerting the citizens over a suspected security breach, this is at times feared as it can jeopardize a company’s reputation and encourage hackers as they delight in causing customer panic. Sensitive information processed via the internet is also controlled by this law.
Various methods have been adopted to guarantee security; such include, installation of certain software which detects unusual behavior and prevents any access to the server and gateways which are used to sense any unauthorized access to personal information.
Customer alerts through email and web postings on breaches is also sponsored by this act. An example of a protection company that offer such protection is the Andy Lawson and Southland shredding (Tendick 2010).
The Computer Security Act
The computer security act of 1987 aims at offering security and privacy of personal information for the federal computer systems and also giving acceptable measures to effect security. It was enacted by the united State Congress through the Federal Information Management Act of 2002, section 305 (a).
The act regards sensitive information as that which when lost, altered or destroyed with no permission, can lead to adverse effects on the reputation of the centralized system thus leading to loss of interest by the public. In the past, the act has not satisfactorily provided security to this kind of data in the government systems thus their exposure remains a challenge.
Under this act, the following are the provisions made; National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) which is required to lay down approved laws to safeguard information. Security plans are established and the owners or users of the system are required to undergo some training on how to implement the laid down measures.
Annual and independent assessment of the security plans is carried out to determine their efficiencies and conformity with Federal Information Security Act, (FISMA) necessities. FISMA also requires the establishment of an incident center whose aim is to offer technical help to federal agencies in the detection, analysis and compilation of federal data.
Examples of federal computer crime includes; accessing a federal computer system without permission, accessing security, financial or credit information from a state computer system illegally or transmitting a code that can cause destruction to a protected computer.
Any detected crime is to be forwarded to the congress through a court order. It is not the role of the federal government to protect information stored in non-governmental computers and therefore the act does not consider illegal access to such information to be crime though it requires certain information in the same non-governmental system to be safeguarded.
An example is the November 1999 case with the Social Security Administration (SSA) which deals with the largest percentage of the federal government expenditure which was threatened with hacking. Also in July, Department of Transportation (DOT) system was illegally accessed through the internet, putting the information on health, benefits and other areas at risk (Willemssen 2000).
The Privacy Act of 1974
This act was put into place due to security issues pertaining the development and use of computerized information. To offer security, four practical and substantive privileges were created. Firstly, an individual can be shown information stored on him/her.
Secondly, it required that the agencies be fair in their dealings by following given laws. Thirdly, how the agencies share an individual information with others is restricted. Lastly, an individual is in a position to file cases against the state upon violation of their personal information.
The act also exempts some cases where ones information can be disclosed, such situations include; when there is need to enforce a law, when the information needs to be stored in archives for historical purposes by the united government, when carrying out statistical analysis by the census bureau, for daily uses with the government agency for administration uses and investigation purposes.
Due to advancement in technology, individual information can be kept in databases, the risk of accessing this data is evident and this necessity the need of such a law so as to ensure security.
In 1973, the department of Health, Education and Welfare (HEW), gave a report that required the congress to adopt a code that could ensure fair information practice of personal information. The code had several guidelines which included the following;
No system for recording personal details should be kept in secret
An individual has the right to know what information is kept on him/her and intentions for the same
An individual is entitled to the right of ensuring data collected on him/her is used for its original purpose and not for other reasons
An individual can correct or alter information kept on him/her
Any organization concerned with record keeping of identifiable data should ensure its rightful use.
The privacy act only protects information in the centralized systems. Violation of this act has both the civil and criminal penalties such as follows; suing an agency on refusal to access, correct some data on request where the court passes an order for amendment and causes the US government to pay certain fee such as the litigation and Attorney’s fee.
A fine of $5,000 maximum is also passed to any person or agency that intentionally asks for identifiable data about an individual in disguise, keeps this information in secret or discloses the information without the owners consent (The privacy act of 1974 2009)
Uniform Electronic Transactions Acts
The uniform electronic transactions act (UETA), was established in 1999 with the sole purpose of countering barriers against ecommerce. Due to many states agreeing to use different forms of signature, there was a need to come up with a uniform one so as to facilitate ecommerce. This was to be effective by including signatures that could have the same impact on the electronic data as it had on paper.
The esignatures are associated with the electronic record and a person carrying out a transaction should adopt it. The word record here is used to denote information that is stored electronically and can be retrieved. The act does not create any new rule but fosters for the inclusion of contracts, signatures and records to be included in electronic data. In 2000, after the enactment of EUTA, US congress passed the E SIGN act.
The act applies to parties who agree to carry out their transactions electronically. This becomes significant because when one involves in a business, signature is very important for clarification and easy tracking when it comes to payment, receiving a mare email cannot be a good evidence of the terms and conditions agreed on.
Without the signature, it is easier for the involved party to deny the conditions agreed on in the transaction, as such, this evidence is vital for smooth and fair transactions.
The act covers those transactions that concerns business, commerce and state. Section seven of this act allows use of electronic signatures, records and contracts in business transactions as long as there is an agreement between the parties involved to use them. The act is also concerned with ensuring that the person who sends an electronic item is the one whose signature is used.
This is termed as attribution ,as the signature is always attributed to the sender of the records. Timing is also an aspect under UETA, a record is said to have been sent when it reaches the recipient in a manner that his/her computer system can read or when the record is no longer in the hands of the sender.
UETA also ensures that records are received in the recipient business place on residence if there is no such business place available (Miller.Jentz 2009).
Electronic in Global and National Commerce and the state
This act was enacted by the US congress on 30th June 2000 and its aim was to promote the use of electronic records in both the local and international business transactions. The act ensures the legality of any business carried out online. Confirmation of the consumer consent is required to be put in writing by the law. This act came into effect in October 2000.
The act allows for information required by the law in writing to be passed electronically with the consent of the customer and with a confirmation that he/ she can access this information if transferred electronically.
This act has several requirements such as; that the Esign, which is only effective when the concerned party has intended to sign, that a party not only uses electronic signatures and records but also, facilitate their legal use, that a federal state be neutral in terms of technology used in carrying out transactions and that no need of other embossing devices or seals is required as long as there is provision for them in electronic means
Like any other act, ESIGN has exceptions such as; when supply of a utility like water or electricity has been cancelled, in case of court orders requirement to carry out an execution and when there is need for a document in the process of handling hazardous material.
The act concerns business involving two or more entities and records that do not involve regulations governing wills such as divorce and adoption. Two steps are involved in the signing of documents electronically; firstly, revelation of the right by the consumer to use paper followed by a notification of the electronic procedures. Secondly, the actual capture of the signature.
Files stored electronically should be accurate and made available to both parties; this is achieved by all the involved parties saving their work in their computers. This calls for businesses to choose an ESIGN that is flexible and can be easily accessed and is readable (Bowman 2009).
Uniform Computer Information Transactions Act
The Uniform Computer Information Transaction Act (UCITA) was passed by the United State law to set a precise and standardized principles to control the transaction of computer information such as software licensing. The failure of Uniform Commercial Code to provide coverage of the software business facilitated to UCITA birth.
It was presented by the National Conference of Commissioners on Uniform State Laws in 1999 (NCCUSL) in collaboration with the American Law Institute (ALI) as a alteration of the standardized Commercial Code to guarantee uniformity. It was introverted in 2002. It aims at making the rules that govern the transactions in information technology into a common ground like the Uniform Commercial Code applies in business.
Under the same act, clarification of rules regarding good use, consumer protection, shrink-wrap licenses and their timing and ability to make transfers is ensured.
The consumers are allowed to return goods if only their licenses are invalid. It has not been embraced by all states because, some fill that the Act is not adequate in its provision of security to the software transaction as there other organization which can not only offer protection but also manufacture them. This act applies majorly when computer information is used in a transaction.
The act defines computer information transaction as a contract to generate or alter computer information. It defines computer information as digital information that can be processed by a computer. This act does not deal with services on financial business, animations or image programming.
It is the first law developed to ensure uniformity of the technology economy, though it has been embraced partially it is only in Virginia and Maryland that the act has succeeded. Efforts to enforce it in other states have failed due to controversies over its effectiveness (Uniform Computer Information Transaction Act n.d).
Conclusion Due to technological advances that are evident in the current world, there is a great need to keep records that were previously stored in papers in an electronic medium. Business transactions are also carried out through electronic media.
This method of data storage and transaction is not very secure as computer crime is also on the rise thus causing risk of alteration, modification, misuse and eventual loss of very large amount of useful and sensitive data. Privacy of personal information is also at threat of being illegally accessed. It is all these reasons that have seen to the enactment and enforcement of the above discussed laws so as to safeguard these information.
References List Bowman, I. (2009). Electronic Signatures in Global and National Commerce Act (“ESIGN”). Web.
Bro, H., R. (2004). The E-business legal arsenal: practitioner agreements and checklists. Washington, DC: American Bar Association.
Holt, F., M. (2008). The Sarbanes-Oxley Act: costs, benefits and business impact. Burlington: Butterworth- Heinemann.
Miller, L., R. Lentz,A, G.(2009). Fundamentals of Business Law: Excerpted Cases. Wodsworth: Cengage Learning.
Oak, M. (2011).Types of computer crimes. Web.
Privacy rights clearinghouse.(2003). Web.
Tendick, R. (2010). California Data Security Breach Act Helps Protect Private Information. Web.
The Privacy Act of 1974. (2009). Web.
Uniform Computer Information Transactions Act. Web.
Willemssen, J., C. (2000). Computer Security. Web.
Public Administration as an Interdisciplinary Field: Assessing Its Relationship with the Fields of Law, Management, and Political Science Essay essay help online free: essay help online free
The article under analysis is called Public Administration as an Interdisciplinary Field: Assessing Its Relationship with the Fields of Law, Management, and Political Science is dedicated to cross-examination of connection between closely associated fields to find specific processes and value that reflect those connections.
Bradley Wright, the author the article, provides both theoretical and practical views on the discussed issues to understand the influence of other disciplines on public administration.
Due to the fact that the work comprises both theoretical and practical analyses, the author managers to cover all problems associated with a disciplinary approach to evaluate the main foundations of public administration. Investigating specific processes and approaches, the article also focuses on a broad systematic evaluation of the field affiliation to other disciplines, such as management, law, and political science.
It also describes the extent to which an interdisciplinary approach to public administration contributes to the evaluation and discussion of key sciences. In this respect, the article is a comparative study and evaluation of what impact other related fields have on the development of public administration.
While analyzing a number of scientific journals on law, management, and political science, the author has found that the discipline being analyzed is significantly isolated from other three fields.
In particular, Wright (2011) states that public administration journals rarely make reference researchers connected to management, law, and political science whereas top journals on the specific field provides citation within is a lesser frequency. According to the author, the obtained results are explained by several reasons; one of those is study limitations due to the restricted usage of journals.
Another viable explanation presupposes that the field of public administration is less attractive for researchers due to the peculiarities in design and research processes.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In general, the supporting arguments the author has provided are quire valid and reliable as well as testing and evaluation tools used. It is worth mentioning that the article has a rich background because the researcher resorts to multiple studies related to the problem and analyzes the journal article dedicated to the disciplines being investigated.
Wright also presents a list of journals used on management, law, and political science to increase the validity of research. The article also presents the author concerns with the isolation of the fields under consideration that is one of the major challenges because it provides more ambiguity in terms of studying and testing the field of public administration.
The article style is predominantly scientific, but it does not prevent the reader to understand the scope of the work. The author has managed to render the basic concepts and themes and structure the main parts of the article in a consistent and understandable way.
More importantly, the article sufficiently discloses the main categories of public administration and the way they intertwined with other categories. Therefore, it provides a clearer picture to what degree the field is connected to other sciences.
In general, the article is of significant value for further discussion in the sphere of public administration. It provides a number of dimensions enabling the readers to understand the place of this discipline among other sciences.
What is more important, the assessment of journal citations suggests that public administration should be more vividly discussed with reference to other foundations in order to understand the basis scientific and conceptual foundations.
Reference List Wright, B. E. (2011, January). Public Administration as an Interdisciplinary Field: Assessing Its Relationship with the Fields of Law, Management, and Political Science. Public Administration Review. 71(1), pp. 96-101.
We will write a custom Essay on Public Administration as an Interdisciplinary Field: Assessing Its Relationship with the Fields of Law, Management, and Political Science specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More
Fernando’s character from a biophysical perspective Essay scholarship essay help: scholarship essay help
Introduction The predicaments that defines the behaviors and characters of a sixteen year old Fernando is an aftermath of a legacy left behind by a father vague of human values. Fernando finds himself in an oasis of a community bred in a background of social evils intoxicating his mind from early childhood.
In his quest to break out from the ‘tradition’ that is so akin to his family make- up, his mindset and choices lead him to subconsciously live the same life his people lived from generations back.
This is characterized by drugs and affiliation with gangs and a negative exposure to the authorities at a very tender age. Fernando hails from a family that is quickly disintegrating into the abyss that is the societal rote in their community of drug abusers.
Their lives are unpredictable since they are always at loggerheads with the local administration (like the police), as a result spending so much of their time serving jail terms rotting in jails. Others get embroiled in fights that are far too common in their community set-up; they are affiliated to gangs which normally sort out their differences brutally by killing the members of the factions working against them.
These children hail from much disoriented backgrounds, Fernando’s father was a drug addict who had little time to guide and care for his children, he battered his wife even when he was drunk and was rather callous with his affairs. His mother, on the other hand, had to run away due to the battering and though they met on the streets, they hardly shared a lot.
The result of all this is a child of Fernando’s behavior, whose attitude and perceptions about life was suicidal and the victim was himself. These children end up copying what they deem fit or ‘cool’ in the society, because they do not have a strong figure to guide them. Goldstein (1995) believes that such characters have very weak social foundations and their reaction towards people is rather cold.
They have a tendency to always look for trouble and they feel good about it. They hardly think about the future, they live under the notion that today they are alive but tomorrow they will either be dead or in jail. Of all this, none of them is a big deal.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Thought Fernando’s life, several factors have contributed to the persona he was when he was last interviewed. The social factors, cultural factors, the category they’re placed on in society by society itself and community factors play a major role. Fernando’s characters all the way from infantile have been borrowing traits from the people around him and as a result have grown solidly into the extreme it is.
His recognition of the self has diminished to the extent that he does not value his life anymore, though he has no weaknesses, his abilities are rarely used in other helpful activities like playing or learning.
Berzoff and Hertz (2008) explains that Self recognition portrays to them an idea of what people see and when they look at them, in this case this stems from infancy whereby child neglect contributes to a high percentage the feeling of worthlessness. They eventually conclude that they are bad and do so little to change this perception.
Self reflection is evident in all the age groups with the three to five year old’, center of attention being much of physical aspects like the picture he portrays on the outside, his belongings and his abilities. When this child grows towards attaining puberty, his sense of the self develops too, enabling him to communicate his thoughts more carefully through the word of mouth and easily from what he understands.
They combine their own feelings and individuality by means of re-combining their past experiences to the present and other new occurrences’ as they happen in their lives. This maybe in the form of new ethical values learnt their sexual direction, their political belief systems and their cultural identity.
Family dynamics on the impact of behavior Fernando had an insecure relationship with the parents. The mother left him at a tender age and never bothered checking on them again. They only met in the streets and hardly shared anything. His father, being the alcoholic had no time for his children and family, and he never enforced the ideals he preached to his children like not taking alcohol.
The children themselves acknowledge that had they been given direction in life, they would be different from what they had ended up like. The absentee parents, as a result of this ended up having children that could not even trust them, leave alone non family members. They are not emotive when separated from the parents and neither do they fancy interaction with their parents.
We will write a custom Essay on Fernando’s character from a biophysical perspective specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More They are cold towards them and this is how they are brought up from their tender ages. In the evolution of their mindsets, from the core consciousness to the secondary consciousness, the parents played a very minor role in bringing up their children. The children learnt for themselves the many aspects that they had to grapple with in their infancy.
The environment the children are exposed to or grow within greatly affects the structure of the brain, defining the character of the individual that comes out eventually. Middle childhood put much focus on the components that make up the mind i.e. id, ego and superego. According to Erickson, Fernando is at a level of self identity as he struggles to break from the caucus of emotional dependency.
He battles with identity diffusion trying to make his own decisions which he feels are genuine. The environment either stifles or promotes the structure and functionalities in an infant’s brain. The early relationship a child has with its parents goes a long to affect the level, depth and quality of his other relationships when he grows.
This reasoning by Berzoff and Hertz (2008) is attributed to the fact that his connection to the parents has a direct influence on the maturity of his right brain and a set of connections that match data to the environment. The mothers touch to the baby at the tender age also shapes the child’s dendrite growth. Lack of these or exposure to long distressing states alters the organization exposing this child to susceptibility.
The result is a child with a detached mental state who doesn’t feel guilty when on the wrong; a child who feels everything must go his way and is very irrational.
This incident happened on Fernando’s life when he was very young, never exposed or had very little exposure to a mother’s love, he was given very little attention and as a result he ended up being rude even to his tutors. This strengthened his resolve about the street; nobody would tell him if anything was going awry on his part.
Freudian theory sheds light to the woes bedeviling Fernando by trying to comprehend the developmental stages through his (Fernando) journey of life. From early childhood to the mid adolescent age Fernando’s life has been patchy embedded in an environment with uncouth behavior that portrays a community less sensitive to values.
Freud integrates the structure of the brain (Id, Ego, and Superego) and the surrounding environment through developmental stages to insight the persona in Fernando. There is a clear relationship between the behavior and the environment. Freud purports that a person’s character is a product of classical Freudian theory, object relations, ego psychology, self psychology and learning theory.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Fernando’s character from a biophysical perspective by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Fernando’s behaviors are an aftermath of self psychology which stems from disintegrated family devoid of cohesiveness. He is exhibiting phallic stage according to Mehler portraying psychological self separation-individualization fearing loss of the object.
Fernando, like any other child born from this environment is susceptible to behaving the way he does since the environment treats him cruelly prompting him to form defensive as well as survival tactics. Efforts to rehabilitate him are bound to be futile since the characters are embedded deep in his genes.
The death of his grandmother dealt him a big blow too. She was among the people he was closest to and her passing away meant he had been snatched a companion, a friend. To the infants, passing away of somebody close to them has a big effect to their development; they take long to understand though they eventually do. They try to seek their own explanation of events on why things happened the way they did.
They try to link their death to something big that happened around the time the funeral occurred. To the young infants mind that is what caused the ‘big sleep’, as they often call it. In Fernando’s case this is evident through the mourning process where he blames himself for hitting his grandmother.
This happened sometime before she died when she was trying to defend her grandmother against his uncle and hit her accidentally. He believes he is the cause of her death and pleads vehemently for forgiveness from her. Fernando’s case highlights the plight of such children; they “always have one person they are really passionate about and when he or she passes on they have a tendency to blame themselves for all that happened to the deceased”(Lee, 2001).
The effects of social, culture, class, ethnic and community factors Fernando has issues with his self esteem and his ego. He quickly dismisses education claiming he was a quick learner and school became boring to him. He compares his being in school to being out there in the complexity of the drug network ring making money. He admits that that is time he would be wasting and that time would be better spent making money out here.
He could earn money, about $ 700 per week legitimately distributing bread around town but has resorted to selling drugs. The ego defenses at play in Fernando’s life whenever he is encountered show a person who is weak and is hiding from the reality. He lives in utter denial of his real state and is motivated by the gang to do whatever he does.
They give him a sense of “brotherliness making him feel at home even though he knows life being a member in the gang is as temporary as the gang itself. They fight against each other, injuring each other sometimes even killing each other in gang wars” (Aronson and Lesser, 2011). They have little regard for the law and have developed a carefree attitude toward life.
All this happens despite the fact that he knows there’s a life outside this ring. He hides in the ideologies of the group, living a high life; stealing cars even police cars, handling illegal weapons and consuming drugs. He escaped prison after only serving four months in jail instead of the eighteen he had been sentenced to.
Hogan (2005) believes that Fernando hides in the present, and does feel comfortable being questioned about what tomorrow holds. He is fully aware about the repercussions of his actions yet he doesn’t care. Fernando’s projection affects others, his idea about being naughty and awoke in him need to be photographed with drugs. This he had wished it be made public, but then it was meant to smear the image of the police’ department.
Fernando’s characters have roots in the environment which encompasses the social and cultural practices as well as class and ethnicity. Fernando hails from a community that embraces domestic violence which is the norm of the society. This, together with the lower social status of the community propels the way men behave the way they do.
They yearn for better life out of bondage of poverty by seeking solace in a seemingly lucrative trade of drug peddling. As a result, they find themselves in unfamiliar circumstances that abuses drugs. In the centre of shaping the behaviors of a person, which happens in the early childhood of brain development, are the genetic influences.
This together with the environment refine, reorganize as well as form neural connections responsible for future behaviors of an individual. The structure of the brain is composed of sub-cortical and cortical limp systems. The former is responsible for instinctive reflexes while the later deliberates reflexes to the environment. Their responses are a consequence of genetic makeup and environment.
Fernando’s dissociation from the real life repercussions of his actions depict a life of a child who would have grown up straight had he been given a chance to. For him to conduct his drug business, he has had to shove away the feelings of guilt that plague him.
According to Simonsson (2004), his motivation is that somehow he needs to survive; he needs to live his life and achieve all that he ever dreamt and aspired to be in life. He is fully aware that what he does is wrong and says he will opt out only after fulfilling his dreams and ambitions.
Conclusion Fernando is just one boy lost in the quest to discover his true abilities. He has been so caught up in the rotation that is life at a tender age. His personal history and that of his family do make matters even worse. He has no proud moment in his life unless it is derived from his many escapades in life which are dangerous.
Woodhead, and Faulkner (2000) states that the family history dates back to generations of drugs and disoriented families, and whenever he flashes back the only thing he gets is the reminder that he will die like his father, in jail He shudders at the thought of killing himself but with the drugs he is consuming and the age he is at, the idea is not farfetched.
He is so scared about the future that he rarely devotes time to think and plan about it. He assumes that in a span of five years ahead of him, he would be either dead or in jail. This is usually the street assumption of the people and children living this kind of life. They take corrections negatively and they react fast to issues, sometimes overreacting.
Hatred and war defines their world, and because they rarely went to school, they do not attach so much emphasis on education. The result is a child with misplaced priorities and wrong ideas about what life is composed of, a child who lives by the gun and doesn’t think twice before pulling the trigger.
This is what society entails, though if handled well and given all the love and attention at infantry, the child grows up to be a responsible member of the society who values good ideals. These children would also grow up with the family mindset and would strive to bring up upright citizens by giving them proper education, catering for their health and being there to support them when they need them.
Children are good at emulating what their parents do, and if anything parents should strive to bring out the best in their children by living a positive and healthy life.
References Aronson, J.
Critical Review of Two Research Articles best college essay help
Table of Contents Summary
Summary Askehave, A. (2007). The impact of marketization on higher education genres – the international student prospectus as a case in point. Discourse Studies, 9(6), 723-742 (qualitative method).
Marketization changes the nature and prospects of higher education. Askenave (2007) suggests that marketization in education means that running schools adopt market practices, which influence and change the nature of discursive practices. The goal of the study is to evaluate the extent to which marketization of education affect discursive practices.
Using the principles of genre and Critical Discourse Analysis, Askenave (2007) analyzes the international student prospectus and the extent, to which it reflects free market values.
First, the author compares the genres and discursive practices in the international student prospectus from four different countries – Australia, Finland, Japan, and Scotland. Second, Askenave (2007) uses the international student prospectus from the University of Sterling and analyzes its language.
The results of Askenave’s (2007) analysis are not surprising. First, the international student prospectus imitates the language and discursive practices of market advertising (Askenave, 2007). Second, higher education facilities use the international student prospectus to promote themselves as the sources of unique experiences and innovative practices for clients (Askenave, 2007).
Universities turn into consumer-driven organizations that do not set any standards and do not ask anything in return (Askenave, 2007).
Given that language and social practices are mutually dependent, the use of promotional language in the international student prospectus may change the long-term nature and professional position of higher education institutions, which will hardly be beneficial for either students or staff (Askenave, 2007).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Cheung, M. (2008). ‘Click here’: The impact of new media on the encoding of persuasive messages in direct marketing. Discourse Studies, 10(2), 161-189 (quantitative method).
The Internet is gradually becoming the principal mode of communication in organizational and business environments. Therefore, the influence of the Internet on persuasive messages and marketing communication needs to be reviewed. Cheung (2008) examines the impact of the Internet on how persuasive messages in sales letters are encoded.
Cheung (2008) analyzes “the extent to which the use of new media influences the overall interactional or social strategy or credibility enhancement and persuasion in the context of sales promotion” (p.161).
The author uses genre analysis to examine persuasive messages in 160 sales letters (80 prints and 80 emails) that were randomly selected from a large database over a six-month period. Cheung (2008) uses the Lingual-Belief Interaction Model as the basic conceptual framework.
Cheung (2008) concludes that texts written for one and the same communicative purpose (e.g. persuasion) display considerable similarities in the discourse structure. Simultaneously, the new media affects the ways in which persuasive messages in sales letters are encoded.
First, any act of persuasion always involves the concepts of text, context, and belief; a persuasive message cannot be successful, unless viewers make a favorable correlation between what they see in the text and what is true in the context (Cheung, 2008).
Second, new media change the structure and presentation of the sales discourse, which is no longer formulaic or standardized (Cheung, 2008). Users of new media must organize persuasive messages in ways that make key information visible (Cheung, 2008). New media add dynamism and interactivity to the existing sales discourse strategies (Cheung, 2008).
We will write a custom Term Paper on Critical Review of Two Research Articles specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Method Askenave (2007) describes the research method as the genre analysis of text organization and rhetorical moves, which is followed by an in-depth examination of the most important rhetorical features of the student prospectus borrowed from the University of Sterling.
The researcher writes that the genre of international student prospectuses received little professional attention and needs to be examined in more detail (Askenave, 2007). Askenave (2007) writes that, for the purpose of the study, she intends to compare four instances of the international student prospectuses in terms of genre consistency and rhetorical moves.
Askenave (2007) further performs an in-depth analysis of the rhetorical features and moves in one specific international student prospectus. The researcher does not involve any human participants but provides a detailed description of the international student prospectuses and their genres.
The context plays a crucial role in the analysis of student prospectuses, because Askenave (2007) reconsiders genres, text organization, and rhetoric in the context of marketization of higher education practices. International student prospectuses were the only materials used in the research, and a brief analysis of the procedures followed in the conducting of the study was performed.
According to Askenave (2007), Swalesian genre theory was the point of departure in the study. The author defines the key criteria (rhetorical moves) of the scientific analysis but does not explain the procedures used in the examination of the four student prospectuses.
Askenave (2007) considers how lay-out and images, lexico-grammar and move structure work together to assign identities and relations to the university and its students. The author does not acknowledge any ethical difficulties and does not cite anyone in the methodology and analysis section. The researcher provides little detail and makes the task of replicating the study virtually unachievable.
The method answers all research questions, and there is no triangulation of the findings. The four prospectuses are used in a cross-cultural genre analysis, but the criteria by which the author chooses the four prospectuses are unclear. Therefore, the risks of selectivity bias are very high (Patton, 2002).
The study is well designed but the gaps are obvious: Askenave (2007) should have been more detailed in her discussion of the study design, to facilitate its replication. Also, the method of the study lacks empirical justification, which may be due to the lack of previous findings in the context of international student prospectus analysis.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Critical Review of Two Research Articles by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Cheung’s (2008) approach is similar to the one used by Askenave (2007): the author performs genre and rhetorical moves’ analysis of persuasive messages in sales letters. Cheung (2008) assumes that printed sales letters and sales emails belong to one and the same genre, given the similarities in their social function and communicative purpose.
In explaining the study approach, the author extensively relies on theoretical and empirical literature relating to genre analysis, including the works of Upton and Connor (2001), Bhatia (2001), and Swales (1990). The author includes the list of the rhetorical moves but does not discuss any specific procedures to be followed in the study. Cheung (2008) uses quantitative methods of data collection and analysis.
The context plays a very important role: the study is situated in Hong Kong, which serves the gateway and portal for international business in Asia (Cheung, 2008). However, that the study is situated in Hong Kong may limit the reliability and generalizability of the research results, since they may not easily transferable to other cultural and generic contexts.
The study participants are specialist informants from 10 different companies (Cheung, 2008). At the time of the study, all informants were responsible for marketing and sales communication in their companies (Cheung, 2008). The choice of the respondents was justified by the fact that they could share some information about the target viewers for their sales texts (Cheung, 2008).
The author describes the criteria used to select the texts and provides a detailed description of the data collection and analysis procedures. Unfortunately, how Cheung (2008) develops the list of rhetorical moves to be used in the study remains unclear. Nevertheless, the study is easy to replicate and the method answers the research questions. Cheung (2008) describes the data analysis procedure in detail.
Cheung (2008) does not discuss any ethical considerations and concerns, and there is no triangulation of the findings. The study is well designed but the lack of ethical details is one of its major limitations. The study involves human participants, who need the fullest information about the study, its goal and expected outcomes.
However, Cheung (2008) does not mention the importance of informed consent, which makes the results of the study less convincing. Cheung (2008) writes that the subjects could provide valuable information about their experiences of working with sales texts.
Surprisingly or not, no information regarding ethical considerations or informed consent is included. Cheung (2008) actually supports a thesis that there is a serious gap within ethical practices in applied linguistics research (Fox et al, 2006).
Article Critique Language is an ever changing phenomenon. The rationale for Askenave’s (2007) study is clear: marketization imposes new demands on higher education institutions and changes their professional and educational roles.
Consequentially, higher education institutions, and universities in particular, borrow and adopt free market practices to meet their needs (Askenave, 2007). The researcher justifies the study by the need to explore the influences of marketization on the discursive practices in higher education.
It should be noted, that no comprehensive theoretical framework was used to support the analysis. This is, probably, because the concept and phenomenon of marketization is relatively new.
Askenave (2007) provides a brief insight into previous research of the international student prospectus as a genre which, according to the author, is very sporadic and scarce. Askenave (2007) uses Swalesian genre theory, which treats genre as a set of shared communicative practices and explains the ways in which particular genres can unfold.
What research questions Askenave (2007) seeks to answer is difficult to define. Generally, any study or research project is designed to define problems and provide solutions or strategies that could be effective in helping to solve those problems (Patton, 2002). However, no effective interventions can be developed, unless research questions are clear.
Askenave (2007) suggests that her analysis is a relevant contribution to the debate regarding the changes in higher education practices under the influence of marketization. The research findings contribute to the current knowledge of the international student prospectus as a genre. Yet, Askenave (2007) should have been more specific and detailed in the development of the research goals, questions, and/ or hypotheses.
The article is well-structured. The second part of Askenave’s (2007) article is a case study of the international student prospectus from the University of Sterling in Scotland. According to Perry (2002), case studies are frequently used in applied linguistics research and can shed light on complex linguistic phenomena. Unfortunately, Askenave (2007) provides little information about the methodology.
As a result, replicating Askenave’s study is virtually impossible. Simultaneously, the thoroughness of the author’s analysis cannot be overstated. Askenave (2007) describes the process and results of the genre analysis in detail. This is particularly the case of the international student prospectus from the University of Sterling, which covers most of the article.
Askenave (2007) performs examines the prospectus’s lay-out and design; move structure in the Sterling prospectus is analyzed; the author analyzes its lexical and grammatical structures and experiential meanings. The latter, according to the researcher, play a crucial role in the analysis of the international student prospectus as a genre.
The lack of the ethical angle is one of the main gaps in Askenave’s (2007) research. Failure to obtain informed consent is essentially the same as failure to adopt a ‘participant-centered perspective’ (Fox et al, 2006). The author explores multiple modes and phenomena, creating a multifaceted but confusing picture of the international student prospectus and its generic features.
Finally, it is not clear what criteria the author used when choosing the four international student prospectuses for a cross-cultural genre examination. The research findings contribute to the existing knowledge of the international student prospectus but leave many questions unanswered. The future research must concentrate on the development of effective measures of validity and reliability in applied linguistics studies.
The overall opinion about the article is dubious. On the one hand, the study can serve the starting point in the analysis of the international student prospectus and the changes, which the genre undergoes under the influence of marketization in higher education.
The topic is extremely interesting and valid, since more universities want to borrow free market practices from the corporate world and consumer-driven organizations. On the other hand, the study points out the major inconsistencies and pitfalls in applied linguistics studies. Selectivity bias reduces the validity and reliability of the findings, because the criteria for choosing the target texts are unclear.
The author does not try to operationalize or standardize the research findings (Patton, 2002). No consideration is given to internal and external validity threats. Whether or not the results of the study can be successfully generalized to other international student prospectuses is unclear. Askenave (2007) does not report any research limitations and, therefore, leaves little room for methodological improvements.
These problems warrant the need for further research into the international student prospectus and its generic characteristics. These gaps and inconsistencies are also justified by the fact that the current state of literature about the international student prospectus is relatively scarce (Askenave, 2007).
Therefore, the best method of the student prospectus analysis is yet to be discovered. The article is just another attempt to shed light on a complex linguistic phenomenon.
Unlike Askenave (2007), the methods and results of Cheung’s (2008) study produce a solid scientific impression. One reason for this is that Cheung (2008) employs quantitative methodology, which creates a picture of reliability and validity.
Quantitative methods of research, particularly in applied linguistics, are believed to be more reliable and easily generalizable, compared with the qualitative methods of analysis (Davies
Public Administration in the United States Term Paper college admission essay help: college admission essay help
Introduction Public administration can be described as the study or a field of practice or occupation. Politically, public administration describes or defines how the various branches of the government strategize and implement policies. Government involvement in the public sector can be either directly on indirect.
When the government is involved directly, it employs public members to serve as employees for the benefit of the general population, while indirect involvement of the government would be when the government hires private contractors to carry out some of the stipulated public policies.
It also involves how public quarter organizations are categorized and managed, how the federal government and the cities, states and towns work hand in hand to attain their development goals in the interest of the people.
In legal terms, public administration means the ability to implement legislation in regulating the behaviors of different individuals provide job opportunities, goods and services to the citizens. The American public administration is one among the most admired administration in the world.
Many countries seek solution to their administrative problems from gathering facts compiled from the American Public Administration, however this does not mean that America is all perfect in ensuring that the public administration sector is always having smooth endeavors instead they also have challenges that they seek solution to.
A Constitution dilemma Public administrators are not only concerned with the management of public policies but also have some influence in the political field which they end up sometimes being dominant in political issues.
In America, according to many people’s view is that politics and administration should be totally separated from each other but this is not the case especially when presently only well organized administrations which are able to cope with the issues generated from all aspects can be seen as survivors and be regarded as the best.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The public officials who have influence in the political arena must be ready to take orders from other leaders who mostly are not bureaucrats especially when they don’t have the knowledge infatuated by selected officials (Friedman 2006).
One way of ensuring that an open democracy is preserved and enjoys its freedom is to ensure that the constitution is designed in a way that would enable political leaders to have an effective control over their public servant. These are people who are supposed to understand and be ready to face up problems that arise due to modernity.
Economy The economics of a country also counts as a major challenge in the public administration. The challenging economic background is that the economy and the economy policies of many states are in the process of transition. The economy of a country involves the choices people make.
This is the way people tend to choose and make decision depending on the affordability to obtain the resources to satisfy the unlimited human wants and needs. Economics can there for be explained as the human behavior which arises due to shortage means to accomplish given desires.
There are many relations between public administration and economics as most areas under public administration are economic in nature. An example is the public finance management of public enterprises economic planning among other fields.
The government has always played part in the economic affairs in the interest of socio-economic justice. The government’s participation has greatly and positively impacted on the economic growth of the country as through their involvement, new economic planning strategies are being implemented and processes of new forms of organization (Milakovich
ERP System Term Paper essay help online free
Table of Contents Introduction
Reasons for Recommending an ERP System
Disadvantages of ERP systems
Risks Associated with ERP Systems
Introduction An Enterprise Resource Planning, ERP, is a type of system that consolidates all management information and handling flow of data within an organization. It mostly kits a common enterprise data besides application elements to enhance everyday operational of business activities.
For example ERP can play an important aspect in managing finance, accounting, manufacturing, project management, sales, human resource planning, and distribution and so on. The ERP system is composed of three aspects; the information technology, specific business goals and business management practices.
This paper explores the valuable decision that a company can consider in adopting an ERP system. It further discusses some reasons why a company cannot opt for ERP system and identifies the risks the company can be aware of while adopting the system.
Reasons for Recommending an ERP System Many reasons arise as to why a company may implement an ERP system. It ties together business data and processes that would on the other hand disparage, aiding managers to have comprehensive business acumen. Besides integrating business processes, ERP assist companies in merging processes from all departments within the company and consolidate it in a central database.
This is achieved without incurring more costs and time hence making it easy for accessibility and smooth flow of work. Merging is achieved by building a database repository that allows integration with a variety of application software hence presenting business statistics and other information to various departments within the organization.
To have an ideal ERP system, the system should have an ERP structure which is made up of integrated central database repository in a fused environment
One reason why I would recommend my company to implement an ERP solution is to improve information accuracy and decision making. Modern business has created a competitive environment hence for any similar business to stay relevant it needs to have accurate managed information. According to Cruz-Cunha (2009, p.123), managing company’s future entails accuracy in managing information.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More ERP solution is important in strengthening both internal and external information needs of a company. Hence linking information from various sources enhances continues flow of information thus aiding in decision making.
In other words for instance, if a process starts within the manufacturing department and ends at sales department or marketing with stops in-between, an ERP solution can facilitate a smooth transition from the beginning to the end (Cruz-Cunha, 2009, p.102).
Besides, an ERP system functions in real time. This implies that if someone in an accounting department for examples captures certain information in the system, it would immediately be available to anyone who accesses the system. The solution is normally implemented with a comparable feel and look in all departments thus consistency is factored to enhance efficiency in the company.
Secondly, ERP improves the relationship and performance of the company and its suppliers. The quality of raw materials and the ability of dealers to supply on time are important for any successful company. Cruz-Cunha (2009, p116) suggests that, a company has to its select its supplier cautiously and screen their actions to identify any problems before they pose a threat to the company.
To recognize these benefits, companies depend on ERP systems to manage, plan and control the intricate process linked to supplier’s partnerships. The ERP solutions offers dealer procurement and management support apparatus intended to harmonize critical aspects of procurement procedure.
They aid a company to aptly monitor, control, schedule and negotiate procurement costs to ensure superior quality is guaranteed (Cruz-Cunha, 2009, p.125). ERP encompasses supplier management and control processes that aid a company in managing supplier relationships, dealer activities and supplier quality.
Thirdly, ERP increases flexibility of a company. Competition is alive in modern business environments, hence businesses which learn to respond to a customer’s wish besides market changes stays ahead of the game. An ERP system play an important role in aiding companies to accurately forecasts the future and lay strategies to ensure it succeeds.
We will write a custom Term Paper on ERP System specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More According to Malaga (2005, p.78), ERP encompasses forecasting tools to such as customer’s preferences sales projections, financial statements and feedbacks besides many tools. A company can rely on these tools to strategically plan and execute new ideas and strategies to remain competitive in business environment. Flexibility will ensure timely formulation of strategy and adjusting to prevailing market condition.
Fourthly, ERP system plays an important role in financial management. The market leaders or the best managed businesses in the world of today have embraced the ERP Financial Solution.
The adoption of an ERP financial solution has in many cases proved to make financial management more efficient. Financial management is a cornerstone is charting organizational success (Malaga, 2005, p.79). An ERP system makes financial management easier and efficient due to a number of factors.
Finance and accounting is, in a sense, about ensuring there are enough checks and controls on how organizational finances flow. ERP functions in a simple way; it has some internally embedded controls in its functions. With internal checks and controls, an ERP solution makes the preparation of accounts and other financial documents easier and fast.
It is very easy to generate account statements at the end of every accounting period. An ERP feature helps most companies to work with ease, because it can support various languages and currencies. Further, ERP systems or solutions are standardized or tailored in a way that it supports international operations; it meets the international accounting and reporting standards (Chorafas, 2001, p.76).
Financial ERP has various features and functions that enable organization achieve its financial management standards. One of the core features of most ERP’s is the Treasury; this is a feature that helps in providing risk management ability.
This facility is important because it enables an organization to know precisely how to manage their cash, and plan a head for financial risk. It also facilitates streamlining and interactions with financial institutions such as bank for matters regarding payment processes (Chorafas, 2001, p.89).
The treasury capability allows ERP applications to interlink endlessly with treasury activities which result in more effective control and management. It leads to integration with the ERP software general ledgers to guarantee adherent to policies and regulatory involvement in reporting financial standards (Glenn, 2008, p.83).
Not sure if you can write a paper on ERP System by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Financial chain management is a feature which is useful in ERP’s and which allows most companies to easily resolve disputes arising from invoices and significantly reduces their collections via electronic billings and other applications. Moreover, Seamless merging within ERP’s allows current information and accuracy reporting of information.
The seamless capability of ERP helps to minimize costs whereas improving net flow of cash in organizations. The feature of financial and management capability is quite beneficial in most organizations because it provide a cornerstone of accounting.
This facility allows accuracy in accounts reporting major large companies with distributed networks (Grant, 2003, p.90). The solution when integrated with general ledger enables achievement of accuracy in balances and reporting
Fifthly, human resource management is better managed by ERP system. Human resource is a valuable asset in a successful business enterprise. Adoption of an ERP system ensures continuous flow of Information related to labor or an organization’s personnel. When such information is received by the HR department it facilitates evaluations.
Human resource related evaluations help organizations in establishing skill and knowledge needs and well as attitude related gaps or issues that have to be addressed. The collection of such information is important for employees as it is instrumentally applied to encourage development of professionalism and improvement of working conditions within the organization.
Human resource managers handle huge loads of information. In big organizations, unless technology is adopted, it is very difficult to keep up to date data on all employees (Grant, 2003, p.68). ERP Solution is a productive management tool which comes in handy to orient and help users to remain focused on their task while focusing direct link with fellow staff (Grant, 2003, p.79).
This tool links personal ability and objectives to the aspirations and goals of the company. Through the use of ERP system, it is easier to facilitate collection and storage of information in a centralized location which allows staff in the human resource departments to center their goal in other strategic planning and personnel development.
Moreover, the operative functions are assumed and tailored automatically hence relieving the department personnel of work load. ERP provides integrated solution to all the different activities and functions in the human resource department.
These activities and functions of the human resource department include; the administration of payroll and manpower related, employee professional growth and development and the general administration in the organization (Grant, 2003, p.111).
Apart from providing the above mentioned services to the organization, the ERP solution provides a platform to enable decision making and analysis so that it can aid in management control reporting. Communication and especially internal communication is paramount in the day to day operations in an organization (Leon, 2007, p.98).
The ERP solution has been tailored to facilitate this function. Services such as opinion polls, news and appointment letters as daily communication examples have been proved efficient for being incorporated in the solution.
On management, the ERP features have tended to vary in regard of employee social benefits. but this social benefits such as vacation and trips and assessment forms have been catered in most ERP’s this simplify the work of Human resource department ( Leon,2007,p.103).
ERP solutions have enabled what is referred to as e-recruitment. The development of e-recruitment practice enabled by development of supporting ERP solutions play an important role in reduction of recruitment related costs for an organization. As the world job market gets complex and more demanding, many organizations have come up with e-recruitment process to enhance tapping the correct talent within and across their borders.
This means finding the right person for the right job. Developing a worthwhile human resource pool and human resource management structures is of great necessity to organizations. It is the human resource pool that drives the organization’s strategic goals or objectives to realization.
E-recruitment facilitates or plays a critical role towards identification of the right kind of employees in the globalized job market. E-recruitment assists the company to manage its recruitments processes more effectively.
Disadvantages of ERP systems One disadvantage associated with an ERP system is Cost. ERP solutions are expensive and complicated to implement and manage. This is the case in larger companies (Bansal, 2009, p.96). Perhaps, established companies have many legacy systems with different configurations thus it demands a great deal of project resources to unravel most of these system methods.
Besides, identifying overlaps, and establishing data feeds into the ERP systems is costly. Installations in larger organizations embraces bespoke solutions thus requiring specialized resources. In such cases, if the company is small or medium sized, the implementation outlay may pose a serious disadvantage. So, before adopting ERP, the company has to asses its capability.
The second disadvantage is the impact it brings on the business process. ERP solutions are dictated by changes in business processes. The changes can sometimes be complex.in order to determine each individual element appropriate in an ERP structure, it is uncertain that specific procedures and policies can remain intact (Bansal, 2009, 114).
Thus the application of ERP solution tends to mirror the architecture of a much broader business change project. These processes tend to be iterative hence when outlining the range of ERP solution at initial stages, most of these deliberations will not come to light.
ERP implementations tend to be viewed as projects that”compel” undesired changes on a company process (Bansal, 2009, p.69). When the ERP implementation is ongoing, often, no substitute is a solution but to alter business processes without starting from zero.
Also lack of adaptability and flexibility is a problem linked to ERP systems. ERP architecture conforms well to established businesses which have distinct procedures and practices. When these processes are aptly on place, ERP system will effectively support them.
However, for companies that are in a process of altering their business processes, ERP tends to be inflexible. This is because, an ERP system has a standardized architecture hence even a small change can cost a lot and complicate its implementation. Hence Companies, constantly exploring changes in line with their business process will not accrue like benefits from the solution because it not conforms to business activities.
Further, matters relating to ongoing support can be a serious setback if not addressed. Most ERP systems are mostly supported by third party dealers. This can lead to issues relating to service level agreements where quality of support and response time is not in tandem with company requirements (Bansal, 2009, p. 79).
Support and licensing fees can also surge the cost of the solution.Moreover, security of information stored in the ERP can be a major concern incase third party dealers are the custodian, thus many companies utilizing ERP are always at the sympathy of dealers with no adequate control over information and availability of the system.
Lastly, the ERP system erodes with the type of business. Efficiency of an ERP depends on the type of business and processes to be executed to aid and sustain the architecture. According to Bansal (2009, p.79), companies that have less investment in efficient training of their employees for instance, will not feel the results of ERP implementation.
Where companies work in a tight environment, the system will tend to give little results. The ERP architecture is anchored on an integrated business environment and limitation in sharing of information within departments will hinder efficient working thus creating more risk to a business.
Risks Associated with ERP Systems Without proper risks identification in selecting an ERP system, a lot of time, resources and knowledge can be wasted. Early risk identification ensures that success is achieved when a company is making a choice of implementing an ERP, because this incorporates of having a quality system in an organization (Grant, 2003, p.39).
The risk associated with the Implementation of the ERP systems includes the complexity of an application, lack of end user experience and lack of clear job definition of members handling the project. For any systems to successfully be utilized in an acompany, good end user support is important, lack of support poses a huge risk in implementing the ERP project in an organization (Grant, 2003, p.46).
Without proper job roles and specification, the project team can pose a serious risk in implementing the ERP project. The Project should be able to grasp and understand a complex technological problem regarding the application (Grant, 2003, p.56). This makes it better to relay and give clear support to the end user of the application. This eliminates risks and enhances proper implementation.
Lack of proper coordination between the company structure, strategy and processes and the choice of the ERP solutions also pose a severe risk. ERP alone cannot really improve the performance of the businesses (Harwood, 2003, p. 57).
Companies or organization should reduce the risks by restructuring its operational processes and the implementation should be seen as a business initiative. Unless an organization fails to strategize its implementation goals, this risk can make it harder for quality implementation (Harwood, 2003, p.77).
Loss of Project control is also a major risk in an ERP project implementation. ERP project loses control in two major ways which includes; lack of control over the project team members and failure to control the employees when the system is implemented and in operational (Jutras, 2003, p. 58).
This failure or lack or coordination leads to decentralization of decisions which develops into unproductive authorization of decisions. To ensure effective decision making and enabling proper ERP implementation, the collocation of information about ERP implementation, the company should set up a project implementation team.
The team should be conversant and have relevant information and knowledge about ERP system implementation (Jutras, 2003, p.79). The team should have knowledge of information Technology or change management skills. Decision making should be conferred to the team by the management
ERP also pose risk, Operational ERP solution results in responsibility of devolution and empowerment of lower or middle level employees. If no proper controls are instituted, either within the ERP or in the process that organization deems best, then there will be a potential risk (Jutras, 2003, p.87).
Complexity of the project also poses a major risk in ERP project implementation. ERP systems involve the use of large expenditures which encompasses software, hardware, consultation, implementation costs and training. This always takes more time to be completed (Leon, 2007, p.68).
ERP projects have been known to take longer time than other ordinary Information system management. The complexity of this ERP cause change of roles in the company and this pose a business risk in an organization
Lack of important in house skills in an organization also creates a risk in implementing an ERP system (Leon, 2007, p.98). This has been attributed to lack of skills by the project team which is associated with program development risk.
ERP development and deployment requires a variety of skills which encompasses, risk management, change management, technical knowledge in implementation among other factors. Most organization lacks knowledge on change management needed for ERP implementation (Myerson, 2001, p.68).
Furthermore, ERP is build using a programming concepts, this is sometimes new to existing IT personnel in an organization. Thus, lack of house skills regarding the ERP systems creates a possible business risk (Myerson, 2001, p.68).
Conclusion The ERP is designed to provide much needed facility within and geographically dispersed businesses across a multi platform with its functional units.
This has been viewed as important to support itinerant management executives to have much needed details to support their decision making at the management level. For effective choice of an ERP system, a company as to efficiently explore its usefulness, demerits and risks factors to have a clear understanding.
References Bansal, S., 2009,Technology Scorecards: Aligning IT Investments with Business Performance, John Wiley and Sons, New Jersey, NJ
Chorafas, D., N., 2004, Integrating ERP, CRM, supply chain management, and smart material, CRC Press, Boca Roda, FL
Cruz-Cunha, M., M., 2009, Enterprise Information Systems for Business Integration in SMEs: Technological, Organizational, and Social Dimension, Idea Group Inc (IGI), New York, NY,
Glenn, G., 2008, Enterprise Resource Planning 100 Success Secrets – 100 Most Asked Questions: The Missing ERP Software, Systems, Solutions, Applications and Implementation, Lulu.com, North Carolina
Grant, G., G., 2003, ERP
Article Analysis: “What Muslim Consumers Expect” by Miles Young Report (Assessment) essay help site:edu
Introduction The article by Miles Young, called “What Muslim Consumers Expect”, published in the journal of “Market Leader”, discusses the special considerations that marketers should put in place when selling to Muslim consumers. This paper analyzes the issues raised in the article.
The article The focus in the article is how to sell to Muslim consumers; the writer is of the view that the western nations and companies have sidelined this market segment in their marketing practices. The articles sends some light to the approach of the market segment where the writer is of the opinion that there are some ideologies, related to the practices of the religion that need to be looked into when marketing for this segment.
The writers starts the article by criticizing western marketing approach which he is of the opinion that the market segment has been taken as any other market segment, a factor that has challenged efforts to tap the market effectively.
The writer after diagonising the approach taken by the westerners, he comes up with suggestions on how the market can be tapped effectively. He brings the issue of the influence that religion and culture have on how people behave and the kind of choices they make. According to the article, Muslims are special market segments that need some special recognition if one has to build a strong brand name.
The writer in the article is of the opinion that despite the market segment being like any other section, the influence that their religion has should be considered, a marketer should develop marketing policies that seem to be in line with the needs of the muslims religion.
At the beginning of the article the writer is of the view that the market is one of the largest market segment that the world has, it can assist marketers in numbers abd has a strong financial base.
The theory that prevails When Mile was writing the article, there is one theory that has stood out and needs to be considered when dealing Muslims; the theory of culture intelligence.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Cultural intelligence is a marketing strategy management tool with an organizational psychology, which emphasizes that understanding or individual, group, communal and national culture enhances strategic management; it influences the capacity for a business to engage successfully in a certain environment.
In this case the most dominant aspect of the Muslims is the culture and religion that they subscribe to; to have an appropriate marketing campaign a marketer needs to understand the dynamism of the market. According to the managerial tool, human behavior is to a large extent and element of their culture, consumer behavior, attitude, beliefs, suppliers and country of origin perception has an influence on business.
An analysis of the character John Nash in the movie A beautiful Mind Term Paper a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help
Introduction Various theories have been fronted by psychological professionals to explain the reasons why individuals respond to changes in their lives in a particular way. Elizabeth Hutchinson has particularly provided extensive studies on different theoretical perspectives that can be used to analyze an individual’s situation in her book titled, “Dimensions of Human Behavior: Person and Environment.”
This essay is based on a study carried out on the character John Nash from the film A Beautiful Mind. Hutchinson’s theoretical perspectives will serve as guides in the analysis assisted by the work of various other writers.
Five theoretical perspectives have been used to analyze Nash’s situation in relation to the society in which he lives. These five theories are part of the eight perspectives which Elizabeth Hutchinson has explained in detail in her book Dimensions of Human Behavior (2008).
Synopsis of the movie A Beautiful Mind John Nash (Russell Crowe) is awarded the prestigious Carnegie prize for mathematics and joins Princeton University. Initially, he is supposed to have a room to himself but he is surprised to find that he has a roommate by the name Charles. Charles is a literature student and the two soon become friends. Other than Charles, members of Nash’s social circle at Princeton are either Mathematics or Science graduate students, amongst them his greatest rival in class, Martin Hansen.
For his thesis paper, Nash works on a theory in mathematical economics; a concept that is inspired by an unsuccessful attempt to chat up a woman at a bar. He finally graduates and accepts an offer at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology
A Beautiful Mind 4 (MIT). While working as a Mathematics lecturer at MIT five years down the line, he falls in love with Alicia Larde (Jennifer Connelly), one of his students, and they eventually get married. Later, Nash returns to Princeton where he meets Charles, his former roommate and Charles’ niece, Marcee.
He also meets William Parcher (Ed Harris), a mysterious agent who invites him to the United States Defense Department located at the Pentagon for an assignment. He (Nash) is expected to crack a very complex encryption code to an enemy’s telecommunication network. His fellow hackers are amazed and at the same time impressed by how easily he cracks the code.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More After this incredible success, Nash is assigned a new task to look for patterns in various publications; information which would be used to stop an invasion plan by the Soviet. He is instructed to deliver the report of his findings to a particular mailbox. The
Russians become aware of his involvement and hunt him down with the aim of killing him. The danger he finds himself in makes him paranoid and he starts making inconsistent decisions.
While giving a lecture at Harvard University, he notices a group of people watching him and attempts to flee. His pursuers soon catch up with him and after putting him under sedatives, they send him to a psychiatric hospital. His paranoia causes him to perceive the attendants at the facility as Soviet kidnappers on a mission to obtain unlisted information from him.
Alicia, goes to the mailbox and recovers the documents that Nash had deposited months earlier and uses them to confront him. It is then that he is convinced that he has been hallucinating. He discovers that the meetings with Marcee, Charles’ niece as well as the encounters with Parcher have all been
A Beautiful Mind 5 figments of his imagination. He receives insulin shock therapy and is released from the facility on condition that he promises to take antipsychotic medication.
Unfortunately, the drugs that he is prescribed to negatively affect his intellectual capacity and the frustration that ensues puts a strain on his marriage. He finally gets off the medication and relapses into psychosis. The situation is so bad that he almost drowns his son while bathing him. His wife takes the child and attempts to run away for fear of losing their lives but he blocks the car’s path.
It suddenly occurs to him that Marcee never grows old since the first time he met her and he once again accepts that he has been hallucinating. He finally resigns to the fact that he has to live on medication and even gets a job at Princeton courtesy of his old-time academic rival, Martin Hansen who happens to be the head of the institution.
We will write a custom Term Paper on An analysis of the character John Nash in the movie A beautiful Mind specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Eventually, he is allowed to teach again and wins several accolades including a Nobel Prize in economics for his work in Mathematics.
Character analysis The analysis character John Nash can be approached from perspectives which include psychological, social and spiritual (Hutchinson, 2008: Carter,
“Devil in a Blue Dress” By Carl Franklin Essay writing essay help
“Devil in a Blue Dress” is a movie produced in 1995 depicting the dramatic experiences of an African American novice private eye in 1948 Los Angeles. The movie falls under the Neo-noir category as it is set in the classic era between 1940 and 1950 and has the characteristic neo-noir theme of a major African American character that is faced with a tough life situation compelling him to make difficult choices out of desperation.
The major themes in the film are violence, crime and love (Brode 114). The movie is outstanding due to the historical accuracy achieved because of director Carl Franklin’s in-depth research and the impressive cinematography. The impressive acting by two of Denzel Washington and Don Cheadle also adds to the film’s appeal.
The movie’s main character is Ezikeal Rawlins, also known as Easy, who is an African American Second World War veteran seeking employment in the Los Angeles after losing his job in the aircraft manufacturing company. He gets a client named DeWitt Albright, who commissions him to find a missing woman by the name of Daphne Monet.
Easy sets out to track Daphne, who is rumored to frequent illegal black clubs. However, as he continues with his search for Daphne, Easy realizes that he has got himself involved in a dangerous political rivalry where the big players are trying to set him up. When he realizes the danger he is facing, Easy confronts Joppy, his bartender friend who introduced him to DeWitt Albright, and blames him for his current troubles.
Joppy retorts that he is not responsible since he was only trying to help Easy, who was desperate, make some money. Easy is able to unravel the mystery, which involves political blackmail and murder. Eventually, he solves the case and is paid for his work.
Devil in a Blue Dress is, actually, a very amazing phenomenon in the movie industry, mainly because of its success, since there are a number of elements that might not and should not have worked. The story of a detective who is in search for a mysterious and beautiful woman has done to death by that time, and it would have taken a miracle to make this plot work.
Thankfully, the director was perspicacious enough to understand how the clichéd story must be updated to meet the demands of the 90s audience and put a very strong emphasis on the characters.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More When it comes to defining what works for the movie’s advantage, one must admit that the lead character is easily the most notable element of the movie, no pun intended.
Easy is not simply the character of a film noir – he is noir, because he incorporates the elements of a noir genre. Easy is what movie critics call “a private eye” (Ebert para. 3), he wears the kind of clothes that one would expect a noir character to, and he has the laid back attitude of a noir character that Nicholas ray from Lonely Place would have died for.
Though Denzel Washington has obviously put a lot of effort into making his character credible and likeable, Don Cheadle as Mouse nearly steals the show. Cheadle is perfect as a lead character’s buddy straight to the point where critics claim him to be the best character in the film.
However, it is not simply Mouse who turns the movie into a stylish neo-noir universe – these are the interactions between Easy and Mouse that push the movie forward and make the film unique: “This ain’t your friend’s car? What’d you do Mouse?” – “Just drive this sumbitch!” (Devil in a Blue Dress 37:02).
The atmosphere of the movie created with the help of original setting is also worth mentioning as a staple of the neo-noir genre. In most of the important scenes, the light is dimmed and shadows are used as a major tool for creating a noir atmosphere.
Picture 1. Easy at the Ambassador Hotel. (Devil in a Blue Dress 1:05:17).
Finally, the story also deserves being given a mention. Despite the fact that the idea is very stale and has been used by any director shooting a film noir, Carl Franklin managed to make a few alterations that helped push the film noir genre forward without changing it to the point where it stops being recognizable.
We will write a custom Essay on “Devil in a Blue Dress” By Carl Franklin specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More For example, the fact that the romance between Easy and Daphne went nowhere was a very risky move that would not have worked in a traditional film noir. However, by creating unique and memorable characters, Franklin managed to fit it into the neo-noir genre esthetics.
It would be wrong to deny that the movie has its flaws. Carl Franklin could have conjured a better and a less clichéd story instead of tying together a bunch of staple plotlines with the help of more than traditional plot devices.
However, the characters created by the actors are so strong and enjoyable, that the movie miraculously works and attains a unique flair. One of the most memorable movies of all times, Devil in a Blue Dress will clearly be remembered for long and is bound to become a classic example of a neo-noir genre.
Works Cited Brode, Douglas. Denzel Washington: His Films and Career. NY: Carol Publishing Group, 1997. Print.
Devil in a Blue Dress. Dir. Carl Franklin. Perf. Denzel Washington, Tom Sizemore and Jennifer Beals. TriStar Pictures, 1995. Film.
Ebert, Roger. Devil in a Blue Dress. 29 Sep. 1995. Web. .
Virgin Blue: Marketing the corporate plan Case Study best essay help: best essay help
Introduction Virgin Blue which is currently known as Virgin Australia is an airline company situated in Australia (Ranson, 2006). Analysis of literature has shown that this is the second largest airline in the country. The company is also based in Queensland, Brisbane and Bowen Hills (Raggatt, 2009).
These are the numerous brands which were founded by Virgin Blue’s Chief Executive Officer Sir Godfrey Brett. The airline was established in 2000 and was later expanded in 2001(Ranson, 2006). Since then, the airline has developed numerous brands located in some of the cities in Australia.
Having operated for several years, the company has established a corporate plan for marketing its services at low cost. Consequently, this has made the airline to become a new world carrier, a factor that has equally improved its competitiveness with other companies of its status within the airline industry (Ranson, 2007).
It is against this backdrop that this paper discusses and evaluates the company’s background, marketing plan and numerous changes that have taken place in its operations.
Background of the company and its marketing plan
After the company was launched officially in 2000, it began its operations with only two single types of Boeing 737aircrafts (Ranson, 2006). This made it possible to make approximately seven flights daily from Brisbane city to Sydney. After a short while, the company expanded the flights by covering all the major cities in Australia.
Ranson (2006) observes that the expansion was triggered by stiff competition that existed among sister airlines in Australia. The entry of the brand to the market was a significant development within the Australian market since it replaced the gap left by Ansett Australia which collapsed in 2001.
Having replaced the Ansett Australia airline, it effectively dominated the market taking over the already established players, a factor that made it to rank second among the distinguished airlines in Australia. The airline grew rapidly to a point that it was able to access the entire terminus in Australia (Francis, 2006).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In order to increase its marketability, the airline initially acquired new equipment that enabled it to phase-out its old aircrafts. In this case, it replaced the Boeing 737-400 series with 7000 and 8000 series (Ranson, 2007). Moreover, the aircrafts were equipped with winglets, modern glass cockpits and had greater fuel efficiency.
It is imperative to note that in terms of flight cost, Virgin Australia faced stiff competition from other airlines (Knibb, 2005). As a matter of fact, it developed new cost models in order to elevate its marketability. For instance, the company adopted the best cost strategy that enabled it to offer differentiated services for relatively low costs than other brands (Anila, 2007). Therefore, the airline marketing strategies experienced a change since it focused on its crews to advertise new operations.
From a careful review of history, it is definite that the brand has faced numerous marketing challenges. For instance, as an international and domestic company, it has to devise ways of changing its marketing strategies to make them convenient and compatible with the prevailing market competition (Ranson, 2006).
Moreover, the adopted changes had to be attractive to travelers and the market at large bearing in mind that the company could lose its customers’ share. Studies have shown that the marketing changes made in the last five years have not sufficiently hit the target due to the increase in costs and new entrants in the market (Anila, 2007).
Notably, the flights conducted by the airline are leisure-based and hence are largely affected by economic crises. Therefore, irrespective of the marketing strategies, there comes a time when consumption declines. At this juncture, the company relies on government agencies, departments and business travelers who rely on travelling as a basic necessity (Raggatt, 2009). For this reason, Virgin Blue airline has ensured that effective marketing is one of its core activities.
Describe and evaluate the most recent changes to Virgin Blue which included dropping the Blue part of the Virgin brand and responses by competitors within the Australian market
The most recent development noted in the company is the change of its name from Virgin Blue to Virgin Australia. This change occurred in 2011 when its executive officers opted for the new brand name in order to redefine the airlines’ position in the local market. In addition to rebranding the company’s name, the management also opted to modify the staff uniforms and business-class seat (Ranson, 2007).
After effecting these changes, it is anticipated that it will help to make the new brand peculiar from other extensions such as Pacific Blue and Polynesian Blue (Francis, 2006). It is important to note that before the changes were implanted, the brand name had been fragmented to the extent that it could not be distinguished from other brands. In this case, it is definite that the change was also meant to transform the brand into a business class category which is largely perceived as a benchmark for success of the airline (Anila, 2007).
We will write a custom Case Study on Virgin Blue: Marketing the corporate plan specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Research has shown that this change is stage managed to ease the company from stiff competition. Furthermore, most of its competitors have branded their airlines with similar names. Some of these changes have been executed deliberately in order to attract more travelers who are often undecided on the choice of flight to use.
It goes without saying that the competition posed by other brands such as Qatar airlines led to stiff market rivalry (Anila, 2007). Additionally, even the unveiling of a new brand name, logo, staff uniforms and business-class seats led to more rivalry. Notably, the company could not accomplish the intended changes at once and therefore, it had to be implemented in stages. The other companies responded by improving certain features in their brands in order to keep the pace set by the Virgin Blue airline.
Evaluate Virgin-Blue’s changes to strategy using Ansoff’s matrix sand their best cost strategy and whether the strategy is being maintained within the present competitive environment, if not how best would you describe any changes?
According to Raggatt (2009), Ansoff’s Matrix is a tool that is used to develop marketing strategies in a business. These strategies include improving existing products, pricing and market environment. Therefore, the tool recognizes four major strategies such as market penetration, product development, market development and diversification. It is apparent that Virgin Blue airline has heavily applied the strategy of market penetration to increase its sales (Moynihan, 2003).
This has been made possible by product promotion and reduction of prices. It is arguable that the company understands the risks and products required in the market. For example, it has established business-class equipment such as new craft designs and staff uniforms. This has significantly improved the image of the company to become the second best world carrier in Australia (Ranson, 2007).
Besides, Virgin Blue has developed its products and services to meet the consumer need in the existing markets. Knibb (2005) notes that product development is one of the medium risks since every business employing this strategy understands or is familiar with marketing new services and goods. In this case, the airline was quite aware that the existing market required new models and efficiently designed aircrafts.
This made it easier to replace the Boeing 737-400 series with those of 700 and 800 series (Ranson, 2007). Besides, the company has employed market development strategy in order to maintain its position in the excising market. In this case, it employed the best cost strategy in order to attract more passengers. The company has used this strategy to enhance differentiation of services hence offering quality services at low costs.
Nevertheless, the airline has tried to create a balance between differentiation, quality and cost in order to evade price war that might occur due to competition (Raggatt, 2009). This strategy has continued to be maintained even in the current market situation since it has enabled the company to maintain a top position amid its competitors. Therefore, a best-cost strategy is recommended since it guarantees future success of the company.
For a business traveler who may traditionally select a legacy/full-service carrier such as Qantas, evaluate how Virgin Australia may present a value proportion that could attract a customer to this airline
There are numerous ways through which Virgin Blue airline can present its value proportion to attract customers. For instance, in order to boost its legacy, the airline expresses its value proportion by creating a strong marketing and sales team who are able to market the company’s services directly to the clients.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Virgin Blue: Marketing the corporate plan by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More According to Ranson (2007), this will enable the company to acquire corporate clients who will be extremely important in contributing towards its success. In the process of marketing its products, Virgin Blue should offer discount for given volume of travels and can also partner with other agencies that offer additional services to travelers (Moynihan, 2003).
Moreover, the company can also lower costs of operation which is an added advantage for overhead expansion in numerous regions. This will help it to capture corporate clients in diverse destinations. The latter strategy will boost flexibility of travelers in spite of geographical barriers.
That notwithstanding, Virgin Blue company can employ or develop superior services and products that will attract large masses of travelers who will prefer the airline to traditional ones (Raggatt, 2009). For instance, if the company can reduce the overall time taken for travelling by disembarking on the use of modern aircrafts, it will not merely attract new clients.
It will also ensure that there is a good flow of return customers. A particular attention should be paid on improvement of cabin designs, travel processes, technology and product quality. This will help the company to stand out among other competitors and traditional airlines such as Qantas.
Conclusion To recap it all, Virgin Blue has registered considerable success in the past 10 years since it was established in 2000. Moreover, its one-time performance has increased significantly by developing new brands in different cities both in Australia and abroad. Effective marketing strategies have enabled the airline to rank second in Australia. Despite stiff competition facing the airline, it has employed numerous strategies such as development of new products, rebranding and market development.
References Anila, A. (2007). Virgin dumps budget image. B
“Power and Powerlessness” by John Gaventa Essay college essay help: college essay help
Power generates authority and powerlessness reinforces subjection. This is the simplest summary of the article Power and Powerlessness written by John Gaventa. In every society, people struggle to be in powerful positions. Individuals struggle to be in position where they can dictate every single aspect human life. Leaders use the power they have to preserve the status quo. The weak in remain fragile because they are too feeble to compete with the powerful.
Moreover, because they are too weak, the powerful would always ensure that they do not overcome the limitations surrounding them. The world of status quo, which is a situation where the strong get stronger, as the weak get weaker, is the world that John Gaventa talks about in the article. It is the world, in which the powerful would do everything to retain power.
In this article, we are introduced to politics of inequality and the pathetic working environment at Appalachian Valley. The society is unjust to many members in various ways. To begin with, the level of poverty in the society is very high because there is a massive lack of employment in society. However, the relevant authorities are comfortable with the situation. They know very well that poverty is one of the best weapons of retaining power.
While ensuring that the poor remain poor, the powerful are sure of retaining power, as the rich would not have the time to think about retaining power. The poor would be too busy fighting for survival but not competing with the rich. To justify the unemployment in such societies, the leaders, as presented in this article, would ensure that the poor is denied education. As such, the inability of the poor to acquire good jobs would be justified by the fact that they have limited education.
The society has the majority suffering from malnutrition. The poor cannot till land because they have small parcels, which can hardly generate enough food to sustain them. The intrigue comes in the fact that there are huge tracks of land lying idle because the owners are too busy with other businesses. Those who could till them for economical gains are denied the opportunity to do so because the powerful wants to retain their power, by ensuring that the powerless remains defenseless.
The coal miners work under pathetic conditions. These miners are exposed to various dangers at the mines. When mining, miners would be prone to lung infections, dismemberment of body parts and even death. The environment is exposed to massive pollution. The owners of the companies have very little concern as regards to the well-being of societal members.
They pay workers wages that are hardly enough to feed them and their families. In contrast, companies generate huge sums of money to owners. The owners might not be in a position to spend such monies in their entire lifetime. However, because of the need to ensure the status quo remains, they would come up with ways to ensure that workers continue working in deplorable conditions. They would always use threats and intimidations to ensure that power remains within their grip.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More What is more fascinating is the fact that the workers have trade unions with leaders who are supposed to represent them. However, the leaders play the game of politics meaning they make a lot of noise, make empty threats to the management team and empty promises to members. What therefore comes to mind from this article is the politics of poverty, the working class consciousness, and corporate power.
A Strategic Plan to Involve School-Family-Community Partnerships via Service Learning Essay writing essay help
Service Learning is a learning and teaching strategy that combines essential community service with formal instructions received from class. The process focuses on strengthening communities through the development of civic and personal responsibility. It makes the students reflect and focus on the needs of the community while at the same time improving their academic skills. (Follman, 1998).
Through service learning, students develop a commitment to their communities and gain skills to handle real-life issues. The principles and practices gained through formal teaching are enhanced when they are applied to the social context. Students are able to reflect concurrently when they learn through experience. The process makes students responsible citizens who actively contribute to the needs of the community through the practical application of their formal instructions.
Service learning promotes academic development, social growth, and community involvement because it integrates learning from schools and colleges with organizations that are either faith or community-based. The students participate actively in the community development projects. The community benefits in improved public health and safety, a more sustainable environment, better social education, among others.
The interaction of the students, members of the community and the educators creates a unified society. The benefit gained is mutual because the youth gets educated by the community while they address the concerns and needs of the community. For instance, the students may decide to collect trash lying in the environment. By so doing, they may use information they have learned formally to determine the source of the pollution.
When the results of their findings are shared with the community’s residents, they collectively address the problem (Pearson, 2002). Through the collaboration of the school, parents and members of the community, everyone enjoys a better environment. Service learning therefore effectuates a fundamental shift in traditional pedagogy to make classes interesting and engaging. When students apply their formal knowledge and skills to make the community a better place, they become inspired, motivated and ultimately empowered.
Service Learning promotes academic development because it offers students a platform where they can apply the knowledge they have acquired in the classroom practically. The strategy enriches the formal learning that takes place in the classroom by applying it through doing service to the external environment.
The academic development of the students is also enhanced because they are provided with an avenue to showcase their ability. They come up with a service to be delivered, design a strategy to deliver it, implement it and monitor what they initiated. This encourages them to seek more knowledge in the field because it instills a personal sustained interest.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The strategy promotes social growth because it supports the operation of the social agencies that are created to develop the community. It is a philosophy pedagogy that develops the community through the use of a learning method that satisfies the academic objectives. When practical learning strategies that satisfy social needs are developed, social growth becomes evident.
Some of the student learning activities that may improve social growth are the provision of portable toilets, unclogging the drainage systems, among others. Parents should encourage their schooling sons and daughters to get actively involved in service learning because it benefits them as well as the community as a whole.
Service Learning promotes community involvement through community partnerships. A community partnership is whereby the residents partner with the community agencies to identify the needs that are urgent, then mobilizes resources required to complete the relevant projects. The partnership becomes successful when students are engaged in the community agency to offer the relevant skills and services.
Reference List Follman, J. (1998). Florida Learn and Serve: 1996-1997 outcomes and correlations with 1994-1995 and 1995-1996. Tallahassee, FL: Center for Civic Education and Service, Florida State University.
Pearson, S. (2002). Finding common ground: Service-learning and educational reform. Washington, DC: American Youth Policy Forum.
Discussion Question: One hallmark of professionalism is self-reflection. The ability to reflect back on your learning will allow you to continue to synthesize new learning with current knowledge. Plea college essay help online: college essay help online
The ability to reflect back on your learning will allow you to continue to synthesize new learning with current knowledge. Please review the course objectives in the Syllabus. Reflect upon your learning in this course and describe in detail how you have met each of the course objectives.
Your initial posting should be at least 400 words in length and utilize at least one scholarly source other than the textbook
Create a 7-9 minute video that reflects upon the clinical problem that you have identified in your area of nursing practice (as identified in Module 1). Critically appraise the research and summarize the knowledge available on the clinical problem (minimum requirement of 6 scholarly journal articles reviewed and appraised for application to practice problem). Outline a strategic plan for implementation of a practice change in your clinical practice environment based upon your findings. Describe how you intend to operationalize the practice change in your practice environment. What theoretical model will you use and how will you overcome barriers to implementation? What sources of internal evidence will you use in providing data to demonstrate improvement in outcomes? Describe evaluation methods of implementation clearly. Are there any ethical considerations?
The presentation should be a simulation of what you would present to your unit staff in an effort to gain buy-in as you initiate the practice change in your area of practice. Use a recording platform of your choice and either upload as an mp4 or share the link directly to the video in the dropbox. ***Please do not record as voice-over PowerPoint because this cannot be saved in mp4 format or a link.*** If you submit your assignment as a PowerPoint with voice over recording you will not receive credit for your assignment (or partial credit as you did not meet the full requirements of the assignment.)
If PowerPoint is used for the presentation, include the reference slide; if PowerPoint is not used in the presentation, please submit a list of the references in a Word document utilized to develop the presentation in APA format to the dropbox in a separate submission (be sure to orally cite your sources if no PowerPoint is used to identify the sources)
Length: 7-9 minute presentation (with or without PowerPoint slides); if no PowerPoint used submit APA Reference list separatelyStructure: If PowerPoint is used: Include a title slide, objective slide, content slides, reference slide in APA format. There is no specific slide number required. References: Use appropriate APA style in-text citations and references for all resources utilized to answer the questions. A minimum of six (6) scholarly journal articles are required for this assignment.
OHS in the Australian Offshore Petroleum Industry Report online essay help
Introduction An examination of the study presented by Parkes (2012, pp. 1636-1651) reveals that the offshore petroleum/gas extraction industry is ranked among the most dangerous industries for workers due to the rather volatile nature of the extraction process (Parkes 2012, pp. 1636-1651). As Parkes (2012, pp. 1636-1651) explains, possible hazards in relation to working on an extraction platform include:
possible pump failure resulting in an explosive pressure build-up
hazardous weather conditions creating the possibility of the platform being battered by hurricane-force winds
the inherent dangers of working on a raised open platform within a constantly damp environment
various natural disasters (i.e., earthquakes, hurricanes, tsunamis, etc.)
Current estimates on the number of deaths per year within the industry vary due to a large percentage of offshore platforms often existing in countries, such as Cameroon, Equatorial Guinea, Gabon, Mexico, and a variety of other states where the regulatory environment can best be described as “spotty” due to the relatively lax safety regulations that are implemented in favor of increased profitability (Chakhmakhchev 2010, p. 32).
Current estimates place the number of injuries that have occurred on a global scale between 2001 to 2010at 5,281 with several dozen dead (primarily, within Mexico and the U.S.; however, due to the relatively high number of reports originating from such countries, it is not truly indicative of the sheer scale of the deaths that occur within the industry on a daily basis) (Chakhmakhchev 2010, p. 32).
Fortunately, Australia has experienced relatively few deaths within its offshore petroleum extraction industry in the period of 2008 and 2012 with incidences, primarily, isolated to these of the Western Australian Coast and those within the Victorian coast. It does not mean that the potential does not exist for a significant amount of causalities to occur.
What you have to understand is that there is a significant disparity between the workplace health, safety and protection rights between workers on offshore drilling platforms and those that work on dry land (Outlook for Australian offshore remains bright 2012, p. 42).
An examination of relevant text on the issue reveals that workers on offshore platforms are exposed to a variety of adverse work stressors which impact their ability to perform and result in a higher likelihood for accidents to occur (Offshore oil
Assistive Technology Outcomes and Benefits Case Study best college essay help
As the disabled people population increase, technological advancement has kept the pace to cater for their needs. As a result, it has become easier for disabled or impaired people to access technology. This is in the context of their daily lives as well as academic acquisition.
Various stakeholders including the government, organizations, and employees have been active in facilitating or helping the disabled by either offering humanitarian assistance or implementing law to protect the disabled.
In addition, the improvement in technology has resulted in devices and equipments that can assist the disabled to access facilities and services that other people can access. More so, the Assistive technology has helped the disabled to be less dependent to others with easy accessibility to services and products using assistive devices.
For instance, people with impairments can use “curb cut in architecture, standing frames, text telephones, accessible keyboards, large print, Braille, and speech recognition software” (Orpwood, 1990, p. 73).
In addition, disabled people have commonly used wheelchairs and consequently governments have instructed that buildings should have facilities that will meet the movements, and accessibility requirements of the personal effects. However, these assistive technologies face hostility as people criticize some of them. For instance, cochlear implants for children face many controversies from public. Nevertheless, most of these assistive technologies are important to people in need.
Case study 1 Academic or behavioral issues
Emily is virtually impaired or she cannot see well under various aspects. As a student, she has suffered much because of her low vision and sometimes she has to consult her friend. This may cause an academic problem to her because she cannot match with the rest of students in class, especially when reading from far.
As a result, she requires assistive technologies that can amplify letters for her to read easily. In addition, she require some assistive technologies that will help her participate in various activities that require good visibility so that she does not result in hurting herself or hurt her friends during these activities.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Assistive technologies that will address the Emily’s academic or behavioral needs
To start with, Emily may use “software that reads text on the screen in a computer-generated voice” (Schlosser,
Carrefour Management Strategies Research Paper college essay help online: college essay help online
Introduction Carrefour is a French retailer operating in several countries in the world. Its biggest markets are situated in Asia and South America. However, the country operates outlets in Europe, particularly France. The retailer has also been a case of success since it is the second biggest retail company in the world.
Several strategies have made Carrefour’s success possible. On the other hand, the company also suffers some problems that threaten its dominance in the retail business. In general, Carrefour has been one of the most successful retailers in the twentieth and the twenty-first centuries.
How is a strategic plan defined and what examples can you provide the board from your chosen company?
A Strategic plan is a detailed outline of the future intentions of an organization. This outline analyzes the position of the business entity in question. In addition, it defines the measures that are to be applied by the business entity in order to move in the desired direction (Grünig
The International Trade Risks for Global Businesses Report essay help free
Introduction Globalisation and the expansion of international trade have significantly increased the volume of world trade. This development has seen the volume of international shipping increase yearly. Now, new business practices such as outsourcing, lean manufacturing, and just-in-time inventory (among others) form the conventional business paradigm.
Through the adoption of these new business paradigms, organisations have found themselves increasingly stretching their supply chains. Unfortunately, this growth brings new challenges and risks. These challenges and risks often lead to supply chain disruptions that can significantly affect a company’s bottom-line by reducing revenues, reducing market share and inflating operational costs (among other business setbacks) (Stanley 2008).
A past FM global study sampled 600 executives around the world who identified supply chain disruptions as the greatest threat to their revenue incomes (Bosman 2006, p. 2). Supply chain risks for operating in the global market have also been investigated by professors from Georgia Institute of Technology and the University of Western Ontario who explained that organisations could take up to two years to recover from disruptions brought by supply chain risks (Bosman 2006, p. 2).
Even with such statistics, some managers do not understand that the changing nature of the business environment (brought by globalisation) has brought new dynamics in their business risk profiles. Unfortunately, managers who recognise the new changes in their business risk profiles still operate under the mistaken belief that they are helpless to the new supply chain risks brought by globalisation (Bosman 2006).
This paper explores the dynamism that globalisation has brought on supply chain management by identifying new risk elements that international trade poses to global businesses. This report also highlights risk dimensions, best practices, critical issues, challenges, and trends in international supply risk management.
Preliminary Information about Risks It was easy to contain risks at the start of the industrial revolution. However, with the onset of globalisation (in the eighties), it has been difficult to contain such risks.
As mentioned in earlier sections of this paper, the supply chain process has been affected in this regard. Risk profile changes have especially been informed by the quest for international companies to seek the cheapest markets for developing their products and services (Stanley 2008). It is therefore unsurprising that global corporate giants such as Apple Inc. outsource some of their business processes to Asia and ship back their products to America and other parts of the world.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More With expanded supply networks, companies have paid dearly for the increase in supply perils. As mentioned in earlier sections of this paper, some managers have accepted these new risks as a new cost of doing business, while others ignore them as ordinary business risks. A past study that surveyed 800 corporations that suffered supply chain risks (between 1989 and 2000) reported a 30% – 40% lower stock return among these companies (compared to the average industry standard) (Bosman 2006, p. 3).
This statistic was true, regardless of the type of industry and the time when such risks occurred. Furthermore, public companies that experienced such risks experienced a share price volatility of more than 13% (Bosman 2006). From the same study, it was reported that companies, which suffered supply chain risks experienced a 7% drop in their sales revenue growth.
Similarly, these companies experienced an 11% surge in operation costs and a subsequent increase of inventory costs of not less than 14% (Bosman 2006). From these statistics, the new risk dynamics brought by global trade have a significant impact on the sustainability of company operations.
Review of Literature Risk Dimensions
With the proliferation of international trade, companies now face a host of new perils such as currency fluctuations, piracy risks, political risks, failed communication with business partners and cyber fraud (among others). These are just a few examples of the new supply chain risks that globalisation introduces.
The severity of these risks are scattered around different geographical areas. For example, piracy risks are rampant in unmanned shores of Somalia (East Africa). Political risks have also hampered shipping operations in trading routes along the Middle East (such as the close of the Suez Canal during the Egyptian revolution).
Within Western circles of trade, terrorism risks have been most profound. Regardless of the new risk profiles, companies still have to manage traditional risks such as natural disasters, fire, breakdown of equipments and other conventional supply chain risks (Stanley 2008).
Best practice in supply risk management is aimed at adopting a coordinated approach to risk management (which is built by acknowledging the importance of adopting a holistic approach to risk management). Best practices in supply chain management are hailed because they adopt a more rigorous approach to identifying and analysing risk failure points within a company’s supply chain.
We will write a custom Report on The International Trade Risks for Global Businesses specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More According to Lynch (2011), the best practice in supply chain management is encompassed by seven core principles. These principles are: gaining visibility (up and down stream), simplifying complexities, establishing accountability for risk activities, establishing third party custodial risk, risk incentives and penalties, creating a business case from investments, providing holistic insurability, and maintaining relevance.
The principle of simplifying complexity is defined by understanding resources as tools for creating value. Alternatively, this principle may be understood under the lens of improving a company’s service offing (or product lines). The principle of establishing accountability for risk activities should be understood within the context preferring a company’s profit and loss standing as opposed to the ascertainment of the company’s assets.
The principle of creating a business case for investments is given a lot of importance as a key component of supply chain management (Lynch 2011, p. 6). In addition, like other risk mitigation strategies in different risk management profiles, providing holistic insurance is explained as a core component of supply chain management (best practice) because it safeguards against risks, which have already occurred.
However, Lynch (2011) explains that holistic insurability should be implemented beyond physical cover to other risks such as political risks, legislative risks, and financial failures. Finally (and most importantly), best practice in supply risk management is also hinged on ensuring the risk profiles identified have a direct bearing on the supply chains of greatest value. Here, Lynch (2011) advises that companies should give priority to qualitative metrics and refrain from focusing on only those risks that pose a threat to their operations.
Even as companies grapple with the problem of new risk dynamics, the Supply Chain Council (SCC) contends that there are exceptional challenges, which pose a problem to the overall management of new risk dynamics (Supply Chain Council 2012). One such challenge is the rising costs associated with operating on a global context. Globalisation has indeed expanded the market and companies now have to meet the demands of these new market segments.
However, other operational costs are still on the rise. For example, labour costs remain sticky upwards and new technologies involved in global trade demand newer upgrades to a company’s information technology platform (thereby increasing the overall costs of operations). New regulatory demands (especially occasioned by the changing political environment) and rising freight charges also bring new costs to the overall cost pool already incurred by companies.
These new cost dynamics pose new challenges to the measurement and control of supply chain costs but the Supply Chain Council (2012) explains that to control such costs, companies can adopt several metrics. The most commonly advanced metric is for companies to identify their main cost drivers and focus on controlling them.
Another notable challenge to risk mitigation and management in the supply chain process is the lack of sufficient talent to address the changing risk dynamics that businesses face from globalisation. Indeed, organisations have scaled their operations to meet the changing business demands of new markets (especially developing markets) but there has not been a measurable response from the talent market to provide the necessary skills for managing these new challenges.
Not sure if you can write a paper on The International Trade Risks for Global Businesses by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This shortfall is witnessed when the importance of training, talent management, and development is becoming increasingly important in supply chain management decisions. Supply chain leaders are therefore left with a major skill gap that threatens their efficiency in managing new risks dynamics brought by changing business operations (Supply Chain Council 2012).
In a 2000 book written by Lambert and Cooper (titled, Issues in Supply Chain Management), the understanding of supply chain management is voiced as the greatest issue in supply chain management.
The changing face of supply change management (brought by globalisation) has further compounded this definition but Supply Chain Council (2012) elaborates that managers should understand supply chain management to include “the integration of key business processes from end user through original suppliers, that provides products, services, and information, that add value for customers and other stakeholders” (p. 3).
In this regard, the efficiency of supply chain management should be perceived in the context of value addition (to customers and stakeholders). It is therefore untenable for managers to misunderstand the scope of supply chain management because it undermines the efficiency of their decisions in this regard.
Despite the existence of supply chain management in business processes, there has been a continual failure for managers to establish distinct supply chain departments in their organisations. From this weakness, there has been a resultant weakness in merging supply chain decisions into company decision-making processes.
This way, critics have found it easy to criticise the importance of supply chain decisions and their effectiveness in complementing managerial decisions (Supply Chain Council 2012). To improve this situation, it is important for managers to realise the importance of supply chain management processes and understand the importance of integrating this process into the overall decision-making process of the organisation.
The current trends in managing supply chain risks are skewed towards moving the supply chain closer to home. Albeit current supply chain decisions have been motivated by the prospects of benefiting from low operational costs in developing countries, recent statistics reported by Iowa State University (2010) show that labour costs in these developing countries are quickly growing.
For example, labour costs in China are increasing by about 20% every year and different companies are now moving their supply chains to low-cost countries (as opposed to countries that have low labour costs) (Iowa State University 2010). This is the current trend in supply chain management.
Conclusion Supply chain risks have increased with the increase of global trade. This paper identifies increased costs in supply chain management as a prevalent issue in the practice. Indeed, many organisations find it expensive to build back-up operations, buy insurance policies for new business risks such as terrorism and piracy, or even employ new technologies in supply risk management.
Initially, such costs prove to be expensive, but if such cost measures protect organisations from the adverse effects of new supply chain risks, it is worth the investments. Therefore, company managers should understand that the benefits of managing the new dynamics of supply chain risks outweigh their possible costs.
References Bosman, R 2006, The New Supply Chain Challenge: Risk Management in a Global Economy, FM Insurance Company Limited, Berkshire.
Iowa State University 2010, Emerging Trends In Supply Chain Management, Iowa State University, Iowa.
Lynch, G 2011, Supply Chain Risk Management: What’s working? What’s not. Web.
Stanley, E 2008, ‘Benefits, barriers, and bridges to effective supply chain management,’ Supply Chain Management: an International Journal, vol. 13 no. 1, pp. 35 – 48.
Supply Chain Council 2012, The Five Most Common Supply Chain Challenges. Web.
The Doctrine of the Christian Life by John M. Frame Essay (Critical Writing) essay help: essay help
People are inclined to find the definitions and characterizations for almost each situation, aspect or phenomenon. That is why, there are always a lot of questions about different objects or concepts, and it is important to find the answers to these significant issues. In his book The Doctrine of the Christian Life, John M. Frame discusses the most controversial aspects of ethics from the point of the Christian tradition, stating that all the ethical questions are based on the religious or biblical fundament (Frame 2008).
Having concentrated on the opinions and explanations in relation to the most controversial ethical questions provided by the author in Part I and Part II of the book, I determined several points significant for their further discussion and analysis. These key points are the question of good works which is discussed in Chapter 3, the problem of understanding the Bible, and the issue of atheism discussed in the chapter about the connection of ethics with religions.
The argument of John M. Frame is not difficult to follow because all the concepts and explanations depend on the basic idea that ethics should be discussed with references to the Bible. From this point, the concept of good works is based on the personal desire to follow the biblical principles.
Thus, according to Frame, the definition of ethics is correlated with the notion of God’s blessing when only definite persons, their acts, and their attitudes can be discussed as good or ethical because they respond to God’s will (Frame 2008, 10).
It is rather difficult for me to correlate the difference between good and bad actions with biblical principles which can be discussed as liberal or conservative. However, Frame draws the readers’ attention to the fact that good works depend on the right motive, right standard, and right goal which are associated with God’s control, authority, and presence (Frame 2008, 26-28).
That is why, I understand good works in their connection with the virtue ethics, basing on the inner personal qualities, and with references to Frame’s explanation of living the ethical life and doing good works. Thus, to follow the ethical life means to be biblical (Frame 2008, 6-7).
The next problematic question which I could answer with the help of Frame’s work is the problem of understanding the Bible and, as a result, ethics. Thus, “a person who understands the Bible is a person who is able to use the Bible to answer his questions, to guide his life”, and the author explains the issue of understanding the Word of God and its reference to ethics as the active usage of moral principles which should guide the person in his or her life (Frame 2008, 31-32).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Now, I can consider the ethical life as the life which is built according to the principles presented in the Bible because they emphasize the devotion to God.
Many people who study the problem of ethics and its connection with the issues of Christianity are inclined to discuss the question of atheism as rather controversial. Having started the reading of the book, I was interested in the author’s opinion on the problem and his position, and the following explanation helped me to understand the point and examine it from different perspectives.
Thus, I agree with the statement that “nobody is really an atheist, in the most serious sense of that term” because everyone believes in something, and it can be God, idol or idea (Frame 2008, 52-54). From this point, non-Christian ethics and philosophical conceptions are also related to the ideas of biblical ethics.
Having read the first parts of The Doctrine of the Christian Life by John M. Frame, I could start the examination of the most important questions in order to find the balance between the theoretical concepts presented in the Bible in their connection with the ethical issues and their realization in the everyday life.
Reference List Frame, John M. 2008. The Doctrine of the Christian life (A theology of Lordship). Phillipsburg: Presbyterian and Reformed, 2008.
Experience in Problem Solving Essay college essay help online: college essay help online
Introduction Problem solving is a process that people go through to determine, analyze and solve problems. Problem solving requires some creative, analytical, and mental skills in order to solve a problem. Logical or analytical thinking skills include, comparing, ordering, selecting and evaluating which provide an agenda for problem solving that helps to decide on the best alternative solution, identify the problem, gather formation, choose the cause and identify the best possible solutions for implementation and finally review.
Group Work At the beginning of the new semester, the lecturer gave us a topic to discuss on drugs affecting the youth. The assignment was to be submitted by a certain deadline and the best one was to take a price. No student had an idea on how to go about it. I came up with an idea of forming a group to discuss the issue that is the problems that affect youth who are using drugs.
Each member in our group gave various ideas and solutions on the matter, what is more, each point was carefully written down. Some of the ideas such as punishing the victim involved in drugs or jailing them were not an appropriate solution for such victims. Some of the obstacles that hindered the ability of solving problems effectively were lack of relevant information, Ignorance and assumptions.
The students tried to come up with solutions that were all not applicable in this case. Therefore, I came up with an idea that every student should identify the problem, search for information about drug abuse, choose the cause, identify the possible and the best solution which can be applied.
On the next group discussion, every member had some points to support their facts, which we were discussing in detail and recording important points; the aspect that made this discussion enjoyable is that every member was able to contribute his or her thoughts that improved social interaction, sharing of values and culture from different members; self esteem was raised for the members who felt inferior and a lot of knowledge was exchanged.
In the group discussion, members were able to contribute their ideas with confidence because every member was free to give his or her own opinion. As I presented our work, it scored the high marks and was rated the best one.
Conclusion The members were very happy with the approach I used to tackle the problem we were facing for finding solutions and they were thankful a lot. During the semester, we used the group work in our academics and other activities that improved our skills, social interactions, and grades making everyone happy about it.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This also helped me in my college entrance exam. The group work discussion method improved our social skills and I would recommend it for people who find it difficult to follow the process of problem solving and search for assistant from people who are experienced in this area.
Innovation, Change and Leadership Essay cheap essay help
Abstract Innovation involves creation of new customer value by developing solutions that satisfy emerging needs, unarticulated needs, as well as, existing market needs in a different manner. This can be achieved by introducing new products, processes and technologies. Change, on the other hand, involves initiating and managing the consequences of new business processes, organizational structure and culture. In most organizations, change and innovation often occur simultaneously.
Thus, the two can be conceptualized as two sides of the same coin. Change and innovation can be realized if the process is guided by effective leadership. This paper presents a critical review of various innovation and change theories. An assessment of my leadership skills will also be discussed.
Critical Review of Innovation and Change Theories Theory E
The aim or purpose of this theory is to facilitate creation of economic value inline with the expectations of the shareholders. According to this theory, creation of economic value is the most important objective of the firm. Thus, it is the only objective that should be pursued. Additionally, financial incentives are used to motivate members of the organization to achieve the sole objective of creating economic value. Leaders using this theory focus on changing the organization’s strategies, structures, as well as, systems.
Since these aspects of the organization can readily be changed, quick financial results can be achieved. Since market expectations drive change, the change process must be pragmatic and well planned. In order to develop these plans, the organization has to engage large consulting firms for professional advice. This is expected to enable the organization to realize rapid and outstanding improvements of its economic value.
The main strength of theory E is its ability to facilitate high returns on investments. In this regard, it promotes sustainability since the high returns can be used for further investments and programs that benefit all stakeholders. However, the theory has several drawbacks. To begin with, the focus on strategies and systems is less likely to be effective, especially if employees are not involved in the process of changing the organization’s structures.
This is because the employees are not likely to identify with structures that are imposed on them. Besides, ignoring the ideas of employees prevents innovation. It is apparent that not all organizations can afford the services of large consulting firms. Besides, the solutions developed by the consultants can be ineffective if the needs of the organization are not clearly understood or the solutions are not properly implemented.
While financial incentives can motivate achievement of change, skill-based incentives have to be implemented to facilitate innovation. Skill-based incentives will promote acquisition of advanced skills which must exist if meaningful innovation is to be achieved.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Finally, the theory provides a narrow view of the firm. In modern economies, objectives such as corporate social responsibility (CSR) and good corporate governance are just as important as the financial objective. Thus, the financial objective cannot be considered in isolation of other objectives which often facilitate its achievement.
According to theory O, the purpose of change is to enable an organization to develop capabilities such as employees’ ability to identify and solve problems associated with their work. In this regard, the main objective is to develop a work system that promotes emotional commitment among employees in order to improve the firm’s efficiency and effectiveness.
Thus, the management has to articulate and promote the values and behaviors that inform the organizational culture and emotional commitment. Theory O advocates for non-pragmatic and emergent planning for change. Planning is led by the employees and is done through experiments which facilitate innovation.
Motivation is developed by engaging employees. Thus, financial incentives only play a supplementary role in motivating employees. Proponents of theory O prefer a consulting model that focuses on process. The rationale of this preference is based on the premise that small projects and engagement of a handful of consultants will facilitate a lasting cultural transformation that promotes innovation.
The main strengths of theory O is that its focus on organizational culture helps in implementing a lasting change which all stakeholders identify with. By promoting commitment among employees, innovation and improvement in the organization’s performance can be achieved even in the absence of financial incentives.
Additionally, it is easier to innovate if emerging issues are taken into account during the planning process. Similarly, a consultancy model that focuses on process promotes innovation by enhancing employees understanding of new processes. The culture of experimentation and innovation is internalized by the employees and this promotes the creation of economic value.
Theory O is often criticized due to the following flaws. To begin with, the fact that non-financial objectives are equally important does not mean that the organization should not focus on creating economic value. It is apparent that a firm that performs poorly in terms of returns on investments will be less attractive to investors.
We will write a custom Essay on Innovation, Change and Leadership specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Besides, poor financial performance will hamper the implementation of programs that promote commitment among employees. In this context, theory O can not promote sustainability in the long-run. Cultural transformation and development of emotional commitment often take a long time.
Thus, theory O can not be used to implement revolutionary change. Finally, ignoring expert advice from consultants can hurt the organization. In most cases, product and process innovation requires expert advice and ideas which can only be obtained outside the organization.
Leadership of Change and Innovation According to theory E, change and innovation should be led through a top-down leadership approach. The leader does not involve his or her management team and other employees in making key decisions. Thus, change and innovation decisions such as restructuring and adoption of new technology are only made by the chief executive officer.
The rationale of this approach is that the delays associated with consultations during decision making can be avoided. In addition, the organization can avoid the risk of entrusting lower-level staff with the responsibility of making strategic decisions during turbulent times.
The weakness of the top-down approach is that leading change requires a powerful coalition that consists of change advocates, targets, sponsors and agents. The leader as the change advocate can not achieve meaningful change by excluding the coalition members. A top-down approach also jeopardizes innovation by discouraging ideation among employees.
Finally, a top-down approach exposes the organization to the risk of failure, especially, if the leader is not a visionary and an effective change advocate. His failure to consult other members of the organization will certainly lead to failure.
Proponents of theory O believe that effective leadership of change and innovation should involve collaboration with employees. Thus, employees should be actively involved in identification of problems and finding solutions to such problems. This involvement is expected to facilitate creation of trust, and commitment that is fundamental for performance improvements.
It also promotes ideation which informs innovation. Besides, long-term change can be achieved if the employees are committed to the change process. However, participative leadership can be a slow way of achieving change. It can also be interpreted as a way of manipulating employees to achieve pre-determined goals.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Innovation, Change and Leadership by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Examples of Change Successful Change at Barclays Bank UK
Between 2000 and 2003, Barclays managed to spring back to profitability after years of poor financial performance. In 2004, the bank hired a new CEO, John Varley, who realized that the bank had to change in order to make its strong financial performance sustainable.
The change that Varley believed would facilitate sustainable growth was to focus on employee engagement, as well as, customer satisfaction. He used theory O to effect this change by shifting the focus from financial performance to non-financial indicators of growth. Varley worked with his management team and developed a set of metrics for measuring the bank’s performance in the marketplace (customer satisfaction), organization (employee engagement), and communities (network).
Initial analysis revealed that Barclays performed poorly on these metrics and this prompted a culture change in 2004. These metrics were incorporated in the bank’s medium term targets and the bank managed to record steady growth in profits from 2004 to 2008.
The success of the change can be attributed to the CEO’s ability to create a strong change coalition, and a sense of urgency (Kotter 1995 1-18). He also had a clear vision by using the non-financial metrics to define the bank’s future. Engaging the employees helped the bank to realize the mistakes that underlay its poor performance. Additionally, the focus on non-financial indicators became the main theme in the bank’s cross-group communication.
The measures to be taken by each employee within a specific timeline were identified. These new imperatives were aligned to the reward, as well as, recognition system to promote motivation and emotional engagement among employees. The CEO led the change through selfless leadership which was based on organization-wide consultations. Thus, the focus on these indicators became part of the bank’s organizational culture, thereby facilitating a lasting change. By 2008, the bank boasted of a highly motivated staff and excellent customer service.
Less Successful Change at Citygroup Bank
In order to strengthen its performance, Citygroup merged its investment bank, Solomon Smith Barney, with Schroder in 2001. This move was based on recommendations made to Citygroup by financial analysts and consultants. The decision was made by top managers and junior employees were not consulted.
The change focused on strategy, by restructuring the operations of the two banks and consolidating their resources. Hence, the change was based on theory E. However, the change did not succeed in boosting the bank’s performance as was expected due to the following reasons.
The change ignored the organizational cultures of the two banks. Schroder had a culture that focused on long-term employment, client service, soft perspective and Japanese management style. Solomon Smith, on the other hand, had a culture that focused on American style, hard perspective, and product development.
The culture clash not only lowered the morale but also precipitated a mass exodus of talented employees from the two banks. This increased the cost of labor turnover, and lowered productivity. The bank’s attempt to use financial rewards to retain staff from Schroder failed. This is because the staff believed in greater involvement in the bank’s affairs rather than financial rewards.
Conclusion Change and innovation are essential and inevitable in every organization. In order to realign themselves to market dynamics and improve their competitiveness, organizations must consistently innovate and implement change. Successful change and innovation depends on how well the process is led by the change advocate. Additionally, the theory that informs the innovation and change process determines success.
In general, innovation and change can be based on theory O or theory E. Each of these theories has its weaknesses and strengths as discussed earlier. Thus, the change advocate must make deliberate efforts to address the weaknesses of the adopted theory. This will help in avoiding failure.
Works Cited Aitken, Paul and Malcom Higgs. Developing Change Leaders. London: BH Press, 2010. Print.
Beer, Michael and Nitin Nohria. Breaking the Code of Change. Boston: HBS Press, 2000. Print.
Goffin, Keith and Rick Mitchell. Innovation Management. London: Palgrave Macmillan, 2010. Print.
Hayes, John. The Theory and Practice of Change Management. London: Palgrave Macmillan , 2010. Print.
Kotter, John and David Cohen. The Heart of Change. London: HBS Press, 2002. Print.
Kotter, John. Leading Change: Why Transformation Efforts Fail. London: Harvard Business School Press, 1995. Print.
Stamm, Bettina. Managing Innovation, Design and Creativity. New York: John Wiley and Sons, 2008. Print.
Francois Marie Arouet (Voltaire) Essay college admission essay help: college admission essay help
Francois Marie Arouet (Voltaire) was a French philosopher and a writer. Voltaire was born in the year 1694 in Paris. As a young boy, Voltaire received his education at the Jesuit school between the years 1704 and 1711. At the school, Voltaire learned Latin, Greek, English, and Spanish.
Between the years 1711 and 1713, Voltaire studied law while working as a secretary in Paris. Later on, Voltaire quitted the law school, and concentrated on writing contrary to his father’s wishes. As a writer, he wrote several writings in all major literary fields. It is estimated that he wrote more than 1800 books, 20 000 letters and numerous brochures. Through his works, Voltaire became prominent for his wit and hilarious verses.
During the Voltaire’s time, Europe was going through the age of enlightenment. With contribution from various intellectuals, advance knowledge spread across most urban areas in Europe. In spite of the advanced knowledge, it should be noted that stern and suppressive laws with severe consequences were practiced at the time. Similarly, it was blasphemous to champion Christian dogmas.
In spite of this, Voltaire became a social reformist, and criticized religious intolerance, war, and social injustices in French institutions. As a result, Voltaire was arrested severally and imprisoned by the authorities. To date, Voltaire works are considered absurd. His works portray him as a racist individual, who has no respect for the Jews and the Africans. More often, he questions the Africans’ intellectual ability due to their involvement in the slave trade. Until his death, at the age of 83, Voltaire worked as a writer.
In writings, satire refers to the art of using irony, mockery and sarcasm to provoke individuals’ or society’s behaviors. For a writing to be acknowledged as a satire, it must possess the following five characteristics: be targeted at the crooked, be humorous, be reform oriented, be ironic, and be exaggerated. Satirical writings try to point out faults in society and organizations. By doing so, actions, injustices, shortcomings, and policies are denounced.
Most writers do not choose to express their thoughts through satire to cause harm or damage, but rather to expose the vices in the society through humorous and comical ways. As a result, appropriate use of satire is considered as the most effective way of exposing evil traits in the society.
In my opinion, Voltaire through Candide uses satire to condemn the world’s evil, Christian dogmas, and war in the society he lived in. Candide ridicules a variety of secular and idealistic theories. He sarcastically illustrates several inherent evils in the world such as earthquakes, diseases, and storms. Through this text, religious leaders and the authorities felt offended.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More
In-room Technologies Used in the Hotel Rooms Research Paper college admission essay help
Introduction The following research paper analyzes in-room technologies used in the hotel rooms, which have been used by most hotels globally. It also looks into how the technological advances all over the globe affect the hotel industry and how the industry is prepared to adopt the in-room technologies which are used inside the hotel rooms specifically for the guests. The hotel management directly provides the technologies by installing the devices in all the rooms.
The management can also facilitate the use of such technologies by installing the necessary hardware and software to enable the guests to use their devices when in the rooms. The research highlights the strengths, weaknesses, opportunities as well as threats presented by these technologies to the hotel industry, and hotel rooms services in particular.
The first part of the discussion touches upon different factors that have facilitated the development of the in-room technology as part of the background information. The second part explores different types of in-room technologies used in hotels. The final part of this essay is a SWOT analysis of the in-room technologies to determine their benefits and costs that they bring to the hotel industry.
Background information In the past hotel would provide a bed and a linen and the guests would be fully satisfied with such things. However, nowadays the hotels have intensified the marketing and competition for the travelers in the hotel industry. The gyms or spacious rooms are not enough to provide comfort when travelling (Clow, 2003).
The modern technologies have been integrated into everyday life and most of the guests cannot agree to live in an area where there are no technological services such as the internet, television or power connections to charge their cell phones. This means that the modern technologies must be accounted for when taking care of the guests.
The hotel markets have also changed drastically due to the increased availability of information for the travelers on where they can get fair rooms services enabling the guests to compare places where they can receive the utmost value for their investment.
This has reduced customer loyalty hence programs previously offered by the hotel companies to loyal customers have not been effective as they were previously. The baby boomers’ generation that is considered loyal and has been the target of the hotels service providers has diminished and there are new markets from generation X that is people born between 1960’s and 1980’s (Nicholas, 2007).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More With the increased competition among the hotel service provides, the need to provide in room services has been on the rise. Days when the recreation and hotel rooms were for people on transit and leisure alone, are gone. Hotel rooms need to accommodate the travelers’ preferences (Schultz, 2000).
The modern day guests in the hotel rooms are not concerned with the outdoor experiences only but want a place where they can be entertained while in their rooms. This means that the hotels must have ways of providing in-room entertainment to the guests.
The hotel room technologies The first technology is the television, which is important in the hotel rooms. The guests prefer hotel rooms that will keep them abreast with what is happening outside the rooms, in other words, in the world. Although guests prefer hotels with mainstream television channels, hotel service providers who want to cut a niche in the market and develop return customers, have to provide cable television to the rooms.
This is preferable for the customers who want in-room entertainment and may prefer to watch movies or cable programs through the cable television. For guests who prefer to watch movies a Video player or VCR player is preferred (Ming, Yang
The Major Leadership Principles of Teacher Essay (Critical Writing) essay help
Leadership is one of the most important factors that contribute to organizational development. Researchers have analyzed a variety of strategies that could be used in various cases. It becomes apparent that teacher/school leadership can enrich leaders’ skills. It is possible to single out two major principles of leadership which are the basis of teacher/school leadership and can become decisive for any organization. Thus, leadership should be based on instruction and support.
First, it is necessary to provide a definition of leadership. Leadership is a set of “activities… designed by organizational members to influence the motivation, knowledge, affect, and practices of other organizational member” (as cited in Spillane, 2005, p. 384). When analyzing teacher/school leadership, it is possible to see the same trends that occur at workplace. Thus, a teacher should gain respect and become a model for the students (Mulford, 2006).
This authority becomes a basis for every leadership incentive. Likewise, inspiring leader is the one who is respected and seen as an expert by other members of the organization. The best way to gain the leadership is to reveal extensive knowledge on major issues. This respect will be essential in case of the necessity to implement changes. Members of organization will not resist to changes if they trust their leader.
Admittedly, leadership is not confined to authority. Teacher/school leadership is instructional. Teachers instruct students to help them cope with the assignments. The instructions should be adequate and complete. At this point, it is important to note that Spillane (2005) states that it is not that important to understand what leadership is but to understand how leadership should be distributed. This is quite important as sometimes leadership is ineffective due to the wrong distribution.
Instructions should be given in accordance with the abilities of the recipient. Teachers do not give too complicated tasks to those who will not cope with them; teachers also provide perfectly clear instructions for each student (using students’ language, so-to-speak). Likewise, leaders should make sure other members of the organization are capable of coping with the given tasks and they have the necessary instructions to complete the tasks.
Apart from instructions, support is of paramount importance in teacher/school as well as organizational leadership. Thus, teachers provide their backup and they support incentives of students who strive for development. Horng and Loeb (2010) claim that teachers tend to support students.
However, the researchers add that this is not enough as teachers should have support on the part of principals. Innovative techniques and support of students’ incentives should be supported by principals. When it comes to organizations, support should be manifested on every level. Leaders should be able to listen to each member of organization and support incentives that contribute to development of the organization.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More On balance, it is possible to note that teacher/school leadership can help organizational leaders work out specific tools to influence other members of organization properly. Organizational leaders should remember that it is important to establish proper image to become a model for other members of the organization.
Proper instructions and support should also be used extensively. It is also important to remember that support should be manifested on every level and each member of organization should have voice. Each incentive should be supported and appreciated. These all principles and factors should be taken into account when developing leadership at workplace and especially when introducing some changes.
Reference List Horng, E.
Mitsubishi and Sony companies Report writing essay help: writing essay help
Introduction A business report is meant to provide investors and other stakeholders with information that is important in running a particular business. Specifically, business reports give the stakeholders an idea on the status of their investment. These reports also highlight problems encountered by the business. They also contain the strategic plans that will be put in place to solve the problems in the future.
This paper is an evaluation of two companies’ annual reports. The paper takes into consideration all factors in business reporting, such as services, products, the environment, and the internal and external stakeholders. The paper will be based on the annual reports of Mitsubishi and Sony companies.
The two companies have come up with reports to create awareness among all the stakeholders. This is as far as corporate social responsibility (herein referred to as CSR) in the two companies is concerned. The reports also address the CSR strategies that the companies are planning to undertake
The Report Scope and Limitations of the Report
This paper will focus on the differences between the reports of the two companies. This is in terms of the range of issues dealt with in the reports and how these issues are addressed. Specifically, the report will cover the following issues:
Explain the differences between the reports of the two companies in terms of such factors as country and industry of focus.
Assess the quality of reporting in the two companies based on Zadek’s 1997 criteria (Zhong 2009).
Evaluate the appropriateness of using standardised reporting procedures in the two companies.
Make recommendations on how each of the two reports can be improved. The need for such improvements will also be highlighted.
These are addressed below:
Identifying the Differences between the Reports of the Two Companies in Terms of the Range of Issues Dealt with and how the Issues are Addressed
In this section, the author will try to identify the issues addressed by the two companies in their respective reports. The author will also try to analyse how each of the two companies address these issues.
Mitsubishi Materials’ CSR Report for the Year 2011 A critical analysis of the report reveals that it was intended to provide information to investors and other parties interested in Mitsubishi Materials Group. It was also formulated to create awareness on Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) activities undertaken by the Mitsubishi Materials Group.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The report was structured using clear, precise, and simple language. This is to make it easier for the stakeholders to understand (Mitsubishi Corporation 2010). It is also noted that the report covers nine different areas that were selected to highlight the best strategies to acquire materials in the 2008 fiscal year.
The report has gone a step further to elaborate on the company’s medium-term management plan, which was put in place on August 2011. Additionally, it addresses the initiatives taken by the group to deal with the damage caused by the infamous ‘Great East Japan Earthquake’ and its devastating effects.
The report is not a mere summary of the company’s CSR initiatives. On the contrary, the report is aimed at improving and diversifying these initiatives. To this end, the report is presented in a precise and accurate way to provide the reader with relevant and meaningful information that is significant for the growth of the company. The report meets the requirements of the Global Reporting Initiative (herein referred to as GRI). This is required given that the company is affiliated to CCMM (Mitsubishi Corporation 2010).
The disclosure of information touching on the company’s operations is not limited to the report on material CSR. It is noted that information about the company can also be found in the CSR section of the company’s website. This is all aimed at effectively reporting on the company’s extensive CSR activities.
An undiscerning reader may form the opinion that the report focuses more on 2011 fiscal year than on any other period. This is not the case, given that the report has incorporated information related to activities before and after that time.
Being a member of the ICMM, Mitsubishi has assumed the responsibility of publishing the Metals Company Supplementary Data Book, which is a significant online report that extensively reviews the undertakings of various metal companies. This is all aimed at enhancing full disclosure of information in the industry (Mitsubishi Corporation 2010).
The review also addresses the actions taken by the company’s three smelting subsidiaries. These are Hosokura Metal Mining Co. Ltd., Onahama Smelting and Refining Co. Ltd. (Sony Global 2012), and PT Smelting in Indonesia.
We will write a custom Report on Mitsubishi and Sony companies specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The company has adhered to version 3.0 of the Global Reporting Initiative’s (GRI) Sustainability Reporting Guidelines. The report contains a disclaimer to the effect that any individual wishing to invest in the company on the basis of the information provided in the report will be held liable to any damage or losses accruing thereof. This is given that such a decision should be personal.
Sony’s Annual Report for the Year 2012- Business and CSR Review The report is structured in such a way that it provides the reader with information on the company’s activities during the 2011 fiscal year. The report addresses the company’s corporate social responsibility initiatives, as well as the business and investment initiatives taken. The report also introduces the new CEO and president of the company, Kazuo Hirai.
The company provides information on the three major businesses that it is running. These are electronics, financial services, and entertainment. The financial and entertainment sectors recorded a positive growth. It is also noted that the two sectors are expected to grow further in the future (Sony Global 2012).
However, the electronics market is unpredictable. The proceeds from the electronics sector were relatively low as a result of the effects of product commoditisation. This is in addition to the effects of the deteriorating foreign exchange rates. It is for this reason that the biggest task for the incoming CEO should be to reposition and reconstruct the electronics business. It is a matter of urgency as far as the stakeholders are concerned.
Sony Corporation has a reputation for ground breaking innovations and products, as well as high quality entertainment services. The company has over the years inspired many investors. Its scope of operations and methodology has made various stakeholders very curious.
However, it is noted that the group now aims at revolutionising its most valuable resource, which is the Sony’s DNA. This is the strong will, ability, and desire to come up with high quality products and services. This has been in place since the inception of the company. The group now aims at ensuring that every employee owns and expresses the Sony DNA individually so as to enhance growth of the company (Sony Global 2012).
In the fiscal year 2011, the company’s operations, especially in the electronics field, were adversely affected by the earlier mentioned Great East Japan Earthquake. This is together with the infamous Thailand floods of 2011. The situation was made worse by the economic crisis that negatively affected many foreign currencies.
This in turn led to a decrease in the prices of the goods and services offered by the company. The company recorded an operation’s loss of approximately 67.3 billion Yen. This is in comparison to the 199.8 billion Yen in the previous fiscal year. This was as a result of the decline in the net sales.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Mitsubishi and Sony companies by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The company also reported on the measures put in place to address such situations in the future. This is especially so the measures put in place to revamp the electronics business. The directors expressed the need to act fast and decisively to restore the company’s lost glory and improve its performance.
Included in the report was the corporate strategy adopted by the company. This is in efforts to restore the entity. The company identified various core areas of operation. The main pillars that were identified included digital imaging, games, and mobile business. These were identified as the key areas in restructuring the electronics business.
The business highlights was another significant area that was addressed by the report. It was noted that consolidated sales were decreasing from one year to the other due to the unfavourable effects of the deteriorating foreign exchange rates.
This is in addition to the shrinking of the markets in developed countries, as well as the Great East Japan Earthquake and the floods in Thailand among other catastrophes (Sony Global 2012). There were also the operation losses incurred during that period. This led to a huge net loss on the part of the Sony Corporation’s stockholders.
As part of the company’s CSR initiatives, the management entered into an agreement with Stefani Joanne Angelina Germanotta, stage name ‘Lady Gaga’, a singer and song writer. It is noted that this artist had performed really well in the past. She received financial assistance from the company. The report also provides the reader with information on the performance of the company’s shares in the market. The figure below is an excerpt from the report:
Figure 1: Sony Global’s Stock Information
Adapted from: Sony Global 2012
An Analysis of the Differences between the Two Reports in Terms of Country and Industry Based Factors
Mitsubishi Report The company mainly focuses on the manufacture and distribution of products that address the social aspects of the community. It aims at providing the most basic needs for individuals in the society. This is to help them survive or make their life better (Mobile Reference 2010). It is for this reason that the company has invested heavily by assisting the victims of the earthquake.
There is also the copper mining business that the company is involved in. The Copper Mountain Mine rejuvenation project was initiated in 2009. However, actual mining has been taking place since 1996. The corporation is aiming at mining as many minerals as possible. It has invested heavily in the sector (Mitsubishi Corporation 2010).
The company has also made initiatives to recycle waste materials and come up with products that are useful to the community (Tsimhoni et al. 2005a). At the company’s Kyushu cement plant, plans are underway to start recycling incinerated ash from the waste generated by the municipal council. The project was supposed to begin on April 2012.
This will solve the environmental crisis that is likely to result from the process of melting ash into slag. The company is also involved in the metal smelting business. It is currently putting in place plans to recycle scrap metal.
The company has also put in place measures to safeguard and protect the environment. It is committed to the creation of a self sustaining community. It is as a result of this that the company initiated the Eco Contest award scheme, which aims at recognising and awarding the most efficient and outstanding ideas and contributions in the development of a low carbon or recycling-oriented society. In the first Eco Contest Award Ceremony held in April 2011, there were a total of ten award categories (Mitsubishi Corporation 2010).
Sony Report The Sony Company is known for its ability to manufacture and distribute high quality products. Moreover, the company is well known for the high quality entertainment services. The company has diversified its operations by coming up with innovative hardware. As a result, the company has a remarkable collection of film, games’ content, and music (Lyons 2006).
The Sony Group has vast interests in the electronics business. However, during the 2011 fiscal year, the business was facing many challenges. As such, the profits declined. This was largely instigated by the deteriorating foreign exchange rates and the competition brought about by product commoditisation. It is for this reason that the group finds it very important to act swiftly and restore the lost glory.
The group is also trying to put in place measures that will revamp the industry. The company has identified several key areas in the electronics business. These are digital imaging, gaming (Andresen 2002), and mobile operations. As a result of this, the company will focus its investments in these areas.
Sony is going a step higher by engaging in activities that are more innovative than those undertaken by the various competitors. The activities are likely to improve the performance of the company. This is through the growth of set apart technology, which is better placed to improve the quality of the products.
One of the company’s major undertakings is in the medical field. Currently, this involves the production and supply of printers, cameras, monitors, and other peripheral products specifically designed for the medical field (Hockerts 2008).
The Sony Group is also engaged in the provision of financial services. This sector is expected to record a positive growth. This is considering the performance of this sector in the recent past. In an effort to uphold high standards of operations and maintain a sound financial standing, the various companies under the group’s umbrella have continued to provide high quality financial products. This is through the adoption of an inventive business model.
The companies include Sony Financial Holdings, Sony Life Insurance Co. (Zhong 2009), Sony Bank Inc., and Sony Assurance (Tsimhoni et al. 2005b). Sony Life, for instance, has maintained its successful operations with a lot of ease. As a result, it has recorded an increase in its ‘policy sum in force’ (Ohga 2008).
The company has attained this through its enhanced interaction with the customers. It is also able to design and sell customised life insurance products that appeal to the clientele. According to Guerrier (1999), Sony Assurance enjoys a broad spectrum of customers as a result of its reasonable premiums. This is in addition to its segmented risk and high quality services that have led to increased market share.
An inclusive report focuses on all aspects of a given agenda. For instance, an inclusive report will take into consideration such factors as services, products, and the environment within which the company is operating. It will also take into consideration both internal and external stakeholders (Mitsubishi Zaidan 2009).
To this end, Mitsubishi has designed its report to create awareness among all stakeholders in an inclusive manner. This is especially so with respect to the CSR initiatives that the company is planning to take (Mitsubishi Corporation 2010).
In the report, the management talks about the employees and their overall approach to CSR. Moreover, the report highlights the framework used by the company to promote CSR and corporate governance.
In addition, the report talks about the company’s medium term management plan, which runs from 2012 to 2014 (Mitsubishi Corporation 2010). This adequately informs all stakeholders on what to expect (Mitsubishi Motors 1985).
The company has highlighted other issues in its report. The report addresses the important role played by the society in providing resources. In addition, the report highlights the importance of the environment. It also mentions the company’s efforts in combating global warming, as well as the company’s promotion of eco- friendly products and technology. At the end of the day, Mitsubishi report can be considered as inclusive, given that it mentions and takes into consideration almost all the aspects of an annual report (Mishima 2009).
However, Sony’s report is more inclusive than that of Mitsubishi. It starts by introducing the company’s envisaged corporate strategy. Though this can be compared to the strategic management plan adopted by Mitsubishi, Sony’s corporate strategy stands out. This is given that it features some of the company’s products. In addition to this, Sony addresses the issue of management and its overall approach to CSR.
This is under the internal stakeholders section. The report also highlights the major areas in the corporate strategy, which will transform the company’s future. Moreover, the report highlights the framework that will be adopted to promote CSR and corporate governance. This adequately informs all stakeholders. It also helps them appreciate the efforts made by the management (Choquette
Non-verbal Communication Theory Essay essay help free
Table of Contents Introduction
The shopping event
Expectancy value model
The theory of planned behaviour
The self-cognitive theory of communication
Introduction Communication is the process of conveying information, which requires the sender of the information, the receiver, and the message to be delivered to the recipient. The process plays an important role in passing of information and interaction between human beings. This can be either verbal or non-verbal and the choice between the two depends on the suitability to the users and the environment.
In nonverbal communication, the use of body language is essential where effectiveness in this type of communication depends on the user’s understanding. This essay analyzes non-verbal communication by looking at the use of body language as well as the actual communication using communication theories basing on observations made.
The shopping event The communication event took place between a friend who was a customer and a shopping mall attendant in a busy downtown shopping mall where both non-verbal and verbal communications were used for effectiveness. To begin with, the customer walked to the counter and begun addressing the mall attendant and after the attention of the attendant, he pointed to the Corner of the store where different types of shoes were displayed.
He again looked at the shoes that he was wearing and continued talking to the attendant who listened attentively. At one point, the attendant nodded his head and raised his right hand towards the corner where shoes were displayed to confirm that the type of shoe that the customer required was available.
The attendant then left the counter and directed the customer to the position where shoes had been displayed as the customer followed him. The customer then selected the type of shoes he required then went to the counter together with the attendant.
A discussion between the two people followed and it seemed as if there was disagreement between them. Later they reached an agreement and the attendant packed the shoes for the customer. At this point, they smiled at each other and finally the attendant waived his hand to the departing customer.
Expectancy value model In any communication, there are expectations from both the sender and the recipient of the message. These expectations determine the behaviour of the two parties and their attitude towards the message. In the observed event, the customer expected the attendant to respond and listen to him carefully while the attendant expected the customer to describe the type, size and the quality of the pair of shoes required.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Expectancy value model therefore apply in the conversation where Palmgreen (1984) states that, “People orient themselves to the world according to their expectations, beliefs and evaluations”. Expectations determine behaviour of a person, which then plays an important role in determining the person’s attitude towards the message or the other person.
The theory of planned behaviour Bandura (1986) stated that, from experiences, people are able to plan, which also applies in communication. Getting the attention of the listener is important to the speaker and at the same time, impressing the listener is of equal importance. The speaker avoids a situation whereby the message he or she passes becomes irrelevant or lacks attention.
The theory of planned behaviour suggests that the intention of a person determines his/her behaviour and attitude determines the intention. In the shopping mall communication event the attendant seemed to have a good experience of what the customers’ needed where the attendant gained this experience from interacting with several customers.
On the other hand, the customer seemed to know that the attendant offer useful guidance in the selection process and from his experience, the customer explained the details of the pair of shoes to the attendant accurately expecting him to listen to the details. Pajares (2002) found that, prediction plays an important role in communication and it is a direct consequence of the theory.
In communication, a person predicts the reaction of the other where these predictions are usually on other person’s response, reaction, and choice of words. In the mall conversation, the customer and the attendant sometimes predicted the next action of the other person. For example, when the attendant walked back to the counter, he expected the customer to follow him.
The self-cognitive theory of communication According to Parraga (1990), the environment plays an important role in determining a person’s behaviour and therefore affects communication. Environment determines people’s behaviour, which in turn determines their attitude. Human beings on the other hand have the ability to counter the effects of the environment through self-organization.
Contemporary issues in Multimedia and IT Essay scholarship essay help: scholarship essay help
Ethics are the principles that dictate right and wrong, and act as agents of decision making guidelines of behavior. On the other hand, laws are rules developed by an administrative system to combat crime. Most ethical issues are consequences of individuals trying to make decisions within or without the law that govern a system.
When computers were first invented , scientists said that the whole of America would only need six computers for its operations. A couple of decades later, information highway has grown so fast that every household at least owns a computer. Computers have evolved from the bulky gadgets they used to be, to pocket size gadgets, making it easier for individuals to own.
Businesses are run easily through computers, for instance shopping malls and food joints have created sites through which people can select items and have them delivered to them. Marketing has been made easier as consultants don’t have to meet with their clients face to face.
Introduction of e-learning in most academic institutions has helped create more learning opportunities while saving time and space. Academic research by students has been simplified because they no longer need to carry bulky books. Besides, many job opportunities have been created for information technology specialists. Just like any inventions, Information technology has its merits and demerits.
Therefore, it is in order for governments to come up with strategies to regulate the use of information technology gadgets as a precautionary measure against information technology stress caused by security breach in the private or public network systems. Though the invention of internet networking has facilitated the transformation of the world into a global village, eminent threats on security of information systems is real. Thus, this reflective treatise analyses contemporary issues in information technology and multimedia.
A big wave of positive change was seen in various fields such as education, business, and politics among others. Unfortunately, Criminals saw this as an opportunity for fraudulent deals. For instance, hackers, crackers and stalkers took advantage of this wave of change to unlawfully access private information that could harm companies (Moore, 2006, pp.101-105). In response, the government introduced the Computer Fraud and Abuse Act.
As stipulated by this law, trespassers of protected computers were to be prosecuted. The CFAA merged with the National Information Infrastructure Act to create a compact regulatory law on information technology. Given that dependence levels on technology have increased, the advances in data storage have made the process cheaper, hence are used by local retail firms to identify customers.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More For instance, the, major search firms such as Google, yahoo, and messenger generates more than 200million searches per year. Therefore, a lot of information can be found about an individual through their profiles and blogs. Information perceived as private can viewed in public social sites. This heightens ethical concerns because a lot of information is out and can be misused.
These laws made it illegal for any unauthorized person to access private computer network for financial gains. CFAA in its current jurisdiction protects users and operators against computer related crimes such as obtaining national security information through illegal entry into Federal computers with the aim of harming the state, and for the benefit of another state. This law is punishable whether information was acquired or not.
Besides, the law is clear on the illegal entry of a protected computer to access financial or credit information, including credit card fraud (Solove and Schwartz, 2009, p. 43). Moreover, unauthorized access of any protected computer used by the Federal government or the government computer agencies is also included. It can be considered as treason if one is found hacking into the state’s security systems.
Since data has become easily accessible, government security agencies have come up with detailed and advanced security systems. They can obtain information on suspects of terrorism and security threat. In the automated scan systems, possession of illegal weapon, drugs, and other material perceive harmful to the public can be detected.
At global level, intentionally damaging, either through corrupting by viruses or physical destruction of a protected computer and worms program that can make information disappear or even disable a system intentionally is punishable in the International Law Court. Physical destruction includes trashing or removing some parts of the machine to put a halt to normal functioning ability (Solove and Schwartz, 2009, p. 50).
Illegal trafficking of passwords or any other information which can be used to gain access to a protected computer for whatsoever purpose is illegal. This law was mainly put to stop the hackers from cracking passwords and accessing information systems for information, and using them to corrupt the information systems.
The above laws makes it illegal for one to access information without permission from the owner, the operator or the management information system, especially information on business operations or national defense. This covered all the data on atomic weapons manufacture and storage in the United States (Solove and Schwartz, 2009, p. 55).
We will write a custom Essay on Contemporary issues in Multimedia and IT specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The electronic communications privacy act is a law which was passed to regulate efficiency of Information technology. This law makes it illegal to tap information without authorization. Besides, it protects information transmitted through wire, radio, electromagnetic waves, and optical wave tracks that affect business transactions of the state. Cyber Security Enhancement Act was passed together with the Homeland Security Act to increase penalties set in the Computer Fraud and Abuse Act.
CSEA reduced the thoroughness of privacy and made it easier for the ISP to hand over information to the government whenever the relevant authority suspects unlawful dealing in the local networks.
This law passed harsh punishment on persons who knowingly committed computer crimes that resulted in physical injury or even death (Solove and Schwartz, 2009, p. 53).Those who have established their careers in business, should sensitize their employees ICT departments to safeguard the quality of the systems and hence protecting privacy of society.
The digital millennium copyright act mainly protects programs and soft wares against piracy. This law was put in place to help people who operated their businesses online from having their products duplicated. This law promotes the sale of soft wares and programs that help parents control what their children view in the interne (Tim and Paul, 2004, p.46).
Traditional laws can also be used to prosecute crimes committed on computers. For instance, Economic Espionage Act makes it illegal for one to steal information or ideas from another business through copyright or duplication for any reasons whatsoever. This law also spells out the boundaries of benefitting from other information systems in place by either competitors or perceived rival.
The Virginia internet policy act advocates for freedom of information, penalties on persons who commit computer crimes, and protection of children from explicit pornographic materials and indecent images on the internet. Before, children were used by perverts to boost business and the websites at the expense of their rights.
Another law is the software privacy and control act. This act deals with the criminals who register online under false identity, and commit online fraudulent crimes on the domain receptor. However, providing false information without getting involved in criminal activities is excused (Tim and Paul, 2004, p.46).
Despite the numerous efforts by the government, internet criminals somehow find a new route in committing cyber crimes frequently. Factually, it is not very easy to detect a cyber crime until its consequences surface. Smarter hacking minds have developed complex ideas of invading the snares and traps constantly revised by the government information technology experts (Warren and Louis, 1989, pp.89-97).
Not sure if you can write a paper on Contemporary issues in Multimedia and IT by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Even the most secured sites such as that of the homeland security and Microsoft report numerous attempts of hacking on their websites. Funnily, some of these crimes are only meant o draw attention and disapprove the security system of the targeted sites.
In the recent part, a group in America threatened to close down face book site for what they called breach of personal privacy and stalking by the government. Hackers have decided to corrupt the system with graphic images, just for satisfaction of having control over this global site (Trout, 2007, p.43).
This however does not mean that we are completely hopeless against finding solutions to deal with these intelligent minds who find pleasure in putting a halt to global growth and development on the facets of information exchange.
The existing laws may not be perfect, by some how are effective in minimizing the intensity of information system abuse. In the recent past, many successful abuse cases have passed through the court system on sms or email abuse. Governments still deal with threats to life and properties sent via email, as punishable under traditional laws.
Governments also need to introduce e-governance, like in Bangladesh, which make control and review of laws of the internet much easier to implement. Through this, governments will easily deal with the increasing innovative techniques of web piracy hacking and cracking (Tim and Paul, 2004, p.49).
The implementation of these laws may be hindered by administrative obstacles. For instance, lack of trust and faith on a government by its citizens may make fighting cyber crime a hectic procedure. Due to this, citizens may shy away from reporting instances of cyber crimes committed or fail to cooperate with the authority in investigations.
However, the overhead cost of adopting e-governance is very heavy on most governments. With the current unfavorable economic climate, the priorities of most governments are to ensure costs of any project are within manageable limits. Besides, there is an inadequate specialized skill in information technology across the globe to monitor and constantly track the ever complex crimes undergoing metamorphosis.
Reference List Moore, R. (2006) Cybercrime: Investigating High-Technology Computer Crime, 1st ed., Cincinnati, Ohio: Anderson Publishing
Solove, D. and Schwartz, P. (2009) Privacy, Information, and Technology, 2nd Ed., New York, NY: Aspen Publishers
Tim, J, and Paul, T. (2004) Hacktivism and Cyberwars, Alabama: Routledge
Trout, B. (2007) Cyber Law: A Legal Arsenal for Online Business, New York: World Audience, Inc.
Warren, R. and Louis, B. (1989) The Right to Privacy, 4 Harv. L. Rev. 193., Massachusetts: Harvard University Publications
Contemporary Issues in Multimedia and Information Technology Essay a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help
The ability to create, modify, store, send, and link digitalized information is the most notable invention of the twentieth century. This phenomenon is widespread in all spheres of life around the globe. The continuing proliferation of information technologies and services has presented many legal, social, and ethical issues. These issues are the subject of discussion among government officials, academics, and others. This essay examines the contemporary issues that are facing multimedia and information technology in the modern world.
Since the early 1960’s, Information Revolution has been the buzz word. The world has been experiencing, at an accelerating pace, an unprecedented Third Wave-fast forward movement. The Information Revolution is characterized by information becoming the central and most significant commodity.
An interesting offshoot of the Information Revolution is Information of Society, on the one hand, and the commoditization of information on the other. The significance of dawn of Information Revolution is underlined by the number of information-related terms it has risen. These include, but not limited to, ‘Information Society’, ‘Information Technology’, ‘Informatics’, and ‘Informatization’. Information has become a catalyst for economic development, and a key resource for literacy, education, and social development.
An Information Society is a society characterized by abundant information in terms of both stock and flow, quick and efficient distribution and transformation of information, and easy and inexpensive access to information for all members of society. The primary role of the workforce in Information Society is in the areas of information production, processing and distribution .
The Information Age has brought with it a myriad of issues proportionate to the number of contributions it has made to society. As such, discussing all the contemporary issues brought by multimedia and Information may take more than the limitation of this paper. Consequently, the scope of this paper will be limited to an overview of a number of legal, social, and ethical issues in the Information Age. These include privacy, intellectual property, and computer crime.
With the vast amounts of data and software available in the modern world of technology, individuals or companies are prone to theft of intellectual property. This crime consists of violation of copyrights, patents, trade secrets, or the terms of license agreements. It also entails unauthorized duplication of materials. This latter phenomenon is common in academics, whereby people might be tempted to reproduce other people’s works, views or invention as their own working for commercial or scholarly purposes.
Companies or individuals, therefore, should strive to obtain software, or information legitimately instead of coping it. There are several benefits associated with legal acquisition of software or information. Legal acquisition of software or information ensures that the company is kept abreast with the bounds of the law in their business practices and day-to-day operations.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This ensures that the company’s professionalism and reputation are maintained. Another fundamental reason why companies should go for legal software is because the legitimately purchased software comes with crucial benefits such as technical support, patches, upgrades and documentation. These properties cannot be found in pirated software. Companies or individuals who engage in illegal acquisition of intellectual risk fines, expensive settlements or serious legal action.
Intellectual property just like any other controversial contemporary issue in multimedia and information technology has its proponents and opponents. Those who argue for the private ownership of intellectual property base their arguments on well-known scholars such as John Locke (1632-1704). Locke held that one has a natural right to the things they have removed through their labor.
Another philosopher, Hegel (1770-1831), argues that property enables an individual to put his or her will into something . As such, property is an expression of an individual’s personality in the world. Another argument to support the private ownership of intellectual property is that it is a necessary incentive to create and to work. This idea is dated back to David Hume (1711-1786). Hume argued that people should own their creations in order to encourage useful habits and accomplishments.
The opponents of private ownership of intellectual property question the validity of the assumption that an idea can be owned solely by one individual. They hold that probably any idea that people have are not their own. Most of the ideas that people have come form other people, or place.
As such, originality can be viewed as the combination of existing ideas in new ways. Basically, when someone is original, they are expressing an idea in a new way, may be seeing new associations between ideas that were not noticed before. Anything creative that is achieved is the adding of something to pre-existing ideas, which have been obtained from others .
Like physical property, intellectual property implies that someone can access certain ideas, or information. However, the notion of private ownership of an idea or concept is highly controversial. This is because it implies that others are excluded from the use or development of those ideas.
Ownership of ideas in the modern Information Age will remain a mammoth challenge to the free society, not unless there is a balance between rewarding innovators for their creative ideas, while still allowing those ideas to be shared for the benefit of the community and for human progress .
We will write a custom Essay on Contemporary Issues in Multimedia and Information Technology specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More When thinking about the contemporary issues that are facing multimedia and information technology, privacy is, perhaps, the single issue that concerns people the most. Personal information is gathered in various ways such as profiles left to credit-checking companies, and supermarkets. The kinds of information held by credit-checking companies include names and addresses, former addresses, and current credit ratings.
The information in these databases has invariably being collected through a wide range of sources and organized so that it constitutes a history and assessment, of one’s trustworthiness as a debtor. Supermarkets are now compiling vast databases of information about their customers. This is done through their loyalty cards, in conjunction with records of credit card transactions at their stores .
Information in such databases is used to analyze the shopping patterns of customers and to target them with precise advertising based on their demographic profile and spending patterns. Still on privacy issues, another trend in the use of personal information is data matching.
This is the combination and comparison of information from different databases Personal information that is supplied, or collected for one purpose and stored in a particular database is cross-referenced to information in other databases, where data may have been gathered for an entirely different purpose.
This trend has been of significant concern to privacy advocates and civil liberties, who view it as prone to misuse. There is an unlimited number of misuses of information that is obtained form the databases. It could lead to vetting for jobs, denying someone a bank loan, based on their current health, their propensity to certain conditions, or their family medical history.
New technologies, including computers, offer new opportunities for committing a crime through the development of more expensive commodities for theft, devising novel ideas of stealing them, or harming others. This phenomenon is referred to as computer crime. It is a contemporary issue in the Information Age that has left many puzzles than the invention of computers have solved. Criminals can access a company’s financial records and wire unfathomable amounts of money in their bank accounts .
In addition, computer abuse involving spamming is proving a very expensive affair. This is in terms of resources and time dedicated to dealing with such unwanted and irrelevant e-mail messages. Although spam filters may be used to block unwanted messages, the strategy is not foolproof as it may end up blocking legitimate messages .
In conclusion, information technology has given rise to many unexacting possibilities which the existing law has not yet found solutions. The Information Age is coming up with changes that call for new ethical, legal, and social debates in societies in order for solutions to be found.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Contemporary Issues in Multimedia and Information Technology by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More These issues revolve around ethical, social, professional, and political principles. In terms of privacy, it is clear that contemporary information systems technology is posing a tremendous challenge to the traditional paradigms of safeguarding individual privacy, as well as intellectual property .
Technologies used in storing and analyzing data are easing the ways firms are collecting data on individuals from various sources and analyzing them in order to come up with an in-depth electronic profile about an individual and his or her conduct. The widespread use of computers also increases opportunities for computer crime and abuse . Given these myriad of issues, there is a need to approach Information Technology with a degree of professionalism and try, where possible, to act in the most ethical way possible.
References Bynum, T. ,W.,
Ethics in IT Essay essay help site:edu
Table of Contents Ethical dilemma
Regulations of IT
Regulations and business
Value of IT
For several years, most debates about ethics and information technology (IT) have focused on issues of professional ethics and issues of privacy and security. The professional aspects of ethics in IT concern preserving and developing a successful reputation through tasks completions. In this context, the worker is constantly behaving well i.e. a case of character and action. Ethics now seems to be an inclusive term covering morality, value and justice, in addition to character and action.
However, the recent developments in IT and business have created cases of new concerns in ethics. Critics now wonder whether removing a job from one country to another in order to exploit lower paid workers and probably avoid heavy tax are ethical, business or economic issues (Schultz, 2006).
Offshoring and outsourcing of jobs creates the advantage of a social context by providing lower wages. These have become new ethical problems created by flexibility of the IT concept of “availability at any location”.
These new developments have made IT rise beyond organizational borders in covering end users, supply chains, partners, countries, and continents in the broad picture. These are among the issues which have necessitated the governments across the globe to collaborate and develop comprehensive and detailed laws regarding the use of information technology.
Ethical dilemma As new and unpredictable uses of information technology arise with the regulations, so do new and unpredictable ethical problems. IT is a part of the human world of relations, actions and institutions. Therefore, we expect interactions with the world of IT neither to bring predictable ethical problems nor predictable solutions.
For instance, the creations of online downloading sites of copyrighted materials to promote sales, or as a form of charity, or to promote mediocre contents demonstrate how users can manipulate IT systems where ethical principles are not clear. People can make digital copies at will, and these copies are available to anyone on the network.
The issue is whether it is a mere act of a friendship sharing information, which is ethical, or whether it is an illegal act, which is an unethical practice violating copyright laws. These instances are likely to create ethical dilemma to the comprehensive laws regulating IT industry.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Conversely, if the comprehensive laws cover such unpredictable uses and results of IT industry, then the users are acting ethically and legally. Some problems of ethics associated with the development of social media, such as dating and readily available sex partners and spamming raise serious issues of ethics and the role of IT in perpetuating them (Robert, 1995).
Regulations of IT There are diverse cultural and ethical perspectives created by information technology and communication around the global and their possible resolutions. These are genuine global information ethics, which need to be regulated as the industry continues to experience exponential growths.
Therefore, the governments of the world in coming up with comprehensive laws to regulate the global IT industry is on the right step in protecting individuals, organizations, partners, territories and nations. This led to the development of a framework for global ethics provided in the form of the Earth Charter so as to realize a shared vision of a sustainable global society.
Information technology ethics use this framework to determine how information and technology can be used responsibly to develop a future that is economically and ecologically sustainable, and culturally and socially just (Hongladarom and Ess, 2007).
The regulation formalizes expression of values and embodies cultural norms, which sometimes may clash with the values in information technology. The IT and regulations are contiguous with the normative ethics of the originating culture. Therefore, both the law and technology can constrain behaviour according to the value system that they express. These are significant implications of the spread and adoption of the IT around the globe.
Technological developments presuppose the availability of informational content to be stored, communicated and processed. Adopting and using such technology is, therefore, essentially dependent upon the legal and normative rules that determine the accessibility and regulation of information to be stored, manipulated and disseminated through technology.
Regulations that specify the legal and technical factors for use of information are necessary so as to control the adoption and usage IT systems that process such information. As the IT information availability increases, the provision of informational content has equally become a matter of interest to both the nations that generate information and those that are net information consumers for different reasons, of course.
We will write a custom Essay on Ethics in IT specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The nations that develop and export information technologies enforce their particular ethical and legal standards for regulations of end users. Thus, they effectively spread their value systems and regulations requirements alongside their technologies to other nations. Issues of ethical and control of information tend to rotate around the development of contents and gathering of personal information.
Regulating controls label the requirements, and in some instances, the authors of informational contents protect them under intellectual property or data privacy. However, the US and the European Union economic and political dominance tend to influence regulations of information technology.
Each of these powers has aggressively tended to promote their own approaches to information technology control. This way, they have displaced and overwhelmed the development of other countries from developing their informational control systems.
Regulations and business Government regulations can be useful or harmful to businesses. The nature and degree of the comprehensive laws developed by governments in regulating the IT sector can have both positive and negative effects across the globe. Nations which have enormous controls, and influences on the regulations will tremendously benefit. At the same time, some degree of the regulations may results in developing of moral, social and just society.
In order for IT to grow globally, the comprehensive laws developed should be essential regarding intellectual property, sensible approaches to contract laws, willingness to enforce the contracts, and efficient systems of handling bankruptcy in case of rapidly changing technology overtakes a business. At the same, the law should provide strong protections for freedoms of persons and expressions (Gentzoglanis and Henten, 2010).
IT business represents unpredictable changes and developments. The structure of the laws should accommodate the future course of the information revolution in different nations. For instance, the law should ensure availability of funding for new IT ventures and linear concepts in the manner of funding processes. This is because such instances affect the growth and development of new IT ventures in all nations. Therefore, it is an issue global concern.
This is a critical concept of new developments in IT and businesses, which usually upsets and challenges the old models of businesses, monopolies, and introduces new ways of tasks performances. The idea is that players in the IT sector should also operate within the laws when raising capital for their new ventures. The concept of law to ensure funding is an enabling factor for the growth, adoption and proliferation IT.
Value of IT In developing regulations and ethical use of IT systems, we should always have in mind the positive feature of information technology as its potential to contribute to the increase in human consciousness by making more knowledge available in wide setup. Conversely, we must also beware of its questionable applications that can propel destructions of human or the environment.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Ethics in IT by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Regulators must realize that the functional characteristics that make IT so valuable do not operate in a restricted or highly regulated environment.
Valuable applications such as speed of information processing, information storage capacity, availability of information at any location, and straightforward reproduction of information, can work well provided the users operate within the global laws. Such applications work better with a scope of the organizations as a whole, and potentially well with global scope where information sharing is part of the business.
In realizing the value of IT to human and environment, governments should focus on the prevention of harmful practices in serving needs of human and environment. Therefore, preventing harm in information technology use becomes an essential element of fixing serious problem that causes the greatest harm to human and environment. Therefore, ethical use and regulation should also focus on protecting vulnerable groups within a society to prevent IT harm from coming to end users (Richard, Robert, Tora and Neu, 2003).
Users and regulator must take into account that IT is not neutral. Its use provokes various changes that can result into consequences beyond human comprehension. Technological innovations often strive to build a new and incompatible order on top of what exists. We should use it as a means and enabler for other ends.
Bibliography Gentzoglanis, A. and Henten, A., 2010. Regulation and the Evolution of the Global Telecommunications Industry. Massachusetts: Edward Elgar Publishing Limited.
Hongladarom, S. and Ess, C., 2007. Information Technology Ethics: Cultural Perspectives. London: Idea Group.
Richard, O., Robert, H., Tora, K. and Neu, R., 2003. The Global Course of the Information Revolution: Recurring Themes and Regional Variations. Santa Monica, CA: RAND.
Robert, A., 1995. Universal Access to E-Mail: Feasibility and Societal Implications. California: RAND.
Schultz, R. A., 2006. Contemporary issues in ethics and information technology. London: Idea Group.
Pepsi Cola International Report (Assessment) college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help
Executive summary The assessment analyses challenges experienced by Pepsi Cola International in Ukraine. Distribution channels and logistics challenges have affected the business, which is the reason this assessment identifies four challenges and gives possible solutions. While using the available literature, challenges include poor transport and infrastructure.
The ports are congested and delays are common. Burglary is a challenge for transporters. The distribution channels are not effective in distributing the product to all parts of the region it is required to. There is because of competition from other brands. Long distribution channels and economic slowdown make the prices increase.
Warehouses are scarce as well as forklifts. The management can reduce the challenges by engaging in research and use recommendation to make changes that correspond to the environment and developments. Investment and long-term decision can be encouraged.
Introduction Pepsi Cola International in Ukraine has been operating for over twenty years. The distribution of the soft drink determines the sales and the business development. Unlike other European states, Ukraine is lagging behind in development and this has affected the business. Moreover, Ukraine is a potential target for the company and the senior management of Pepsi Cola International in Ukraine should investigate and make changes that encourage business growth.
This paper will identify four challenges the senior management of Pepsi Cola are facing in relation to distribution Channels and logistics. The paper will also recommend solutions for the four problems.
Key challenges that Pepsi cola senior management is facing Menachof (2001, p. 2) reveals that distribution of Pepsi is done via arrangement with different franchise and other arrangements. The methods of distribution may require changes that correspond to the transforming economy. The company has conducted business in the Soviet Union for a period that exceeds twenty years.
Pepsi Cola international senior management in Ukraine has exerted efforts to investigate the distribution as well as pricing policies in Ukraine. Ukraine office in Vienna bottles and distributes in Eastern and Central Europe.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Transportation and infrastructure
One of the challenges for Pepsi Cola international is gaining access to the huge markets. The number of users of their soft drinks remains relatively small, when compared to the consumption rates of the large markets.
In 1994, Soviet law made trade arrangements that prohibited Pepsi Cola International from banishing income to United States. Ukraine partnered with shipyard. Consequently, Pepsi became the dominant soft drink. International Directory of Company Histories (2001, p. 1) notes that Ukraine sees Pepsi Cola as their choice. However, Coca cola has opened a bottling plant in Ukraine that has been operational since 1995.
The economic development of Ukraine has been slower than in other parts of Europe. Transportation of goods is slow owing to the slow railway services. There are numerous cases of delay. There is state transport composed of large companies that offer transportation.
Private companies which are small have transportation trucks. Other business men use own vehicles that are not trucks to transport. Any truck can be used for transportation and earn an income for the owner. At the port of Ukraine, imported goods take long owing to payment complications.
Importers have been affected by inflation and have lost purchasing power; hence the price is very high. Accumulation of goods at the port is common and obstructs operations. Space at the port is rare. Banditry and theft are on the rise as some of trucks are forced to offload their goods. Cargo insurance companies have failed to cooperate by withdrawing from insuring cargo for inland beyond the entry of the port.
Private property laws are not fully developed and affects how landlords relate with tenants. Warehouse space is limited. Shipping containers, basements and any available space in the buildings are considered as warehouses. Landlords may breach the contract and the property owner may not be fully protected by the law.
The distribution equipment has been used for more than twenty years. Although the port is being upgraded, the facilities do not match those in the developed part of Europe. While lagging behind at the port, the case is the same for inland facilities. Forklifts are not available and people lift the load by use of hand.
We will write a custom Assessment on Pepsi Cola International specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Channels of Distribution
The distribution channels in Ukraine perform poorly compared to other countries. In other countries, there are Pepsi trucks. The drivers of the trucks ensure that they have enough supplies for specific areas. There are also Pepsi machines that provide drinks. The trucks, drivers and machines are absent in Ukraine.
Pepsi Cola international receives concentrate which is sold and delivered to the twelve authorized bottlers. Pepsi cola international use rail or tracks to deliver to the bottlers. During winter, Pepsi cola has to make arrangements with the rail to ensure that it delivers the concentrate. Since roads are impassable, rail is the only means of transport.
Another challenge is preventing the product from freezing by ensuring that the cars are heated. When the concentrate becomes frozen, it cannot be useful anymore. Different distributers obtain Pepsi Cola from the bottlers. The distribution of Pepsi in major towns and city is regular. In small towns, shortages are common. Retailers then sell the product to consumers. Some retailers, like kiosks, do not have the product until they make trips to the city or major towns.
Finances and politics have an impact on Ukraine. Investors invest limited capital in their businesses and their plans are often shorter and middle term plans. There is fear and uncertainty about the future. The justification is that unrest may rise up again. Western investors in the Soviet Union have hardships with the law.
They are not protected by the law. Moreover, decision making in business takes a long time and favors shorter plans. Decisions in business last around three months and change of mind can occur at any time before the time is over. Three months is a short time for one to realize quick money as they often wish for.
Business practices are secretive. Business men keep two records for official use and actual transaction. New investors venturing into partnership experience frustration. They have difficulties trusting foreign investors. The locals have been frustrated before and cooperating may take a long time.
Aldin and Stahre (2003, p. 272) mention that the use of distributers eradicates the inconsistencies in the schedules for manufacturers and the pattern of consumption for consumers. Consumers tend to use certain products during a certain season and when the season is ended, the consumption is reduced.
Manufacturers may be required to use wholesalers or retailers to acquire finances. Selling directly to the customers may take a longer period of time to sell. Retailers and whole sales will pay before obtaining the product. The retailers and wholesalers may be in a better position to perform specialization functions than the manufacturer.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Pepsi Cola International by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Perner (2008, p. 1) adds that the manufacturers are specialists in manufacturing, while the retailers specialize in distributing. Efficiency is obtained if the manufacturers effectively distribute to a wide range of retailers. In turn, the retailers will distribute to the customers.
According to Coughlin et al (2001), for the distribution of same product, a parallel distribution structure may be adopted. The product can be obtained by using a different channel other than the traditional distribution channel. Consumers may prefer to buy from the manufacturer to save on cost and sell for a less costly price. Those using the traditional channel will see this as unfair competition.
The prices of Pepsi Cola increase as people move far away from authorized bottlers. The distribution channel is long. From Pepsi cola international, the product is bought by the bottler, then by the distributer, then the local retailer and finally the consumer. The long chain makes the price of Pepsi Cola products costly.
The prices of the drink are also interfered with by the economic slowdown. The cost of fuel has increased and transporting the product has become more costly. The glass bottles are delicate and cumbersome to transport and are expensive, as Ramez (1990, p. 1) mentions.
Larson and Halldorsson (2002, p. 37) state that selling directly to the consumers enables the consumer save. However there may be challenges and inefficiency when it comes to direct distribution from the manufacturer to the consumer. Retailers and the wholesalers make distribution efficient. The customers can get the products at a convenient location.
Carter and Narasimhan (1996, p. 13) indicate that the consumers can buy small quantities of the product as opposed to buying in bulk. Customers can obtain a variety of products from a retailer as opposed to getting a specific product from one store, then move to the other store for another product.
The stores with variety are also located close to the consumer. On the other hand, the customer buying directly from the manufacturer travels a long distance to obtain one product. Intermediaries such as wholesalers make deliveries to retailers with products from different companies. They save on the cost that would have been used in the delivery of individual goods.
Before a product is known by the consumers, the distribution is likely to be slow. Later on as the product is known, the distribution is expected to grow steadily. When the distribution of a particular good is diverted, the market is affected.
Possible solutions for Pepsi Cola International For economic development to occur, the senior management should consider engaging in research to view possible ways of dealing with the challenges. The senior management policies should be in line with the changes in society as Bruce (1995, p. 230) suggests.
According to Fugate et al (2008, p. 2), understanding the market trends and environment enables the top management to make plans that will enhance distribution of a product. With the understanding of the market trends, it is possible to make strategic plans and implement them.
Transportation and infrastructure
Increasing efficiency while saving on cost is an effective way of solving transport challenges. The company can use own trucks and employ drivers, who would manage the distribution. The drivers will keep record and make necessary arrangements to reach the remote parts and deliver Pepsi products. The driver, as part of the human resource management, can get training on customer relations and increase knowledge. During winter, the concentrate can be kept at the right temperature to prevent cases of freezing.
If the government improves infrastructure, the road network will be efficient and products can be delivered. Development can be encouraged to improve infrastructure in warehouses and storage. The channel can be integrated to reduce the long distribution channels and enhance distribution of the product. The Company can purchase forklifts to assist in loading trucks (Srivastava et al 1999, p. 168).
Rutner and Fawcett (2005, p. 56) argue that distribution of a product is one of the most important processes in a business. Distribution of a product consists of moving a product from the manufacturing company to the ultimate consumer. Consumers determine what retailers will stock. The retailers stock what the consumers ask for.
The retailers give a large shelf space to products that are known to consumers. The retailers fail to stock new or less prominent products to avoid a situation where customers do not buy the product. Retailers have confidence in products that have sold before. Marketing and advertising can be done to encourage more buyers, so that retailers stock Pepsi products.
Channels of distribution
When distributing, the business can adopt a multichannel distribution that will allow for planning using data. The use of catalogues, field sales, trade counters, pricing offers, call centers, mailing lists, websites and trade shows is significant. While distributing, the distributers can use one system to control different channels.
This will reduce the challenges posed by different catalogues for different clients. Creating own ware house will increase efficiency, reduce costs and enable distribution. Customer’s service is important and retailers, as well as distributors, should consider fulfilling the needs of the customer.
Stern (1997, p. 14) notes that the manufacturer has the challenge of ensuring that the product is available all the time. Customers move to another brand when their prefer brand is not available. A number of customers will not move to the next retail shop to obtain their preferred brand and would rather settle for a different. Some manufacturers may be selective and choose their distributer if the product is designed for a classy store.
Market research is an important practice that Pepsi Cola International can adopt. The management is involved in conducting research and making changes where necessary. Research will enable the senior management make informed decisions (Mentzer 2001, p. 19).
Gundlach et al (2006, p. 430) suggests that the product should be availed all the time close to the consumer to ensure that the customer gets the product they desire. The competitors pose a threat if their products are available, since consumers go for another product if their preferred product is not available.
Business operators can be encouraged to take risks and invest for long periods. They can also be encouraged to follow standards business protocols. They can make appropriate decision on the new location to venture in and ensure that select the best distributers. Coming up with a strategy on marketing will assist them stay ahead of their competitor. Flexibility in the business plan will enable the business make changes when necessary and avoid delayed decision making.
The channels and structures in distribution are largely dependent on the type of product, demand, location of customers and environmental factors. Manufacturers require the product to be in as many retail shops as possible. They also need the retailer to have the specific products that customers need. In Pepsi Cola, they would require the retailer to have different flavors of the soft drinks so that the customers choose their favorite flavor.
Lambert et al (2005, p. 49) adds that pricing of a product positions a product in the market, is a competitive tool and brings revenue to the company. Changes in price may bring resistance and affects sales and thus, companies need to make appropriate decisions.
The prices should remain at reasonable rates. This can be achieved by creating efficiency in the distribution of product. The reduction of the number intermediaries can be reduced so that the prices do not remain high (Perner 2011).
McNamara (2011, p. 1) says that the manufacturing companies can implement price control by recommending the retail price. The prices should be low and should not be below the cost of production. Large discounts should be given to bottling companies, only if the bulk buying enables the manufacturing company to save on cost.
The behavior of customers towards pricing is important to understand consumer behavior on price. Some customers compare prices and when prices change, they buy products at close rate as before. Where there is little difference between competitive products, the consumer has a perception that the product is better and therefore the prices can be increased (Ballo, 2011).
The distribution trends have changed recently. The prices of commodities have increased and sometimes decreased with different pricing as the quality diversifies. The global slowdown has also affected the sales of products. Changes to accommodate change should be adopted as Gerth (2004, p. 1) notes.
Conclusion Pepsi cola international has operated in Ukraine for two centuries. The challenges are transportation and infrastructure. The port is congested and needs expansion to accommodate cargo. Accumulation of cargo leads to consumption of time before the cargo is released. Concentrate is transported on poor roads and railway.
There is increased burglary on the roads. The cost of fuel is also high. Warehouse and stores are not readily available. There is need for additional forklifts. Distribution of Pepsi products is another challenge. Distribution is done via roads and trains, which are unreliable. Truck drivers are not employed by the Pepsi cola company hence; coordination of demand and supply becomes a challenge.
The channels are long since the manufacturer sells to the bottler, then the wholesaler, then retailers and then the customer. The business environment is challenging. Coca Cola Company has established itself since 1995 and poses competition. There is uncertainty in political and financial processes. Business men keep two records of accounts. Pricing is challenging since there is a long chain in the distribution.
The economic slowdown has also affected businesses. To overcome the challenges, policies that enhance economic development can be adopted. The senior management should also engage in research to discover the market trends and developments, which can be adopted to enhance operation and increase efficiency.
Owning trucks and training staff can increase the sales and distribute to the city and remote areas. Ware houses can be built to increase safe storage. The product should be available all the time. Investment can be encouraged. The price should be able to give revenues and be affordable to the consumer.
Reference List Aldin, N.,
Bostic, B., (2014). Does social media perpetuate youth violence? [web log post]. Ann Arbor, MI: Michigan Youth Violence Prevention Center. Retrieved from http://yvpc.sph.umich.edu/social-media-perpetu custom essay help
, (2014). Does social media perpetuate youth violence? [web log post]. Ann Arbor, MI: Michigan Youth Violence Prevention Center. Retrieved from http://yvpc.sph.umich.edu/social-media-perpetuate-youth-violence/ (Links to an external site.).
Read the above article, in 1-2 pages, answer the following: Does the media perpetuate youth violence? If so, how? How has it changed over time?
Human Resource: performance evaluation systems in organization Case Study best essay help
The performance evaluation system of Maple leaf shoes is so ineffective hence affecting the overall performance of the company. Performance evaluation system must be one which creates motivational opportunities to employees. What happens in Maple leaf shoes is discouraging to workers.
More than 75% of company’s employee had negative feelings about the system. This means that many workers are not satisfied with the manner in which they get assessed. Supervisors fail to meet their obligations by not conducting the assessment process as expected. It is said that some supervisors fill in appraisal forms in three minutes. In fact, there is no way an employee can be assessed in three minutes. This shows negligence among supervisors in doing their work.
The company’s management also has played a role in poor assessment. This is because actions are not taken to reflect employees’ performance. Since no promotions are effected based on the assessment reports, supervisors consider the assessment as a useless exercise. As a result, they fill in the assessment forms just to amuse their bosses but not for the best of the company.
I would recommend that supervisors receive thorough training in order to understand the essence of carrying out employee assessment. Then management should take actions depending on the reports drafted from the appraisal forms. For example, performers should be rewarded by either promotion or monetary gifts.
Those not performing well should also be involved in discussing their performance, and this can help identify their areas of weakness. Once the weak points are identified management can provide possible solutions hence increasing employees’ performance. The system of assessing employee performance should be restructured to ensure that employees accept the outcomes. When these changes are implemented, employees can enjoy healthy working relationships hence giving their best to the company.
For the case of Canadian Pacific and International Bank, a 360 degrees performance evaluation system has been faced with opposition from some section of managers. If I were in Mary Keddy’s position, I would work with the managers supporting the system to pull the rest into supporting it.
The first step is to engage middle managers in a discussion regarding the new performance system. Make them understand the benefits of successful 360 degrees performance evaluation systems. The managers should be allowed to air their fears about the new system and then all issues discussed. She should make sure that all fears raised are satisfactorily addresses and then together with the managers they should lay down strategies for implementation.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The next step should be training employees on how to evaluate their seniors and their fellow colleagues in the right direction. This ensures that backstabbing is not given a chance in the process of evaluation hence concentrating on areas suited for the best of the company. Since this system involves everybody in the company evaluating their colleagues, managers and their juniors, the evaluation forms should be guided by the human resource representatives.
For example, questionnaires meant for evaluating managers should contain areas which concerns performance. This helps control circumstances where workers may be bitter with their supervisors and would like to express all their feelings on the evaluation form. After everyone is convinced about the introduction of the new evaluation plan, Mary can proceed and introduce the evaluation system in the company. She should give details of when assessment will be done and make sure everybody takes part in the process.
Effects of Music in Advertising Essay scholarship essay help: scholarship essay help
Table of Contents Literature review
Music has been recognized as a powerful stimulus affecting people’s mood and even health since times immemorial. Realizing the potential of using the music elements in advertizing for affecting the consumers’ perception and purchasing behavior, marketers use music in supermarkets and as a background feature in commercials.
The findings of the latest empirical studies have revealed a positive relationship between the use of music elements, concentration of attention and proper perception and interpretation of commercial messages by consumers. The music in the supermarkets created favorable mood in the consumers and encouraged them to make purchases.
Taking into account the findings of the previous researches, this study will conduct semi-structured interviews and test the hypothesis whether there is a positive relationship between the uses of music elements in advertisements and their brand preferences and purchasing decisions.
Literature review Modern marketers view music as an important background feature which can be effectively used for enhancing the viewers’ arousal and effects produced by advertisements.
Even though most consumers denied the impact of music upon their brand preferences, the findings of empirical studies have shown that there are significant differences in the brand attitudes, purchase decisions and emotional responses of viewers to the advertisements of music and non-music groups (1). The results of experiments conducted by Gorn have shown that pleasant music, humor and attractive colors are important background features which can influence the consumers’ perceptions and attitudes (1).
Even though Gorn’s experiments were criticized by other scholars, the conclusions regarding appeal of music upon viewers remained unchanged. Kellaris and Cox who replicated Gorn’s experiments admitted that his findings could have been influenced by demand artifacts (2).
However, Gorn’s premise regarding the positive relationship between product choice and music appeal was not disclaimed. Additionally, Kellaris and Cox measured the strength of different unconditioned stimuli by using different sets of classical and popular music but did not receive any significant differences in results (2).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More A more in-depth investigation of music characteristics and their impact upon the consumer’s emotional responses, brand awareness and purchasing decisions was conducted by Park and Young (3). Assuming that music can activate the brain and affect the mood of t listeners, the researchers attempted to develop a complex taxonomy of music elements, including tempo, pitch, texture and duration and their impact upon individuals’ emotional reactions.
The findings of empirical research have demonstrated that there is a positive relationship between the music tempo and its emotional appeal to listeners (3). Particularly, music with low pitch can arouse the emotions of sadness in listeners, whereas the music with high pitch can be associated with happiness.
Louder music is interpreted as a mood of happiness, and soft music is attributed to the seriousness of the message. Therefore, consumers view the content of the commercial message through the lens of the overall mood of the advertisement that depends upon the tempo and volume of the background music. The maximum effect can be achieved if pleasant music is used as a background melody (3).
Success of a commercial in creating brand awareness and influencing the consumers’ purchasing decisions depends upon a wide array of factors, including the visual elements, major message, music, humor and others. However, as it can be seen from the findings of the recent studies, the use of music can be effective for concentrating the consumers’ attention and creating a positive image of the advertized brand.
Berger and Mitchell concluded that auditory persuasion in the form of pleasant background music plays an important role in communicating the key message of the commercial to the target audience (4).
It is possible to use popular hits to draw the consumers’ attention or unknown melodies created specially for the commercial which can become recognizable and associated with a particular brand in the course of the repetition of the advertisement in the media. Consumers tend to recall more details from advertisements using background music as compared to those without music (1).
Research method A semi-structured interview was conducted with eight college students for the purpose of establishing a relationship between the use of music background and their mood and brand preferences if any. The structure of the interview was flexible, and the questions were open-ended and enabled the participants to express their personal opinions and attitudes.
We will write a custom Essay on Effects of Music in Advertising specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The main objectives of this study included the investigation of the influence of music upon he consumers’ purchasing decision and brand attitudes and individuals’ acceptance of this influence. The participants were asked a series of questions regarding their attitudes towards commercials in general, their favorite advertisement and least preferred advertisement.
A convenient sampling was used for selecting the participants for this research. The interviews were conducted in the form of a friendly conversation, but the participants were informed on the purpose of study and gave their consent for participation.
Research findings Most of the interviewees denied the influence of the background features upon their brand preferences and purchasing behavior. Seven of eight participants claimed that they try to overcome the influence of marketing measures and make informed choices. When asked directly, participants admitted that the background features such as pleasant music and humor in the commercial cannot influence their attitudes to a particular brand, not to mention their purchasing behavior.
Describing their favorite commercials, six of the interviewees attempted to reproduce the songs or background melodies used in the advertisement. The remaining two participants could not say for sure if there was music in their favorite advertisement. When checked, it was cleared out that the favorite commercials of the participants, who hesitated whether there was music in the advertisement or not, contained background music.
The interviewees could recall a lot of details contained in these commercials and demonstrated a profound understanding of the key message of the advertisement.
Moreover, the attitude of the interviewees to the advertized brands was positive. However, the interviewees emphasized the importance of the quality of products upon their attitudes and denied the effect produced by the background features. Eight interviewees admitted that modern commercials using pleasant music and humor do not irritate them and can have a positive impact upon their mood.
Discussing the least preferred commercial, the interviewees pointed out at the main features irritating them. Among the traits having a negative impact upon the consumers’ perception was shameless self-promotion of certain brands and banality of the commercial message.
Therefore, most of the least preferred commercials were based on the mere statements of the advantages offered by particular brands and belonged to a non-music group. The participants could not recall specific details of the advertisements not using music as a background feature. Additionally, four participants admitted that they were irritated with songs used in one of the commercials, saying that it was getting on their nerve every tine they heard it.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Effects of Music in Advertising by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Discussion Analyzing the research findings, it can be stated that the participants deny the impact of background music upon their perception of the commercial message, not to mention their brand preferences and purchasing decisions. These answers clearly demonstrate that present day sophisticated consumers are aware of the marketers’ efforts to influence their perceptions and make attempts to resist this influence.
However, taking into account the fact that all of the most preferred commercials mentioned by the respondents contained music elements and interviewees could recall the slightest details of those commercials, it can be stated that there is a positive relationship between the use of background music in the commercial and the viewers’ emotional responses to the commercial and understanding of the main message of the advertisement.
Music became an integral element of the commercials because even not been asked to, most of the interviewees made attempts to reproduce the melodies and songs used in their favorite commercials. There is a strong association between a particular brand and music used in the advertisement.
As a background feature, music affects the listeners’ mood and concentrates their attention because all of the interviewees could recall specific details of the advertisements belonging to the music group. Regarding those participants who were not certain about the use of background music in their favorite advertisements, this peculiarity can be explained with the specifics of their individual perception of information and the preferred mode of communication.
Additionally, even though these respondents did not notice the presence of background music, they were able to reproduce the rest of details of the plot and the main message of the commercials. Therefore, the music elements can remain unnoticed but still have impact upon the consumers’ perceptions and attitudes.
Regarding the least preferred commercials, it can be stated that most of them belonged to non-music group. Though the music elements are widely used in modern marketing, the instances of non-music commercials can still be found in the media. Though the interviewees pointed out at shameless self-promotion and banality of the message as the main features they disliked about the least preferred commercials, there is a relationship between the lack of the music background and the consumers’ negative attitude towards it.
Additionally, some of the least preferred commercials contained music elements which however irritated the listeners causing their dissatisfaction. Therefore, music elements can become a powerful tool in producing an impression which can be either positive or negative. In that regard, bearing in mind the potential influence of this choice, marketers should be careful in selecting the most appropriate tunes for their commercials and deciding between well-known and unfamiliar songs (4).
Analyzing the brand preferences of the interviewees in their relation to the commercials and the use of background music in them, it can be stated that there is a positive relationship between the use of music as a background feature in advertisements and the consumers’ purchasing decisions.
Event though the vast majority of the participants of the study emphasized their objectivity in making purchasing decisions and denied the impact of particular advertisements and their elements upon their attitudes and behaviors, most of them agreed that they appreciate the quality of the products produced by the brands advertized in their preferred commercials.
Thus, the consumers’ purchasing decisions depend upon a wide range of influential factors, and music used in advertizing can have a significant impact upon their mood and perception of the main message of the commercial and contribute to their awareness and positive attitude towards the advertized brands and their products.
Conclusion Analyzing the results of the semi-structured interviews in their relation to the findings of the previous studies, it can be concluded that there is a positive relationship between the use of music as a background feature in advertisements and the consumers’ brand preferences and purchasing decisions.
Regardless of the fact that most of the participants denied the impact of music in commercials upon their attitudes and brand preferences, it can be stated that music is a powerful tool affecting the consumers’ mood, perception and impression from particular commercials and advertized brands and products. Taking into account the potential impact of music elements, marketers should be careful in selecting the tunes and songs for particular commercials.
References 1. Gorn GJ. The effects of music in advertising on choice behavior: a classical conditioning approach. The Journal of Marketing. 1982 winter; 46(1):94-101.
2. Kellaris JJ, Cox AD. The effects of background music in advertising: a reassessment. Journal of Consumer Research. 1989 Jun;16(1):113-18.
3. Park CW, Young SM. Consumer response to television commercials: the impact of involvement and background music on brand attitude formation. Journal of Marketing Research. 1986 Feb; 23 (1): 11-24.
4. Berger IE, Mitchell AA. The effect of advertising on attitude accessibility, attitude confidence, and the attitude behavior relationship. Journal of Consumer Research. 1989 Dec; 16 (3): 269-279.
Interest Groups Essay essay help
Interest groups are alliance of persons with shared common interests resolute on persuading public policy in their favour. This non-profit advocacy groups enjoy federal tax exemption under the 501(c) (3) edict and discounted mailing charges. The rules however prohibit interest groups from active politics however, the 20 percent rule allows them spend a maximum 20 percent of their budget on advocacy and unlimited funds on lobbying.
The National Rifle Association of America (NRA) started in 1871 during the Civil War in New York; is one of the most powerful interest groups with 4.3 million members. Along with the Gun Owners of America (GOA) they form the Gun Lobby pressure group, advocating for gun ownership as a civil right. They have vast influence on lawmakers in Washington ensuring firearms rights are not interfered with by opposing groups.
Based on the Second Amendment of the Bill of Rights, the gun lobby interest group has successfully fended off anti-gun lobbyists arguing that every American has a right of gun ownership, self-protection and hunting rights. Despite efforts by elected officials to tame the groups, lobbyists always prevail.
Lobbyists exert their influence in the US Congress through committees and subcommittees where most of the legislation is deliberated prior to the enactment of bills. Failing to consult these groups will mean the bill stands little chance of passage within Congress.
The NRA has effectively forestalled the restriction of gun permit issuance for concealed armaments with only seven states managing to pass the laws. Similarly, gun lobbyists have gone to court in jurisdictions like Washington, D.C. with strict gun control laws and managed to overturn bans on gun ownership.
NRA successfully opposed the reintroduction of the Federal Assault Weapons Ban of 1994 advocated by gun control lobby when it expired in 2004. During the Katrina disaster, the gun lobbyists opposed the confiscation of guns actively lobbying for legislation in Louisiana Act 275 and the Federal sponsored Disaster Recovery Personal Protection Act of 2006 that prohibited confiscation of legal weapons from citizens.
The NRA along with other gun lobbyists has effectively advanced its programs due to ability in funding federal and state candidates supporting their causes. They thus opposed the repeal of the Tiahrt Amendment seeking to trace firearms used by criminals to dealers. In 2005, NRA took the City of San Francisco, California, to court for passing legislation “Proposition H” that enacted an almost total gun ban for overstepping their mandate; and successfully reversing the ban when the court upheld this assertion.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The gun lobby groups defence of rights to firearms remains one of the most controversial and polarising campaign issues with the two main national political parties either supporting or opposing the group. The gun lobby normally supports the Republican Party but is fervently opposed by the Democrats who accuse the interest group of encouraging gun violence.
Thus NRA and the gun lobby endorsed Ronald Reagan for presidency in 1980 while in 1994, there ruthless onslaught on House Speaker Tom Foley and Congressman Jack Brooks led to defeats in long held seats.
The influence of interest groups and their lobbyists on politics and the government has continued to plague the US administrations for centuries. The ability of the gun lobby group to block legislation that does not favour their interests exemplifies the pervasive power of these pressure groups as selfish interests override the public good. There is therefore an urgent need to curb their ascendancy.
How children of incarcerated parents are affected Research Paper best college essay help: best college essay help
Introduction When parents are incarcerated, children tend to face difficulties associated with the lack of close relationship with their parents. As a result, some of these children face trauma due to the separation. Other problems include anger, depression, fear and anxiety. Incarceration also leads to a cause where the child is moved from one care giver to another, which results to behavior change among them.
The problem is more severe when the children’s mothers are incarcerated, because the relationship between them is broken. At times, these children result in failure to withdraw emotionally, and some even fail to go to school. At the time of arrest, policemen do not care to ask about the children’s fate, or what they are going to do with their lives once they lose their parents to incarceration.
The same can be said about the judges and agencies involved in correction, because normally, no one raises these questions. The fact that there are no many agencies involving themselves in collection of this information means that there is unclear knowledge of the number of children who face this problem. The importance of families and parents is undeniable as at times, it affects the social goals, and is a preventive measure of delinquency behaviors among children.
The purpose of the study The number of children who have their parents incarcerated as per report released in the recent years shows an alarming number. In year 2007, it was estimated the children who had their parents incarcerated was over 1.7 million, which represented about 2.3 percent of all the children population in America.
Between years 1991 to year 2007, it is estimated that the number of children who had parents incarcerated increased by 77 percent (Christian, 2009). During the same year, the percentage increased in mothers, which was about 131 percent. This paper tends to look at the effects those children who have incarcerated parent’s face, and provides a solution to improve the situation of these children.
Hypothesis H (0) Children of incarcerated parents are affected by incarceration of their parents.
H (1) Children of incarcerated parents are not affected by incarceration of their parents.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Literature review Race and age of the children
The data obtained from the reports released in 2007 had a relationship between the race and the age of the children. The report is also clear to show there lacks relationship between the incarcerated parents and race in reference to mothers. The incarcerated parents of white children showed that in every 1 child whose parent was incarcerated, there were 110 of the white population who were not.
Half of the children that had their parents incarcerated were 9 years or below, while thirty two percent of them were between the years 10 -14 years. The rest of the percentage was between years 15- 17 years (Council of Justice, 2006).
Incarceration of the parents affects almost all the aspects of life of the child left behind. It affects the emotional behavior and the overall behavior of the child. When researching about the effects of incarceration on children, it is usually hard to know whether the way the child turns out to be is due to consequences of incarceration of the parent. Sometimes, the effects of the children may be due to certain things that happened before the child was incarcerated.
It may range from previous mistreatment of children, in case the parents were using drugs or alcohol, or if the parents were suffering from mental illness. Since most researchers do not consider most of these risks that exist before the parents are incarcerated, it is usually very hard to know the effects of incarceration on children.
Though there is no empirical evidence to support some of these claims, it is claimed that children whose parents have been incarcerated have six times likelihood of being incarcerated in future. Some studies have also been keen to show that incarceration has only an independent effect on the behavior of the child, the academic performance as well as the health of the child.
The way the child is going to be affected by incarceration of the parent is usually affected by various factors. Among these factors include: the living arrangement before incarceration of the parent, the degree by which the parent was involved in the life of the child before incarceration, the age of the children, the gender of the child, to mention but a few. The factors discussed below express the level of effect on children due to incarceration of their parents.
Living arrangement before incarceration
According to the data acquired from the justice system, about half of the children whose parents had been incarcerated were living with their parents a month or just some time before the incarceration take place. Also, about a half of the children whose parents were incarcerated were being financially supported by the parents before they were incarcerated.
We will write a custom Research Paper on How children of incarcerated parents are affected specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Another seventy percent of the mothers who were incarcerated were caregivers to their children before they were incarcerated. However, only about twenty six percent of the children were receiving daily care from their fathers. According to this data which was obtained, it was evident the parents had a great involvement in the lives of their children before they were incarcerated.
They did this through living with them, providing them with daily care, as well as providing financial support to them. The results from the data showed there was a considerable number of children who were living with one parent who was later incarcerated (Simmons, 2007).
For those children who were living with a single parent after incarceration, their living arrangement completely changed. Due to incarceration, there is also a very high likelihood of existence of financial hardship, especially if the parent was involved in taking care of the child. The resultant of this is that the standard of living of the children is likely to fall when the provider is no longer there to provide financial support he/she used to offer.
On the same point of economic strain, the household is also likely to bring about instability as there is likelihood of moves which may become often. The health development is also likely to be affected. Poor development of the child is likely to come about due to family instability, which comes about due to incarceration of the parent.
Children who are living in stable households with concerned caregivers usually end up with better behavior than the children who are living in a family facing instability. Foster care causes several risks to children who have their parents being incarcerated. There is a risk of a loss of connection to school and community due to having the children not being close to their parents.
The bureau of Justice Statistics shows that for every parent who is incarcerated, there is another parent who takes care of these children. The biggest numbers of children who are left behind are left with the grandparents, and this accounts about fifteen percent.
Incarcerated parents contact with Children
When contact is kept between the incarcerated parent and the child, it is of a benefit to both the child and the parent. Although there is little evidence to prove that visits by the children to their parents when they are incarcerated is beneficial to the children, it would be generally important to ensure that a relationship exists.
Research indicates that maintaining the relationships where the child visits the parent when he/she is incarcerated ensures that there is a successful reunion between the two when the parent is released.
Not sure if you can write a paper on How children of incarcerated parents are affected by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Further, the research shows that there is likelihood of post-release success when the parent is released and a parole violation lows when the relationship between the child and the parent is maintained after the parent is incarcerated. Research also shows that about seventy seven percent of the parents had some contact between the parent and the child (Christian,2009).
However, there were certain barriers, which were brought about that reduced the contact in existence. One of such policies is the correction policy, which is in existence. Though the officials who run the correction centers campaign for existence of these visits, security concerns usually minimize these visits.
The correction officers usually ask the people including children for birth certificate to prove that they are the biological children of these parents. Prisons also tend to charge high rates, which are not usually affordable to some of these parents, and at times discourage the visit by children to their parents.
Unfriendliness of the prison environment is the other thing that leads to a lack of existence of relationship between parents and children. Some of the incorporated things that can be considered unfriendly include: frisking of the people visiting the incarcerated, rude treatment by some of the officers, the dirt which is in some of these places, and also the fact that these activities involve children.
Other effects of incarceration of the parent
As earlier noted, incarceration of the parent causes emotional behavior change in the children. However, these are not only the effects that occur to these children. Other problems result from the child welfare law which has been put into practice. The law severely affects the relationship between the parent and the child due to the actions of these agencies. The safe family act of 1997 calls for petition in case one of the children is abandoned.
The act may result in a scenario where the rights of the parents are terminated to the child if there is a proof of the child being abandoned, or the child being in foster care for about 15 months (Christian,2009). Though this act exists, there is an exception to it in case the care giver’s role of the child is left for a relative, and when termination of these rights is not in the best interest of the child.
Methodology According to the hypotheses put across, it is clear that incarceration of the parent has effects to the children massively. To start with, there is a loss of the parent-child relationship that is necessary for better growth of a child. The fact that there are acts which ensure children who do not have their parents around them are likely to be put for adoption or taken care by foster homes does not make it any better. Incarceration alone does not constitute to denial of rights of the parent.
The loss of child rights to children due to incarceration comes about due to certain factors that are inclusive of the following: The length of the time that the parent will be incarcerated, whether there is provision of the required child care services, the relationship between the parent and the child as well as whether the incarceration of the parent is often.
The effects of children due to incarceration do not end just because the parent gets out of prison. Even though the child is united with the parent, the problems do not end there. The challenges that come about are both internal and external to rebuild the time that was already lost during incarceration (Jarvis, 2007). At this time, life may become hard as the parent has to look for a job and provision of housing and health care for the child/children.
Since at the time of incarceration the parent was not earning anything, there is usually of a likelihood of existences of debts that may need to be cleared once the parent is out of jail. Other financial needs may include child support arrears, criminal fines and penalties that may need to be paid to the courts.
Children may also face the difficult of re-entry of the prisoner; in this case, it may be stressful. Children may at that time have formed relationship with other parent figures who may be even relatives or other individuals in the society.
At times, these people may be reluctant in allowing rekindling of the relationship which existed between the child and the parent before incarceration. The resultant of this is destabilization of the family, which at this time is time, may be fragile in nature. The threat is even more if the parent in question is among the violent ones, as the child might live with that fear.
Stigma and a feeling of shame also tend to exist among the children whose parents have faced incarceration. People tend to relate the crime the child did to him/her, and tend to treat these children as crime offenders (Harris, 2010). To say the least, these children can only be victims of the crimes the parents were involved in.
Treating these children as criminals is not fair at all to them. In turn, there are even cases where these children feel ashamed of the actions of their parents. The shame may even be more if the child is the victim of the crime committed by the parent. At times, this results to lack of self-esteem of these children and takes a lot of encouragement to regain it.
Conclusion There are so many challenges that affect children whose parents have been incarcerated. The effect is more if the child was very close to the parent, or if the parent was single. At times, matters of the law come in as the parent is likely to lose the rights he/she has of the child, in case the time of incarceration is long.
Depending on the age of these children, it is important to put into consideration the best interest of the child so that whatever decision is arrived at, it may be aimed at providing the child with the best care available. When the parent is released from jail, the challenges do not end there.
Some children find it hard to deal with their parents due to the fact that they might have grown away from their parents. Since some children may not be in a position to cope with this, it is important to derive a coping mechanism that seeks to make it easy for children whose parents have been incarcerated. It would be therefore necessary to find mentoring programs which aim at ensuring that the children get all the motivation they need in improving the relationship between them and their parents.
Support and encouragement should be also be incorporated in the lives of these children to make sure they are improved from the state they are in. There is also a need to have an adult who believes in the strength of the child in quest to ensure that the child’s self-esteem is maintained. Helping the children cope may also be better if they maintained a relationship with their parents when incarcerated.
There is a need to the connection between the child and the parent for easier re-entry of the parent in the child’s life. It is therefore necessary that since most of the decisions about the children welfare are made in courts, the children are given a family oriented set up.
References Christian, S. (2009). Children of Incarcerated Parents. National conference of State legislators. Pp 1-7.
Council of Justice. (2006). Children of Incarcerated Parents. Council on Crime and Justice. Pp 8-16.
Harris, Y. R. (2010). Children of incarcerated parents: theoretical, developmental, and clinical issues. New York: Springer Publishing Company.
Jarvis, A. (2007). Children of incarcerated parents: An application of the stress process model. Texas: ProQuest.
Simmons, C. (2000). Children of Incarcerated Parents. California State Library. Sacramento, CA: Carlifornia Research Bureau. Pp 9-13.
Egypt and Canada Research Paper essay help free: essay help free
The international community embraces presence of laws that protect people’s ideas, patents, copyrights trade secrets and plagiarism trademarks. Egypt and Canada are not an exception to these laws and are also bound to register the applications by their citizens protecting their intellectual properties against people who may use them to benefit themselves economically.
Unlike Egypt, the government of Canada developed rules pertaining the protection of intellectual property in 1985; this was seven years prior to formulation of laws dealing with intellectual property in Egypt. In both these countries, protection of patents is similar in reference to the period a patent lasts.
A patent lasts 20 years after application after which it is let out to the general public and anyone who wishes to use that work to benefit publicly can do so (Kaphahn, 2009). However, registration in Canada for a patent requires the patent holder to prove that the patent has three characteristics. For one, the work must be a novel. The focus here is on the detail of the invention in question and the seriousness it contains.
The patent should also not be obvious. Special skills are needed to create the object or the thing that needs to be patent, and anything that anyone can come up with cannot be patented. Finally, the thing that is to be awarded a patent needs to have utility. The basic meaning of this is that that thing needs to be able to satisfy a want (Zvulony, 2002).
Copyright registration in these two countries protects the reputation as well as the good will that is attached to the products or the services that are being offered. However, though there is full protection of the goods or services provided, a clause that allows usage of part of the work exists (Kaphahn, 2009). For example, a book a fair dealing clause is in provision. It allows people to partially use the original work and it entirely falls on education bases.
The positioning of these two countries geographically provides an almost similar ways of transport. The main means of transport in these two countries is by road, by rail by water and by air. However, there is a big difference when it comes to the quality of the services in provision in the countries.
When it comes to the road network, Egypt has a notably badly maintained network, while the same cannot be said about the road network in Canada. There was massive investment in the road network after the Second World War in Canada. Due to the fact that it is one of the most competitive means of transport in Canada, especially in short distance, it is well maintained. Development of air transport is also very different countries.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More While Egypt may have three major air ports, Canada on the other hand has a staggering 515 airports. The rail network is also available in these two countries. Notable about these two countries in reference to the rail transport is the fact that it is not a common means of transport and is mainly used in transporting of commodities and goods to different regions.
However, the rail network in Canada in more developed than the one in Egypt, which is even aging. The two countries also have water transport as part of their transport systems. The networks in these two regions are found in their big rivers as well as the lakes found in the countries.
As earlier noted, the two countries enjoy transportation of both people and products within and outside their borders. When it comes to transportation of cargo goods in and outside these two countries as a requirement there needs to be an insurance cover that is meant to compensate for any perils that occur during transportation. Each mode of transport has its own insurance coverage that covers any risk that may come about.
The premiums that are paid to these insurance companies are to the respect of the risk that is likely to be encountered when goods are in transit. However, variable and precious goods or jewelry have their portion of premium, which is notably higher than any of the other goods that are covered about by the insurance policy.
The distance that needs to be covered while transporting the cargo in question is also a big contributor to the amount of premium that needs to be paid to the insurance companies. Furthermore, the authorities in these two countries have a provision that is meant to bid those companies that are involved in transportation to ensure that they confirm their transit carriers, so as to avoid any complications in terms of payment, in case there is occurrence of risks.
Egypt and Canada share similarities when it comes to matters of Trade documentation requirements. Such similarities are evident when it comes to releasing of goods from the custom department. Certain documents need to be there for the goods to be released from the ports. Among these documents is the bill of landing.
The information that is contained in this document should be such that it should be corresponding to other documents like the invoices and the way the goods are packaged. Certificate of origin also forms the other type of document that need to be present before the imports are released from the ports (Zaki, 2005).
We will write a custom Research Paper on Egypt and Canada specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The importance of the certificate of origin is to ensure that certain information is contained. Among the type of information that may be contained include the following: the weight of the goods in question, the full address of the country and the company that manufactures the goods. Similarity in these two countries extend even when it comes to exportation of the goods.
An export card is required in both countries, which is issued by the ministry that is concerned with imports and exports, for example the ministry of industries when it comes to Egypt. Taxation card is also a requirement when it comes to the two countries. The importance of this card is to ensure that taxation is carried out for any imports brought about in the country and the right amount charged. Other trading documents needed when carrying out trading in these countries is the insurance certificate.
Both countries highlight on the importance of having insurance, especially when it comes to importers (Porter, 2011). Pro-Forma invoice is also important and a requirement, and comes in four copies. Among the contents is the country that the goods originated from the quantity, as well as the price charged on the goods. The type of commodity that is being traded as well as value of the commodity in foreign currency is also a requirement.
However, there is a difference on the way valuables are treated in both countries. While not special attention is paid to them in Canada, Egypt has such a policy that highlight on the importance of stating valuables like jewelry and electronics. In fact, failure to do so may lead to a scenario where the valuables may be confiscated awaiting charges on why the goods were not stated.
Regulations regarding foods are also common in the two countries. The policies are put in place in protection of health matters. Such policies are put into place to ensure that there is no food that is advertised or sold to the general public, which is poisonous in nature or in case it contains harmful components.
Foods that are manufactured or packaged in facilities that are not sanitary friendly are also not fit for advertisement, and selling the same to people is prohibited. Agricultural chemicals are necessary for growth of some of the agricultural products, which further constitutes food. However, both countries highlight on the importance of ensuring that the set standards on the maximum number of chemicals food products should contained is maintained.
The standards that the chemicals used in agricultural food products should be contained are set out by the authorities and should be limited to a certain maximum level. Further, the two countries share opinions when it comes to advertising and provision of foods, which are packaged in such a way that they cause misleading impressions to the general public. Misleading information in this case is inclusive of erroneous values, quantity and the components of the products.
The laws are also similar to the ones concerning foods when it comes to drugs. Any misleading and deceptive information is discouraged and there are laws put in place to ensure that such does not happen. Deceptive information includes information that gives untrue information about the value of the drugs, the components of the drugs as well as the safety standards incorporated in manufacturing of the products.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Egypt and Canada by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Drugs that are also packaged in a sanitary unpleasant area and drugs that are unpackaged in a sanitary unpleasant area are also prohibited from being sold in both the countries. Packaging as well as advertising of drugs that do not meet the standard set out by the authorities is also prohibited in these two countries.
The laws of the two countries also against any advertising that is meant to cause a mistake of the substances that are used in the manufacture of these drugs.
Sanitary conditions are also required to be observed when packaging these drugs, and if these drugs have been packaged in conditions that do not meet these drugs, then they are not presumed fit to be advertised, leave alone being sold for consumptions. Distribution of drugs that are meant to be samples is not also allowed in any of these countries, as it is required that the right standards for the drugs should be there for them to qualify to be sold or advertised.
The government of the day is an important player when it comes to protection of the consumers of the product that are put in the market by the various firms and organizations in the country. Egypt and Canada are also actively involved in ensuring that the consumers of the products produced locally or imported are protected against from producers and manufacturers who are not genuine in offering their products.
The laws put into place also ensure that the individuals who come across such products report in case they come across such manufacturers. In addition, there is need to ensure that incidents that lead to death or serious incidents get reported to the government to ensure that information is used to promote safety. Further, testing is important in both countries to ensure that only products that fit the set standards are traded.
The two countries also have hard fines and penalties to individuals who fail to comply with the laws set by the authorities (Antario, 2011). The aim of having these fines is to ensure that manufactures abide to the laws laid down, and put the acts set aside as priorities in manufacturing of the goods. Labeling of products should be such that it conforms to the laws that are put across.
Labeling of products which do not fit the standards is forbidden and there is need to ensure that only products of good quality are put in the market for consumption (Antario, 2011). The language that is used is advertising products that are meant for use by general public should be free of errors and should also not be misleading.
Erroneous messages when it comes to advertising are considered breach of laws that ensure there is protection of consumers of the products. In both countries, English is a language that is used to advertise. However, the case is different when it comes to Egypt as Arabic is incorporated in both communicating and advertising the products in the market. The same language is used in defining the rules that concerns protection of the customers.
References Antario, S. (2011). Consumer Protection Act, 2002. Web.
Kaphahn, D. (2009). Understanding Intellectual Property Rights in Egypt. GAT Pp 1-2.
Porter, L. (2011). Transportation in Canada. Web.
Zaki, A. F. (2005). Documentation for customs requirements – egypt. Pp1-2.
Zvulony, G. (2002). Intellectual Property in Canada. Web.
Global economy during the late nineteenth and early twentieth century Term Paper essay help online free
Table of Contents Specification of an Economic model
What benefits did the globalization affect?
At what costs did the globalization occur?
How did that affect the global economy today?
Globalization is the integration of regional economies through trade by reduction of international trade barriers in order to increase material wealth of the people and improve the economies of the nations through good global relations, competition and specialization. The objective of globalization is to enhance the interdependence, business operations and connectivity on an international level with respect to the socioeconomic, cultural, religion, biological, environmental and scientific aspects (Fiss,
Potential Investment in Georgia Research Paper custom essay help: custom essay help
Table of Contents Abstract
Abstract Georgia’s economy is emerging from the 2008 internal displacements and is currently being supported by the international community to improve its economy, thus, providing potential investment opportunities to investors. This document discusses investment opportunities in the tourism and agricultural sector in Georgia.
Introduction Agriculture plays a significant role in Georgia’s economy, and according to FAO, Georgia and the Ministry of Agriculture, Georgia, the agriculture sector’s contribution to Georgia’s economy was 12.5% in average 2006-2009 (FAO Georgia 4). On average, the agricultural sector’s contribution to the country’s foreign exchange earnings between 2006 and 2010 was 21% (FAO Georgia 4). Georgia’s tourism sector has also been on the rise recording a 16% increase in 2009 (Georgian National Investment Agency 1).
Agriculture The government acknowledges the importance of agriculture in ensuring food safety and poverty reduction and therefore is investing massive resources and engages in partnerships to promote agriculture in the country. The future of Georgia’s agricultural sector is positive given the country’s lots of fertile soils, subtropical climate, diverse agricultural species (National Investment Agency 2), and support from the international community such as the European Union.
There are several investment opportunities in Georgia’s agricultural sector. Animal production presents a great opportunity for investment in the country. FAO (24) notes that the total meat, milk as well as egg production have declined as compared to the levels recorded in 2009.
In contrast, a new slaughterhouse, IberMeat Geogia, was established in the country in 2010 (FAO Georgia 9). Besides, meat processing enterprises have been established in Kakheti, Gurjaanitwon and in Telavillage funded by the Millenium Challenge Georgia Fund (FAO Georgia 9). These present an opportunity for investing in beef cattle. Again, dairy cattle have been on the decline opening an opportunity for investment in dairy production.
Georgia has also become a member of the Wine World Trade Group opening opportunities for investment in production of vine and wine manufacturing to be exported without additional barriers to the US, Canada, New Zealand, Australia and Argentina (FAO 9). Besides, many agricultural manufacturing plants have been opened or revived to open up associated agricultural activities in the country. These include Sugar plant in Agara, New Nuts Works in Zugdidi and Geoplant tea production in Guria and Samagrelo (FAO 10).
Again, export opportunities for Georgian persimmons, bay oil, and lemonade have been on the rise. Lemonade is currently exported to 14 countries, while persimmons is exported to Ukraine, Armenia, Belarus and Moldova (FAO 12). Georgian Bay Oil is in high demand in Australia (FAO 12). These present investment opportunities in production of bay, lemonade and persimmons.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Tourism Georgian National Investment Agency (1) reports that there is an increasing interest in the number international tourists who are seeking to experience Georgia’s unspoiled nature as well as quality service. The country has numerous tourism opportunities which include high snow-capped mountains in the Caucasus range, Black Sea’ sub-tropical lushness, hot thermal waters, and nine climate zones which matches the desires of diverse tourists who travel to the countries among other opportunities.
Georgia had more than 1.5 million visitors in 2009, “an increase of 16% compared to 2008” (Georgian National Investment Agency 1), and the number continues to increase. Georgia is ranked as “the most competitive tourism destination country” by the World Economic Forum (Georgian National Investment Agency 1).
Georgian National Investment Agency (1) reports that Georgia’s hotels are becoming crowded and therefore more hotels are needed to accommodate tourists who visit the country. In May this year, a US-based research company, STR global, reported that high-end hotels in Tbilisi “reached 100% occupancy” (Georgian National Investment Agency 1). This presents a great opportunity for investment in Georgia’s tourism infrastructure especially hotels.
Conclusion The agricultural and tourism sector in Georgia provides numerous potential investment opportunities. These two sectors receive the greatest government support which makes them more suitable for investment.
Works Cited FAO, Georgia. Georgia. Agricultural Sector Bulletin Winter 2011. Web.
Georgian National Investment Agency. Hotel occupancy reaches 100% in Tbilisi. Invest Today 4 (June 2011). Web.
National Investment Agency. Panel Discussion
Library Information System Improvement Report (Assessment) essay help online free
Table of Contents Executive Overview
Analysis of the current system
Needs of the new system
Proposed configuration and specifications
Justification for new system
Installation / Implementation Plan
Executive Overview The current situation in business across the globe indicates a major relationship between performance and communication. In this regard it has been observed that to improve business performance there is a major need to improve communication and access to services. The current information system within the institution library is computerized but falls short of requirements of students and staff due to delays in upgrading the service. The current service is supported by a database stored on the library server.
This database is used to locate, book and keep records related to the books in the inventory. However, the system can only be accessed at one point, which is making it especially difficult for students and staff of campus to access books. In addition to that, the books are only in one format which limits the number of users who can access the books.
It has been suggested that if changes were made to allow additional formats of books to be stored on the system, and an increase in access to the library system major both staff and students can benefit significantly from the resources provided by the system. It is for these reasons that this proposal will provide a suitable alternative to the current library system.
Analysis of the current system As it has already been mentioned earlier in the report this proposal seeks to improve the current system in use within the library. The current system used in the library is computer based and serves both students and staff within the library. The system allows information to be stored on various database relations and uses this information to manage the borrowing of books and resources from the library. The records pertaining to students and staff are entered into the system by accessing the main registration database.
When new books arrive they are scanned and entered into the system. The system is also used to identify appropriate rows within the library to arrange the books. When a student/staff comes to the library they can either locate the books on the shelves using the information on the bulletin board or ask the library assistant to help them locate the books. Once they have the books they go to the counter where a library assistant uses their identity card to enter the details of the transaction into the system.
Upon return of the book or other resource to the library the student/staff must visit the library assistant’s counter. The library assistant will use the student/staff identity to enter the completion of the transaction into the system. The system has a mechanism to print out a list of books that are overdue. However, this list is not very useful as the existing system does not allow the library department to communicate with the borrower.
The current system also has a mechanism that is used to calculate fines and penalties for lateness after the due dates have passed. This facility allows the library assistant calculate what payments should be made by students/staff who have over stayed with books or other resources. However, it has again been noted that this facility does not serve the student/staff well as it does not allow for communication between the library and the student/staff in question.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More It has also been noted that the need to make a physical visit to the library to borrow a book is not very favorable for students and staff who reside off campus. The current system does not allow the users to query the database to find out if the resource they require is available.
As a result of this it has been observed that students and staff off campus are forced to make trips to the library sometimes while unsure if the books they need are available. Based on the above shortcomings it has been observed that the institution could greatly benefit from improvements to its existing library system.
Needs of the new system Information technology has been defined as the use of a combination of hardware, software and services for the management, communication and sharing of information (Shelly
Importance of an EU Regional Policy Essay college application essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Arguments for EU regional Policy
Introduction The European Union was created with the aim of contributing economic growth and development of European countries through establishing a common currency and a single market. According to economics, breaking down existing barriers will cause the escalation of positive economic effects through efficiency and redirection of resources to cost-effective investments.
However, equal distribution of profits among the members in freely competing markets is not possible. Newly entering member states having different conditions received different end results from the integration. This uneven distribution within the integration may be hindered by cohesion thus a need for regional policy.
The European Union regional policy covers all European regions and consists of three objectives: employment and regional competitiveness, convergence as well as territorial cooperation (Cini, 2003). The regional policy environment has however become very complex and regional policy makers at the national and EU levels are facing the key challenge of globalization.
The increasing internalization of economy, the removal of trade barriers within the EU, technological change and the shift towards knowledge-based economy has been actively restructuring the competitive advantage of regions and countries (Boldrin
Educational Strategies for Fourth Grade English Language Arts students Essay essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu
Table of Contents Introduction
Learning and applying the English Language Arts content
Preparing for the New York State English Language Arts test
Introduction Fourth grade is the fourth year of school for students after kindergarten. Students in this grade have ages of between nine and ten years. Teachers must use effective educational strategies and instructional methods in teaching English Language Arts.
This discussion explores the strategies and methods of instruction that the teachers can use in order to ensure comprehension and application of the content by fourth grade students. The strategies used should also ensure that the students perform well in the New York State English Language Arts test. The teachers should also use teaching strategies that ensure that the New York English Learning Standards for fourth grade are met.
Learning and applying the English Language Arts content English Language Arts is supposed to polish the reading, writing, speaking, and listening skills of students. At each grade, there are certain expectations that students should meet in their mastery of the English language. At fourth grade, students have already learnt reading, writing, listening and speaking skills from earlier grades.
They use these skills to comprehend more complex texts. In order to sufficiently master English Language Arts in this grade, the students need to be exposed to opportunities that will enable them to have active involvement in reading, research, speaking, and thinking about relevant topics in their grade.
Fourth grade teachers should incorporate games and interesting activities in their lessons in order to capture the attention of the students and to engage them in learning activities. Various vocabulary and reading activities and games can help the students to grasp facts in a fun way (Moore and Moore 2004).
At fourth grade, students are supposed to improve their reading skills. At this stage, students are exposed to different kinds of literature, plays, poetry, speeches, drama, fables, folktales, short stories, myths, legends, and autobiographies, among others. The students can read these texts on their own without the teacher’s intervention. They use these literary texts to observe the use of words by authors to bring out a particular meaning, text structures, and the use of graphics to explain the text.
They read these texts and draw conclusions. They also learn to differentiate different authors’ points of view. Moreover, they learn about various figurative features used in writing hyperbole, personification, metaphors, among others. They also use these literary texts to understand the concepts of themes, character traits, and conflicts in the text. Teachers should enhance their students understanding of these texts by asking them to respond through dramatizing or paraphrasing them.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More While reading, fourth grade students enhance their understanding of difficult and ambiguous text through strategies like self-questioning methods.
The teachers should engage their fourth grade students in literature response activities that are challenging, for instance, asking them to relate with the characters or asking them what they think the outcome of the story would have been if something was done differently. This encourages the students to think critically about the texts and therefore, enhance their comprehension (Eggen and Kauchak 2008).
Teachers also enhance their fourth grade students’ skills by exposing them to informational texts such as magazines, textbooks, tables, charts, recipes, maps, advertisements, and photographs, among others. The students are taught how to interpret this information and make conclusions.
They learn how to use features such as captions, print styles, chapter headings and subheadings appropriately in their writing. Fourth grade students also learn the use of structures like appendices, table of contents, index and glossary in their writing. Moreover, they learn how to construe graphic features like charts and tables. Students also learn to examine texts in order to get facts, opinions, and relationships. They can respond to these texts through writing and creative dramatization (Perullo 2003).
Students in fourth grade also learn how to build their vocabulary and analyze words in order to be able to read fluently. These students need strategies to develop vocabulary and be able to analyze and understand texts as the complexity of their texts increases. Students start to apply the complex vocabulary that they learn in their reading to their writing and speaking. They learn the meanings of complex words and words with more than one meaning.
The teachers should use strategies to enable the students to learn the use of euphemisms, affixes and roots and be able to apply them in their work. The students also learn what it means to connote and denote in text. Teachers can enhance their students’ reading skills through asking them to read texts and narratives aloud in class while checking for proper accuracy, fluency, pacing, and expression.
This will make sure that the students are actively engaged in learning and enable the teacher to identify the weak points in the students’ grammar. Correcting the students will make sure that they do not repeat the same mistakes again and therefore their grammar will be improved (Moore and Moore 2004).
We will write a custom Essay on Educational Strategies for Fourth Grade English Language Arts students specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Vocabulary building can be improved through creative ways like putting new words in word walls, vocabulary journals, and other devices in the classroom. Another strategy that teachers can use to build their students vocabulary is to use complex words as they teach and encourage the students to use those words in their writing and speech. In addition, teachers can encourage the students to read a wide variety of books because they are likely to encounter more new words.
Students should also practice reading various fourth grade level texts on their own in order to broaden their vocabulary. The more they read, the more they will come across many new words and when they try to find out their meanings, their vocabulary will be broadened (Eggen and Kauchak 2008).
The students in fourth grade also hone their writing skills in preparation for the English Language Arts test through various strategies. They need to develop writing which is well organized, clearly focused, well elaborated and with the proper application of conventions. The students continue to polish their writing skills through writing, revising and editing texts. They learn how to develop content, use conventions and organize their writing.
Teachers should ensure that the students practice writing every day so as to sufficiently sharpen their writing skills. Enough practice will enhance their mastery of the English language and thus, they will be well prepared for the English language Arts test. The students improve their grammar by identifying and using verbs, prepositions, adverbs, and conjunctions in their writing.
They also practice the correct usage of commas, parenthesis, apostrophes, italics, quotation marks, capitalization, and underlining in their writing. Teachers should engage fourth grade students in activities like brainstorming and using literary models and graphic organizers to organize their ideas before they start writing. They should also practice writing proper paragraphs by stating the main idea and providing details to support it (Moore and Moore 2004)
Fourth grade students also learn how to develop focused writing using different words to ensure clarity. They incorporate various transitional features in their writing like conjunctions in order to maintain the flow of their ideas. They also learn to use revision strategies to edit and proofread their work to ensure clarity and eliminate any mistakes. They proof read to ensure the proper usage of commas, punctuations, capitalization, and spelling, among others.
Teachers should train the students to use technology to develop their documents. They should show a mastery of the English language by writing compositions that are comprehensible and free from mistakes. Teachers can help sharpen the writing skills of their students by giving them assignments to write compositions describing certain experiences, events or objects.
The teacher should then mark the compositions and include corrections to the mistakes made so that the student can learn from them and write better next time. Writing skills can also be improved through strategies such as writing conferences, shared writing and peer response and writing. In shared writing the students and the teacher contribute their ideas and thoughts during the writing process to compose a text. In peer response and editing, students evaluate each other’s written work and give response and feedback.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Educational Strategies for Fourth Grade English Language Arts students by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This enables the students to learn from each other. The teacher is also able to gauge whether his/her students can identify writing mistakes made by the others and therefore determine their level of mastery of the English language (Perullo 2003).
In this grade, the students also learn how to write for different audiences and purposes. The teachers should teach them how to develop communications like blogs, emails, and flyers, among others. They also need to develop skills for reflective and descriptive types of writing.
Fourth grade students also need to learn how to create writings like narratives, biographies, songs, plays, poems, reports, among others. Students can improve their skills in writing different types of sentences through interesting activities and games that enable them to identify and differentiate between interrogative, imperative, declarative and exclamatory sentences. Games and activities can also be used to teach transitions to the students in order to improve their essay writing skills (Flood 2003).
Speaking and listening skills are also polished in fourth grade. Students learn to verbally communicate with different people through engagement in conversations with their fellow students and teachers. Their speech should have appropriate pitch, phrasing and accent. They learn how to engage in effective group interactions by speaking one person at a time instead of every one speaking at the same time. They should also learn the appropriate manner of speaking to different audiences.
Having proper verbal skills enables the students to participate effectively in group discussions. This enables them to learn new ideas from others. The students with good speaking skills are also able to participate in class by asking well-formulated questions and responding appropriately to questions asked. They are also able to seek others’ opinions about various issues and give their own opinion with reasons to support it.
The students are also able to respond to questions asked by the teacher and give proper clarifications and illustrations when asked to do so. They should be able to explain points in class while using examples, details, and proper accent, gestures and phrasing to enhance the clarity of the message. In addition, they should have proper presentation skills in order to be able to introduce a concept, explain it and conclude appropriately.
Teachers can improve their’ students speaking skills through giving them assignments that require them to do oral presentations and recitations in class. This will enhance their speaking skills as well as build their confidence. The students can also hold dialogues or debates on controversial issues. This will ensure that the students air their opinions and support them.
During the presentations, the teacher should ensure that the students are able to articulate the ideas about a certain experience or event and be able to catch the attention of the listeners. Having proper speaking skills enables the students to express themselves and share ideas with others, which is essential for successful learning (Eggen and Kauchak 2008).
Fourth grade students also learn how to access and use information for different purposes. They learn to access information from other sources like books, newspapers, magazines, dictionaries, atlases, thesauruses, encyclopedias and other materials. They paraphrase the information gathered from these sources and use it in their writing. They also learn to support the ideas in their writing through the use of charts, pictures, or diagrams.
Moreover, they learn strategies for organizing their information such as categorization and classification. The students learn information gathering skills like using the internet to search for information and interviewing skills. They are able to correctly reference their work by listing the sources of their information.
At this grade students should be taught how to write from other sources of information by paraphrasing and providing references in order to distinguish between their ideas and those from other sources. They learn how to use other sources and technology to seek information (Flood 2003).
Preparing for the New York State English Language Arts test The English Language Arts test is done every year by students in fourth grade in New York. The purpose of this test is to determine how well the students have mastered the New York State Learning Standards of English and Language Arts at fourth grade.
The test also reviews the class level of the students and establishes whether it meets the standards of the No Child Left behind Act. This test consists of short fiction and non-fiction stories from which multiple-choice questions are derived. The students’ mastery of grammar, spelling, punctuation and reading comprehension are tested (Flood 2003).
There are four New York State English learning standards. In standard one, the students write, read, listen and speak in order to acquire, understand and transmit information, while in standard two they learn in order to be able to express themselves and respond to literary texts. In standard three, students read, write, listen and speak in order to be able to analyze and evaluate information, ideas and information critically. In standard for, the students learn in order to be able to interact effectively with different people (Whiting 2003).
In order for fourth grade students to meet the New York State English Learning Standards on the English Language Arts test and perform well, the teachers need to use several educational strategies and instructional methods. To effectively prepare students for this test, the teachers need to ensure that they read frequently to enhance their skills in fluency and reading comprehension. Teachers should provide entertaining books to the students to practice with.
The teachers can also give sample practice tests to the students in preparation for the English Language Arts test. These sample tests can be acquired from the New York State Department of Education. Doing sample tests enables the student to get an idea on the type of questions that will be asked and will therefore feel comfortable and well prepared for the test.
The teacher can also guide the students to explore websites that offer a variety of educational activities, games, worksheets, homework, reading help and puzzles to enhance the students’ mastery of the English language Arts in a fun way. This helps to catch their attention and also enhance their understanding. The students can also visit learning centers and libraries for additional knowledge on English Language Arts (Perullo 2003).
In order to efficiently prepare for the English Language Arts test, the students should polish their writing skills through thorough practice on correct spelling of words, correct use of punctuation marks and proper use of grammar. Writing activities and games can help the students to improve their writing skills in preparation for the test. Students should practice writing compositions on different events and experiences in order to have excellent writing skills by the time they sit for the English Language Arts test (Whiting 2003).
Text comprehension is important for the students to perform well in the English Language Arts test. Therefore, the students need to use various strategies in order to enhance their comprehension of texts. They should practice comparing and combining information from different sources.
As they read texts, they should use strategies like questioning, summarizing, supporting or disagreeing with the author’s opinion and clarifying ambiguities for further understanding of the text that they are reading or listening to. They should also practice rereading, cross-checking, and confirming to check their progress in comprehension of the text.
The students should also read various texts as they try to understand the deeper meaning and try to distinguish between the different techniques of writing used in various information sources. Teachers should ensure that the students are grasping the English language arts by administering tests that evaluate their mastery of various concepts.
They should test their vocabularies, administer comparison tests and excerpt questions to measure their reading comprehension, grammar, among others. Through these tests, the teacher will be able to find out the areas in which the students are experiencing difficulties, and therefore spend more time teaching them (Flood 2003).
In order to enhance their literary response and analysis, teachers should ensure that the students practice reading fourth grade level literature and answer questions that are derived from it. They should respond to the literary text through dramatizing, writing and oral presentations. They should try to understand the author’s purpose for writing the text and the main message being transmitted. After reading the text, the students should have a personal point of view and use evidence to support it (Moore and Moore 2004)
Other strategies that teachers can use to ensure that their fourth grade students are well prepared for the English Language Arts test include using flash cards, question exchange and mock testing.
Flash cards can be used to broaden the vocabulary mastery. Vocabularies relevant to fourth grade level students are written on the cards together with their definitions and students will engage in a group activity of trying to tell the meanings of the words. This activity will keep the students actively engaged and will enable them to retain the vocabularies learnt in their memory (Whiting 2003).
Question exchange strategy is important in helping the students to understand the test questions. In this strategy, the students and the teacher will go through sample tests questions and learn how to interpret them correctly by paying attention to sentence structure, formatting and punctuation.
They should practice altering the questions to derive a different meaning and then try answering it. This exercise will enable the students to learn how to correctly interpret questions so that they can give the required answers. Failure to pay attention to the structure of the question might lead to misinterpretation and therefore giving the wrong answer (Whiting 2003).
The teachers should also use a mock testing strategy. This will ensure that the students get to understand the nature of the English language arts test and what is required of them to score good marks. The teacher should administer a mock test and mark it. Then he/she should review it with the students. This enables the students to gain confidence and get acquainted with the English Language Arts test setting (Whiting 2003).
In preparation for the English Language Arts test, fourth grade students should be taught lessons to help them identify suffixes and prefixes and learn the correct word meanings. Their vocabulary lessons should include antonyms, synonyms and homonyms. They should also be taught literature-based topics to broaden their vocabulary.
They also need to learn different nouns. Various games and activities can be incorporated in lesson plans to enable the students to learn in an enjoyable and engaging environment. For instance, activities in which a teacher reads out a text and asks the students to write a list of nouns that they hear. The student who writes the longest list of nouns wins. This enables the students to grasp concepts more easily and remember them during the test (Eggen and Kauchak 2008).
For students to be fluent readers they need to be able to automatically recognize words, read with expression, break up the sentence into meaningful parts, change the emphasis and tone where required and incorporate pauses at the middle and end of sentences.
To ensure the students master fluency, teachers should engage them in activities that expose them to words, letters and letter combinations. These activities and games, such as tracing, writing and copying words should help them form a connection between auditory and visual representations (Whiting 2003).
Conclusion The English language Arts test is very important for fourth graders and therefore, they should be well prepared for it. This test evaluates the mastery of the English language at this level.
Teachers should therefore use appropriate strategies and methods of instruction in teaching this course in order to ensure that the fourth graders understand the content and are able to apply it in their English Language Arts test. Several teaching strategies and instructional methods such as incorporating games and fun activities in the lesson plan can go along way in catching the attention of the students as well as enhancing their comprehension of the content.
Reference List Eggen, P., and Kauchak, D. (2008). Educational Psychology: Windows on Classrooms. 8th ed. USA: Prentice Hall
Flood, J. (2003). Handbook of Research on Teaching the English Language Arts. 2nd ed. USA: Routledge.
Moore, R. and Moore, M.A. (2004). Active Teaching and Learning Strategies: Creating a Blueprint for Success. UK: Trafford Publishing.
Perullo, D. (2003). Roadmap to 4th Grade English Language Arts, New York Edition. New York: The Princeton Review.
Whiting, D.S. (2003). Let’s Prepare for the New York State Grade 4 English Language Arts. USA: Barron’s Educational Series.
Childhood Schizophrenia: Causes and Management of this Mental Disorder Research Paper college essay help
Introduction Background Information
Judd (2009) tells the story of a seven-year-old girl named Jani Schofield. When producers of Oprah Winfrey show lived with Jani’s family for one week, they realized just how hard the parents were struggling to bring her up together with her younger brother Bodhi. The parents told the producers how their daughter slips into ‘psychotic moments’ as a result of apparently harmless triggers such as calling her by her full name ‘January’.
During such moments, the girl will instantly change from a sweet little angel to a shrieking and violent little girl. Michael and Susan Schofield narrate to the producers how they were forced to separate their two children to reduce the likelihood of the girl injuring the little boy during such moments. The children will spend the days together, but during the night, they will be boarded into different apartments each accompanied by one parent.
Jani’s life is unlike that of any other seven-year-old girl. The parents narrate to the producers how their little daughter experiences many hallucinations and how she hears strange voices in her head. At times she will stare at one spot for a long time claiming to see things that are not visible to other people around her.
Jani Schofield suffers from childhood schizophrenia. She is among the less than 1 in 30000 children under the age of eleven years who are diagnosed with the condition in the United States of America every year (Bender, 2010).
The symptoms of this condition are not unlike those among adults suffering from the same condition. According to Maatai et al. (2011), approximately 1 percent of Americans suffer from this condition. They report hallucinations accompanied by irrational thoughts and at times, violent behavior like that reported in Jani above.
Seese et al. (2010) define schizophrenia as a form of a mental disorder that is accompanied by breaking down of thought processes in the individual as well as other emotional disorders such as violence, extreme fear or withdrawal. Many patients suffering from this condition report incidences of auditory and visual hallucinations.
Their speech and thinking processes are also disintegrated as indicated above. The patient also suffers from social and occupational dysfunctions as a result of their condition (Seese et al., 2010). This means that their social and occupational life is impaired as a result of the effects of the mental condition.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Maatai et al. (2011) are of the view that most of the symptoms associated with schizophrenia appear during young adulthood. This is from the age of 12 and in some instances, even before. According to Bender (2010), about 0.3 to 0.7 percent of the world population suffers from schizophrenia. The condition can be diagnosed from behavioral observations made on the individual as well as from the experiences that are reported by the patient.
The exact cause of this mental disorder is not well known. However, experts in this field are of the view that a combination of several factors may be the possible cause of the condition. This includes factors such as genetics, the social and psychological environment within which the individual is brought up as well as some other factors touching on the patient’s lifestyle such as abuse of drugs among others (Hardman, Drew
Manipulation and Deception in Language Essay writing essay help: writing essay help
Propaganda is frequently used by politicians and in the media to influence our attitudes and perceptions on key issues (Orwell1). Propaganda is commonly used to temporarily distract our attention from the real issues at hand (Kemerling 8). For example, Joseph Goebbels (a former Germany minister for propaganda in the Nazi regime) once stated that it would have been impossible to use propaganda against the masses if they knew how to differentiate between rational arguments from propaganda.
This in effect means that politicians usually employ propaganda against an unsuspecting audience. People are easily swayed because they are unable to make out propaganda when they see it (Cross1). This paper will discuss deceptive strategies used to sway the perception and mindsets of the masses on critical issues.
Name-calling is one of the deceptions used by propagandist to sway our mindset about a particular issue or person without considering the significance of the person or the issue at hand. For instance, a politician vying for political office may describe his/her opponents as “two-faced liars” or “foolish idealists” (Cross 2). Politicians employ name-calling in order to prevent the targeted audience to think rationally but rather accept his/her propaganda categorically and blindly.
Glittering generalities is also a deceptive tactic used in language. Examples of glittering generalities include “our constitutional rights,” the American way” or “justice” (Cross 3). Many people are unaware of the adverse effects of glittering generalities on their way of thinking and end up agreeing to everything they hear. It is worthy to mention that glittering generalities are employed by politicians seeking elective positions in the government to provoke emotions of the masses and obscure their ways of thinking (Cross 3).
Another common manipulative strategy used in language is known as Plain Folk appeal. This strategy is also commonly used by people seeking elective posts in order to gain political mileage from the masses. Politicians use this strategy when they depict themselves as ordinary plain folks.
For instance, a politician soliciting votes from industrial workers may visit a factory and move around shaking hands with employees. The plain folks appeal is obviously a deceptive strategy. Although the politician may claim to be just an ordinary folk, he/she may not be interested in addressing the various problems facing the electorate once he/she is elected (Cross 4).
Argumentum ad populum is also another manipulative strategy used in language. It is a common strategy used by politicians as well as in media adverts. Politicians usually employ Argumentum populum when they dwell on issues that appeal to the targeted population.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More For instance, a politician may tell university or college students that the future of the country is in their hands or tell cultivators that they constitute “the backbone of the economy” (Cross 5). The main intention here is to sway the targeted group from making critical analyses about the politician and what he/she stands for. The wellbeing of the masses is thus an irrelevant issue in this context (Cross 5).
Many companies also employ manipulative and deceptive language to advertise their products. The main reason for doing so is promote their products as the best in the market. For example, the phrase better is commonly used to demonstrate that a particular product (e.g. mango juice) is superior over other rival products that fall in the same category.
For example, a company may claim that its mango juice products are “the better breakfast drinks” (Schrank 5). There are several other deceptive and manipulative strategies used by companies in the media to market their products.
The Wiesel Claim is one such example (Harris 2). The phrase weasel is a modifier that basically contradicts the consequent claim. Examples of weasel phrases that are commonly used in adverts include “strengthened,” “enriched,” “virtually,” or “fortified” (Schrank 8).
These phrases are used to create an impression of supremacy of the product. Examples of weasel claims include “leaves dishes virtually spotless,” “only half the price of many color set.” These claims are used to convince buyers that the products are superior and cheaper than other sets in the same category (Schrank 8).
Another commonly used deception is known as The Unfinished Claim. It is a common marketing strategy that asserts the superiority of a particular product. However, it does not complete the comparison. An example of unfinished claim include “Anacin: Twice as much of the pain reliever doctors recommend most” (Schrank 9).
One can observe that this particular assertion suits in several product categories. Nonetheless the ad is incomplete because it does not make a comparison of Anacin with any other similar product in its category (Schrank 9). An unsuspecting buyer may be lured by this claim to buy the product believing that it is the best in the market.
We will write a custom Essay on Manipulation and Deception in Language specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In certain types of writing (especially literary criticism) it is not unusual to find a number of sentences that employ deceptive phrases. For example, the phrase “Fascism” has lost its original connotation and it is currently used to refer to anything that is undesirable. Other expressions such as democracy, justice, socialism and freedom bear different connotations which cannot be synchronized.
For example, the word “democracy” is now used to refer to good governance. This word may thus be used (in a deceptive way) by a repressive regime to sway the mindset of the masses from the crucial issues at hand (Orwell12).
Works Cited Cross, D. Woolfolk. “Tricks of the Propagandist.” Nov 10, 2000. Web.
Harris, Robert. “Fallacies associated with Language.” Jun 8, 2000. Web.
Kemerling, Garth. “Fallacies of Ambiguity.” Nov 12, 2011. Web.
Orwell, George. “Politics and the English Language.” 1946. Web.
Schrank, Jeffrey. “The Language of Advertising Claims.” N.d. Web.
David Cameron’s first 18 months as Prime Minister Essay a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help
After bagging around hundred additional seats in the General elections in May 2010, the Conservative Party came into power together with the Liberal Democrats in Britain and David Cameron became the Prime Minister leading the Conservative/Liberal Democrat Coalition Government (David Cameron, n.d.).
The aim of this coalition government was to form a sturdy and progressive government whose sole objective would be to give preference to the common good and national interest. The values of freedom, fairness and responsibility are the key inspirational factors of this government (David Cameron, n.d.).
Modernisation of his party has always been the prime concern of David Cameron. He was first elected Leader of the Conservative Party in Dec.2005 and ever since he has been giving emphasis to issues like, NHS reforms, adopting environment friendly measures, encouragement to social actions and social justice as Leader of the Opposition. The number of women and tribal minority candidates for the Conservative Party raised significantly during this period (Prime Minister David Cameron’s Biography, 2011).
David Cameron always believed that the society comes first and the politicians are there to work for the people and not to rule them. As the Prime Minister also he has always given importance to social responsibility.
In the first 18 months of his leadership the government has acted in accordance to its mandate by presenting a picture of the Big Society by assuring more power to the common man. Moreover, Britain’s deficit, educational reform policies, health and welfare are some of the other powerful actions taken in the initial few months of David Cameron led coalition government (David Cameron, n.d. ).
Despite the fact that Cameron has a great personality and his performance in the Commons has always been that of a confident leader, his political accomplishments raise a serious question on his role towards the office. Cameron’s focus is observed mainly in keeping the coalition unabated (Many Miles to go, 2011).
He might celebrate some success on the issues like an improved credit rating, success in the half –war in Libya and leading a strong coalition between the Conservatives and the Liberal Democrats but he seems to act sluggishly in fulfilling the two big promises that he made before last year’s general elections i.e. to combat Britain’s deficit and to provide a makeover to the state.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Though, measures have been taken and bold and clear strategies have been outlined to reduce Britain’s huge deficit by George Osborne, the Chancellor of the Exchequer.
The process has just initiated and has saved British sovereign from losing faith in the markets but the progress is unexpectedly slow and unemployment is higher. Mr. Osborne is too stubborn to make alteration in his blueprint as it would indicate government’s incompetence to fight the crises. It would not be wise also with the deficit equal to 9.3%of GDP in 2010-11 (Many Miles to go, 2011).
David Cameron admitted that the government has to hasten with its deficit reduction plans as it was proving “harder than anyone envisaged” while speaking to business leaders at the CBI conference in London (David Cameron: deficit harder to clear than first thought, 2011).
The second promise of redesigning the state is also experiencing problems. It is evident that at a time of hardship announcing public services is quite challenging. Reformation demands lubrication for a smooth progress. But here, the progress is hindered more by the political incompetence and weakness of the government rather than the scarcity of funds (Many Miles to go, 2011).
The coalition government led by Mr. Cameron had initiated a radical reform agenda last year. The state-funded free schools and abundance of independent academies are some of the successful programs. More private providers are assured extended funds on the basis of payment –by—results in the cases like the treatment of drug addicts. Tackling the biased inducement in the universal welfare system is also a major concern of the government (Many Miles to go, 2011).
But there has only been partial success in these arenas. The implementation of these programs is not flawless. The government has not been very strict in taking action against the profit making schools. Rich pensioners are still enjoying the benefits and refurbishment of the broader welfare is going to be complicated and expensive.
The new commissioning structure has left the health reform programs in a disastrous state. Lifting the limit on the university tuition fee left the exchequer with a huge liability. Moreover, the ineffective idea of the “Big Society” wasted much of government’s time and fund. David Cameron’s policy of the rehabilitation program for the criminals also had to face much criticism by the tabloids.
We will write a custom Essay on David Cameron’s first 18 months as Prime Minister specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More All these setbacks are Tories’ own doings so they cannot deceive themselves by holding the Liberal Democrats responsible for it. In spite of all this it is commendable that the people holding top positions in both the coalition parties are likeminded in redesigning the state to make it more accountable and pluralistic (Many Miles to go, 2011).
David Cameron’s successful venture in Libya is praiseworthy and his tactics in used in the Libya victory has convinced many of the disbelievers. His caliber and competence in tackling the riots has also proved him a proficient leader. Rick Nye of pollsters Populous says, “You have seen the hacking, the riots, and Libya, but they are not really game-changers when it comes to their fundamental assessment” (Underhill, 2011).
Recently, Prime Minister David Cameron and Deputy Prime Minister Nick Clegg announced a £400 million fund for the house building sector. The idea is to support the construction industry and fulfill the desire of many people of having their own home. Besides this, development would be done on more public land funds are reserved for renovating the old and empty houses to bring them back into use. Thus, upto 16,000 homes will have a new start in construction and 3,200 would be reasonable properties.
Officials believe that it will also endorse around 32,000s job. Before this a £500 million Growing Places Fund was also announced by the coalition government. Though Labors consider this move as” small beer” and the government should put in more efforts to uplift the sinking economy which can fight the “perfect storm” in housing ever since the Second World War.
The Prime Minister and Mr Clegg said “With this strategy, we will unlock the housing market, get Britain building again, and give many more people the satisfaction and security that comes from stepping over their own threshold. These plans are ambitious – but we are determined to deliver on them.”
This move has been welcomed by Shadow chancellor Ed Balls. He stated that it is necessary for the government to recognize that the deficit cannot be reduced without getting growth and jobs in our economy and “so I think it probably does show that at last the Government is starting to shift.”
David Orr, chief executive of the National Housing Federation, also praised the Government for trying to deal with the issues. But he added that it is important to show boldness and strength in setting up the wrecked housing market (Government to underwrite mortgages fro first time buyers, 2011).
Another weakness of the coalition government lies in the handling of the health care reforms. Considerable opposition is being experienced by the coalition government over the policies regarding health care reforms. It was necessary to keep on finding ways to benefit the people by providing authentic healthcare and proving that NHS is safe in the hands of the Tories.
Not sure if you can write a paper on David Cameron’s first 18 months as Prime Minister by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Consequently some changes were made to the legislation and amidst criticism from some Liberal Democrats along with the Labor the health bill cleared its Commons stages in September. It might face further criticism in the House of Lords (David Cameron’s NHS ‘support’ claim disputed by staff, 2011).
This plan makes the GPs and other clinicians more accountable regarding the use of the budget in England and promotes competition with the private sector. This has proved to be the most controversial and revolutionary plan in the history of health service (Lords debating NHS shape up bill, 2011).
It is important for Mr. Cameron to realize that his competency would be judged in handling problems tactfully at the domestic front or else the coalition government is going to be in much trouble.He will have to go further in evaluating the problems of budget deficit, flooding immigration, dealing with the issues like collapsing eurozone and the police force not functioning properly (Harris, 2011).
The party leader of the Conservatives is expected to be very responsible and competent owning the party traits like sharp sense, self–discipline, attentive attitude making him more powerful. David Cameron can prove to be a virtuous Prime Minister as he is intellectual, sophisticated and full of energy.
But it is important for Mr Cameron to understand that the Conservatives have showered trust on those leaders only who have shown respect for the party as he seems to be more comfortable with the ideas of the metropolitan liberal elite in spite of having a typically Tory background (Harris, 2011).
It is true that he is a good prime minister and dealing with the current scenario with great courage and confidence. He has worked very hard in the first year for repositioning his Party ideologically. The reduction of some sensitive issues like immigration, Europe, and single parenting he has portrayed Conservatives as an understanding and comprehensive Party.
Issues like work- life-balance, helping the socially dispossessed, promoting environmental friendly measures to deal with the growing climate changes and global warming have been major concerns of the government. Cameron has also given much importance to the betterment of public sector.
Cameron and government his coalition government may be happy with the point they have reached but many of his colleagues seem to be unconvinced and proclaim that he has a long way to go to reach the zenith of his political career (Dorey, 2007).
So, Mr. Cameron needs to put forth all his strength and competency in making this government trustworthy and to prove himself as a leader of an extraordinary and daring administration (Many miles to go, 2011).
Works Cited “David Cameron”. n.d. Conservatives. Web.
“David Cameron: deficit harder to clear than first thought”. 2011. The Telegraph. Web.
“David Cameron’s NHS support claim disputed by staff”. 2011. BBC. Web.
Dorey, P. “A New Direction or Another False Dawn? David Cameron and the Crisis of British Conservatism. 2007”. British Politics (2007) 2, 137–166. doi:10.1057/palgrave.bp.4200051
“Government to underwrite mortgages fro first-time buyers”.2011. Yorkshirepost. Web.
Harris. R. “Dave is intelligent and polished- but he doesn’t understand the Tory party”. 2011. Mailonline. Web.
“Lords debating NHS shake-up bill”. 2011. BBC. Web.
“Many miles to go”. 2011. The Economist. Web.
“Prime Minister David Cameron’s biography”. 2011. 10. Web.
Underhill, W. “David Cameron’s Holiday Boost”. 2011. The daily beast. Web.
Higher Education Funding Essay writing essay help
Developed countries owe their success to higher education, and thus third world countries must emulate this concept to advance themselves. Third world countries have poor education systems that further complicate higher education. Most universities do not have their own income generating projects which leaves them at the mercy of international donors and federal governments (Akkari 34).
The governments put more emphasis on primary and secondary education while ignoring higher education. The governments direct majority of their money towards funding free primary and secondary education. They construct many secondary schools without considering the number of universities that are supposed to absorb those students.
There are few institutions of higher learning that are unevenly distributed in administrative regions. Some provinces do not have their own universities and thus students from such regions have to relocate when they are admitted into the learning institutions.
There have been many instances when the funds meant for higher education projects have been squandered, and since the governments in developing countries are not committed towards ending corruption the donors are discouraged from giving monetary hand outs (Baker and Wiseman 179).
Both teaching and non-teaching staffs are poorly paid and thus learning is regularly halted due to the strikes that are staged by these personnel in their bid to demand for better pay. The lecturers use outdated teaching models but then they are not blame because the governments are supposed to budget for their continuous training programs.
In addition, the learning institutions do not have enough money to construct more structures for the purpose of accommodating many students. In fact, most universities in third world countries have inadequate boarding facilities and the ones that are there are in a sorry state.
This is because they are hardly renovated. Inadequate resources cause the universities to limit the courses that can be studied in their facilities. For instance, only a few universities can offer training in the faculty of medicine and thus such students have to be congested in one or two institutions. This causes the learning institutions to adopt poor university admissions which eventually lead to overcrowded institutions.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The poor remuneration packages that are offered to the lecturers do not motivate them but instead causes them to be engaged in other private institutions that offer better pay (Chapman and Austin 174). This causes a negative impact on the quality of education because the learners cannot contact the educators. The other problem revolves around tuition fees, which tend to be constant. Most universities have tried to hike tuition fees, but contrary to their expectations, the learners have never collaborated.
Furthermore, the learning institutions do not manage their own revenue because they are placed under the ministry of education. The officials from the ministries are given the mandate of allocating budgets to the universities. Many intellectuals have criticized this approach because government ministers do not understand the priorities of universities. This constitutes to poor governance in public universities.
The problem involving funding of higher education can be remedied by allowing the university staff to draft their own budget because they know the areas that need more emphasis. Transparency with regard to handling of money should be enhanced through the installation of monitoring systems as well as watchdog committees, which would ensure that money is used for the intended purpose.
The universities should focus on being self reliant instead of depending on handouts from government agencies. This can be achieved by commissioning income-generating projects within and beyond the learning institutions’ compounds. This will ensure a steady supply of income.
Works Cited Akkari, Abdeljalil. “Education in the Middle East and North Africa: The Current Situation and Future Challenges.” International Educational Journal 5.2(2004): 34-36. Print.
Baker, David and Alexander Wiseman. The Worldwide Transformation of Higher Education. Bingley, WA: Emerald Group Publishing, 2008. Print.
Chapman, David and Ann Austin. Higher Education in the Developing World: Changing Contexts and Institutional Responses. Massachusets: Greenwood Publishing, 2002. Print.
We will write a custom Essay on Higher Education Funding specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More
Apple Store Essay college essay help online: college essay help online
Table of Contents Introduction
Introduction The market structure of Apple store is oligopoly. In the market, the Apple store’s iPod represents a vertical monopoly. This is a situation where a particular company has the control of all the aspects of distribution, production and product sales. Although Apple store is not a company on its own, the iPod hold a dominant position in the market1. This paper therefore seeks to discuss the market structure where Apple store operates and why it is in that market.
What the economic theory says about the role of advertising in this particular market and the observation made on the data. The economic profits for the firm both in the short run and long run will also be discussed and whether the data supports the economic theory and how the profit stream can change over time (Zielenziger, 2011).
As stated in the above paragraph, Apple store operates in an oligopoly market structure. The company is also associated with a vertical monopoly market structure. The Apple store company sells its products in various markets across the globe. It does this through its retail outlets like its online store where the company has sold numerous products to consumers and other business enterprises2.
The Apple store has invested in programs that promote reseller sales including ASCP which focuses on certain reseller locations and APRP which provides expertise in products and customer service (Deffree, 2011). The Apple store company also sells some computer products to the agencies of the government and the creative markets falling within its geographical location. These markets are considered fundamental to the third party computer applications and hardware developers.
The better-quality extension and computing recital of the Apple store products turn up to be the major attraction of the consumers within the market location. In addition, the Apple store company provides computer products to the customers within the scientific market just as it does to the information technology markets (Apple Inc., 2011).
The economic theory says a lot in the role of advertising of the Apple store company. According to the economics theory of pricing and revenue, it is very logical that if the price of a product increases, the revenue should increase as a result. Due to the improvement of technology, the Apple store company has been able to produce high quality product which have quite a show of demand.
Even though, the prices of the new products such as the Iphone4 and the new Mac handbook are high, consumers seem to be quite interested in the product3. The hiked prices of the new products should therefore, bring an impact in revenue during a particular period. According to the company’s reports, the revenue has risen from $99.9 billion to $108 billion as at the year 2011 because of the adverts. It is now evident from the economic theory that the role of advertising is very significant in the revenue accruals (Deffree, 2011).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More According to the economic theory, the role of advertising is sensitive to issues such as in the appreciation of how the customers predispose towards the effects resulting from adverts. Advertising makes an impact to the customers about the products, it creates awareness, evokes an immediate response from the customer, it communicates messages to the target market, it creates favorable reputation and impression about the product and reminds the customer of the features of the product that is offered4.
To economic theory, advertising is important in fulfilling the needs of the customers as far as information about the product is concerned, it consolidates position, encourages product trial, and changes perceptions about the mental repositioning and overcome prejudice. It also reinforces attitudes as well as enthuse the trade and the staff (Apple Inc., 2011).
Economic theory links advertising to the elasticity and inelasticity of demand of a product, the Apple store’s Iphone is easy to analyze. Elasticity in demand of product relies in the accessibility or availability of products that can substitute the basic commodity, income of the consumer which enables him to consume the good and time that a consumer may use to stop using a particular commodity5.
This is observed in the company’s data. It is evident that whenever the product availability to the customer increases, more sales are made and the company realizes more profits and hence positive escalations in the profit data (Zielenziger, 2011).
The economic profits of this company according to the company’s reports rose from $99.9 billion to $108 billion as at the year 2011. This is a positive margin which may have resulted from the opportunities and issues that face the Apple store company. The Apple store continues to expand globally although the universal shortage of expertise and skilled labor continues to affect its competitive edge.
However, the Apple store has the opportunity to exploit emerging markets such as Brazil and India besides utilizing cheap labor available in these economies6. The Apple store has grown to be a market leader in computer and electronic industry based on its humble background. Due to the fact that the Apple store has immense market globally, it has outdone stiff competition in the industry (Apple Inc., 2011).
Conclusion To sum up, the market structure of the Apple store is oligopoly. The paper has described the market structure of the company and stated the role of advertising from the view point of the economic theory as well as the economic profits of the firm as it appears in the short term and long term. It is also evident from the paper that the Apple store represents a vertical monopoly in the market; this is because of the sole control of all the aspects of distribution, production and product sales.
We will write a custom Essay on Apple Store specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More From the illustrations in the paper, it is clear that the company’s profit may change overtime if it considers government regulations and issues that might affect its future. This is clearly supported by the data on its annual report concerning its annual profits. In order to remain competitive and keep a positive profit margin, the Apple store should consider exploiting all the marketing opportunities resulting from the emerging economies (Zielenziger, 2011).
References Apple Inc., (2011). The new, faster MacBook Air. Retrieved from: https://www.apple.com/
Deffree, S. (2011). iPhone 4 supply and demand issues could hurt Apple brand. New York: Cengage Learning.
Zielenziger, D. (2011). Apple’s Report: Annual Revenue Tops $108 Billion. 18th october 2011. Washington : International business times. 11th november 2011.
Footnotes 1 Apple Inc., (2011). The new, faster MacBook Air.
2 Deffree, S. (2011). iPhone 4 supply and demand issues could hurt Apple brand. New York: Cengage Learning.
3 Deffree, S. (2011). iPhone 4 supply and demand issues could hurt Apple brand. New York: Cengage Learning.
4 Zielenziger, D. (2011). Apple’s Report: Annual Revenue Tops $108 Billion. 18th october 2011. Washington : International business times. 11th november 2011.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Apple Store by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More 5 Apple Inc., (2011). The new, faster MacBook Air.
6 Apple Inc., (2011). The new, faster MacBook Air.
Krause Corporation’s Supply Management Case Study cheap essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
To make or Buy
Introduction Management positions entail making of decisions most of which have great effects on the image of an organization. A mistake in decision making committed by one person turn out to be quite expensive to an organization as it may lead to organizational image tarnishing and customers losing trust in the organization. One of the areas that requires careful observation of details in regard to decision-making is outsourcing services to an external party in an attempt to reduce costs. In this paper, a case study on Krause Corporation is discussed.
To make or Buy In the case study, Steve was been instructed to find ways of cutting down the cost of the pipes which were required (Meyer, n.d.). One of the ways to cut down the costs was to opt for purchasing of the pipes required in contrast to making them.
He, however, knew too well that the quest for cost reduction was never to overrun the need to uphold quality. Quality was of top priority; cost reduction, actually, took the second priority. The need to ensure that the quality of pipes was guaranteed was therefore, the very first factor that was to be observed (Meyer, n.d.).
After carrying out a survey, Steve discovered a supplier who seemingly was in a position to meet the needs of Steve of supplying high-quality pipes at a price which was seemingly below the market price (Meyer, n.d.).
If Steve was to go for this option then it could be assumed that he would have achieved his objective of getting quality pipes at a reduced cost. However, with 14 years of experience on supply management, Steve knew that this deal was too good and therefore, there was a need to countercheck the details before he could make a commitment.
The purchase option offered more promise than the make option. It should be noted that with the purchase option the pipes of the specific quality needed would be supplied; another factor to note also is that the standard of pipes that the supplier promised to deliver was seemingly above that which the company could make consistently. The price which was below the market price was another significant factor, which made the purchase option the best to pick.
Considering that the two utmost significant factors were observed in the purchase option, there was a need for Steve to dig for more information about the details of the supplying process in order to ensure that the supplier would be reliable. It is always advisable to ensure that when outsourcing services to a third party, attempts are be made to interact with the third party to clarify the stakes involved (Burt, Petcavage
Decision Making Models Essay essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Application of Rational Decision Making Model to Advertisement
List of References
Introduction In management, it is very critical to make rational decisions that help to minimize challenges associated with investments. Human judgment is an important aspect in the decision making process because it helps to determine the relevance of the decision made, as well to interpret the findings.
However, human judgment leads to misdirected strategic planning in cases where it is faulty. Therefore, to avoid faulty human judgment in the decision-making process, it is imperative for a firm to reflect on adopting a viable decision making model that would facilitate an increase in their sales volume. This paper will focus on a discussion of rational decision-making model, and then delve into its application in the advertisement area of the hotel industry.
Discussion Rational decisional making model takes an approach of highlighting the best decision among a number of alternatives. A case in point for this model is the six-step decision-making process, which involves following six steps before coming up a viable decision. The first step involves defining what the decision maker wants to achieve (Williams 2008: 182).
This necessitates recognising the need for change or decision-making. In this respect, the decision makers should endeavor to answer the following questions: what do we want to accomplish with the decision that we are about to make? Will this decision directly affect the workers or the clients?
How will the workers or clients react to this decision? What will be the pros and cons of making this decision? Will this decision lead us a step higher to achieving our dreams? How will we know that the decision made is successful? After all these questions are addressed, the decision makers can use their personal preferences, values, and interests to determine what is relevant.
A decision criterion that would facilitate achievement of goals should be identified shortly after the decision makers define the problem (Eisenführ et al. 2009: 210). This entails carrying out a research using various alternatives in a bid to analyse how to achieve the proposed decision.
The decision makers have a role of reviewing and weighing the previously identified alternatives in order to award them with the correct priority. This is normally followed by developing a number of viable alternatives for problem solving strategies. However, the alternatives are only listed, but not appraised.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The next stage involves rating the alternatives against the criterion. The already set criterion facilitates a thorough evaluation of the strengths as well as the weaknesses of every selected alternative. Finally, the decision-makers compute the optimal decision based on its strengths and weaknesses. The strengths of this model stems from the following factors:
Situations facing a company can only be successfully analysed if the decision makers come up with ways of defining them explicitly;
Coming up with a number of alternatives facilitates an increase in the level of information, thus creating many options to choose from; and
Effectiveness in the decision making process is enhanced by combining the managers’ knowledge with the specialist expertise of internal and external consulting teams, thus eliminating emotions in the process (Phillips
Industrial Relations: Conflict and Cooperation Report (Assessment) college essay help: college essay help
There is no doubt that both conflict and cooperation are part and parcel of employment relationships. There are different forms of industrial conflicts. These include: Overt (boycotts, pickets, sabotages, strikes, bans, etc); covert (absenteeism, work to rule, theft, go-slow, indifference, etc); individual or collective conflicts; and proactive conflicts.
There are several reasons suggested to explain why industrial conflicts occur. In many cases, industrial conflicts are caused by lack of employment security, moribund managerial control and poor remunerations. In addition, an industrial conflict may emerge when the interests of the employer and his/her employees collide. For example, this may happen when the employer wields control and demand enhanced productivity from his/her workers.
On the other hand, employees may expect an increased remuneration to compensate for their efforts. As a result, an industrial conflict may occur when employees’ earnings are not increased to reflect their efforts. It is thus imperative that employers provide their workers with excellent working environment, increased participation, job security, good management strategies and better earnings in order to avert an industrial conflict.
The state plays an integral role in industrial relations. The characteristics of workplace industrial relations are directly affected by adjustments in the character of state interventions in the labor market. The state intervenes in the labour market by imposing restrictions on managerial prerogatives as well as protecting the reproduction of labourforce.
In the last three decades, the Australian government adopted a corporatist regime as an intervention strategy in the labour market to foster social partnerships between the labour unions, state and employers. During this period, economic concessions (such as wage reductions) were done by the state.
On the other hand, business organizations gained from subdued industrial conflicts as well as low inflation. However, the corporatism accord came to an end when the Howard administration took helm in 1996. The new government modified state policies in order to diminish the role of the state in the economy.
Some of the policy changes included privatization of some sections of the public sector (e.g. abolition of Public Service Board), marketisation of state services and reduction in state expenditure. Although the federal government adopted managerialism and marketisation strategies from mid 1980, it still plays a vital role in the labour market to date.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The basic role of management is to merge, distribute and utilize resources to realize the objectives of the organization. Business organizations employ different management control strategies. Some of these management control strategies are:
Direct control: examples include tight supervision and industrial discretion.
Responsible autonomy: employees are granted autonomy and status at work.
Other forms of controls include: technical control; personalized control; commitment-based control; and bureaucratic control.
There are a number of factors that influence the choice of management control strategy. Some of these factors include: state regulations; market forces; and employee acceptance/resistance. An organization may choose to adopt a management control strategy for a particular group of workers based on several factors. These include:
The need to sustain good working relations with workers: For example, eliminating union workplace may hurt existing relations with workers.
Cultural factors: The choice of the management control strategy is determined by the cultural factors both at the organizational and national level.
Labour market and product market conditions: This entails competition based on quality, price and innovation and surplus or shortages of labour.
State regulations: the state play an important role in the determination of the management control strategy to be adopted by an organization.
The Chronicle of North Korea’s Nuclear Power and Diplomacy Research Paper scholarship essay help
Introduction The war against nuclear weapons developed by the Democratic People’s Republic of Korea, DPRK remains a delicate and sensitive issue in diplomatic relations between DPRK and other countries around the world. With several nations opposed to the nuclear development program, DPRK has gone through a series of steps and encountered countless challenges in its quest to produce and develop nuclear weapons.
This has led to international conferences and treaties aimed at limiting the progress and chances of North Korea becoming a nuclear power threat to the rest of the world in future (Wampler, 2003). With all these efforts, research indicates that the country’s leadership has had a deaf ear on the calls and maintained their development programs to-date.
In this regard, this research focuses on the historical progress of nuclear strategy in North Korea and how North Korea’s foreign diplomacy and Nuclear affected each other. Of special significance is the nuclear development in the Democratic People’s Republic of Korea, encompassing both its on-table and under-table activities.
The research furthers synthesizes how DPRK’s pursuit of Nuclear weapons has affected its relationship with countries like the United States, Japan, China, South Korea and other European and Asian states throughout history. Lastly, the paper analyzes the Six-Party talk in terms of its successes and failures with special focus on the current status of the nuclear development program in North Korea.
Nuclear weapons These are highly lethal armaments with the highest known potential of destruction in the world. This ability emanates from fusion and fission reactions which take place in nuclear reactors. Although it later gained its use in the mid 20th century, nuclear weapons breakthrough were made in early 1930s and later applied by several countries during the Cold War.
It is believed that the first fission weapons were developed by the union between the United States, Canada and Britain as a way of counteracting the threat that was being posed by Nazi German bomb scheme during Cold War (World Nuclear Association, 2011). After some of the bombs were dropped on Japan in 1945, the Soviet Union began its development of the Hydrogen bomb.
The U.S and Soviet Union acquired nuclear weapons, which were used during the Cold War. Since then several countries, totaling to nine have acquired these weapons and their proliferation remains a global security threat. Moreover, of substance, controversy and great attention is the nuclear development in DPRK.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More North Korea and Nuclear weapons North Korea is an isolated and relatively small country in Asia but it has remained in the limelight for decades with regard to nuclear power exploration and development of weapons. Its thirst for nuclear weapons has sparked chilly relationships with countries like the United States and South Korea, having been criticized and highly condemned for the manner in which it handles human rights issues. DPRK government is considered to be quite secretive and its borders are highly guarded and sheltered.
North Korea was created after the Second World War, when the DPRK declared its independence in the year 1948 (Kimball, 2011). Early 1950s witnessed the Korean War when DPRK invaded the South after their declaration of sovereignty. The war claimed more than two million Koreans and came to a halt after a peace agreement that was reached in 1953.
Nuclear development in DPRK It is believed that North Korea, also known as the Democratic People’s Republic of Korean has nurtured its interest in nuclear power and weapons since 1950s. Although there are no known operating nuclear reactors in the country, there are massive development programs which have remained part of the epicenter of global nuclear power threats (Wampler, 2003).
While others argue that North Korea developed its nuclear plants and weapons decades ago, the following segments summarize some of the steps which DPRK has undergone to achieve its current global ranking in nuclear matters.
Chronology of events DPRK’s nuclear program began in mid 20th century, precisely 1950s during the reign of Kim il-Sung, a time when most scientists from North Korea received practical training in the Soviet Union (Moltz
The Journey of One Buddhist Nun: Even Against the Wind Essay cheap essay help: cheap essay help
The essay is based on the book The Journey of One Buddhist Nun: Even against the Wind. To accomplish the desired task, the two questions are being answered purely using this book. The book generally tells a story of a woman known as Wabi who resorted and sought to become religious.
In her quest to doing so, she faces various huddles as well as difficulties. Ideally the story is told of her experiences as she worked towards being a maechi (Sid 23). The first question is with regards to why did Maechi Wabi ‘go forth’. According to the author, Wabi decided to go forth after realizing that she was fully discontented and dissatisfied with the idea of reaching adulthood and becoming a mother like her own mother. She hated the idea of constantly taking care of the others and working (Sid 74).
It was predetermined during her time that when she grows up, she is to assist her mother to take care of her siblings and work hard to earn money to buy food. In Buddhism, going forth simply means the act or situation where one, especially a monk or a nun, leaves his/her homes and decides to lead a homeless life, so that they can be deliberated from lust. Based on Buddhism, those who go forth are usually individuals who seek to get rid of the sorrows of birth and diseases, old age and death.
According to Buddhism, Buddha decided to go forth so that he could teach people what he had learned and discovered. The four major things that he taught were the following ones.
First, life usually ends in death; second, the cause of human suffering in life is because of our bad deed; third, end of desire results in end of suffering, and the last issue is that the man has to follow the right way and seek for divine truth which is within us. The story is indeed basis for Buddhism as it tells us about the day to day activities of those who practice the faith (Sid 34).
Maechi Wabi developed a very negative attitude towards men because the society honored religious men and scorned at religious women, thus disrespecting the females. The behaviors of her father contributed greatly to her resentment of men, this is because her father was greatly opposed to her will of being a nun because he wanted her to grow into a woman who would be able to take care of her own family and raise her own children, thus contributing to the societies development.
Wabi’s father was not pleased with the way the society and the women in particular were transforming. This is evident from the change in the roles and behaviors of the Thailand women. He stated the society to become promiscuous and females to begin developing anti-social behaviors that were not expected of them.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This is the issues that Wabi expressed in the book later on. Wabi’s father played a very significant role in developing his daughter’s religious life and also making her more determined to meet her goals; this is a result of his constant resent to her idea of being a nun. Wabi’s father realized that his resentment to his daughter’s decisions would not change her view, but would only contribute to her desire to fulfill her dream and support her in her quest of becoming a nun (Sid 98).
As suggested by Sid (100), Wabi’s father encouraged his daughter to be what she wanted to be without backing down on her ambitions. These words of encouragement definitely played a significant role in ensuring that she would become a nun and thus achieve her goal; her father is also involved in altering the mindset of the men in the society, thus they should have started appreciating the religious females in the society. This definitely changed the society’s perception on religious women.
I think that Wabi’s father was a role model to her in some way. This is because he was a very hard working man who would not take anything to chance and would also stand straight to his words without changing his mind. This attitude gave her the courage to pursue her ambitions without second thoughts.
Work Cited Brown, Sid. The Journey of One Buddhist Nun: Even Against the Wind. New York: State University of New York Press, 2001. Print
Request for Specific Levels of Funding and Resources Report (Assessment) college admission essay help: college admission essay help
The product we are going to implement is absolutely new for consumers, so internal investment may be available for business. Requesting for internal investment, we are going to point to new marketing strategies and expansion where funded resources are going to be spent.
The chocolate business which is going to be led has financial resources to undertake internal investment (Sprague, 2008). The business should try to spread as much as possible information about the specifics of the business to the potential internal investors to make those interested in the revenue they are going to receive in the future.
A corporate business sponsor is a good opportunity for the company. Having conducted a research it was concluded that there is a sponsor who is ready to finance this kind of business. ING Australia Holdings Limited and ING Australia Pty Limited are the Australian departments of the ING Corporate Investments B.V.
This organization is ready to invest its corporate finances in business which is a strong niche player. Having developed a new niche on the market, the organization should show the priorities and benefits of this business. Having only a business plan, this organization should show its best sides to ING, pointing to the minimal risks.
The development potential should be shown as well. Robust cash flow substantiated forecast is obligatory if “Indulge” wants to get corporate investment from ING Corporate Investments B.V.
This organization also declares other requirements for the company which is interested in being invested, namely engagement of other shareholders, experiences and skilled management, the possibilities for the creation of the value and main requirement is that h business should be understood for the company (ING 2011).
Other Required Resources Except for funding and financial resources, business requires other types of resources, like people, assets, and a business plan. Having searching for investment, it is obvious that we are going to use other people’s resources. Thus, the rent of the space and equipment with the opportunity of further buy-out is a good start for the shop.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Being a simple business, the use of outside advisors may be a good alternative as, still, some decisions should be made in marketing, management, advertising, shop running, etc. Dwelling upon other resources in business, it should be mentioned that it is possible to reduce the costs by means of employing graduate students.
Their services are not very expensive as they lack experience, but the fresh ideas they have are really great. There should be a person responsible for business liability, harassment, and risks. The services of attorney may be used if they are necessary, thus this resource should be outsourced only in emergency cases.
An accountant is a human resource which is inevitable in our case. Internet resources also become important for business development and modeling dynamic online services. It is necessary to create a web site of the company with the novelties offered in the shop and an opportunity to place orders for delivering in the near located offices (like an additional service).
Thus, using only the necessary activities in the organization, it is possible to minimize and marshal resources, which is a guarantee of a successful business. There is no necessity to keep much staff is a shop, different human resources may be outsources when they are necessary. But, it is important to draw the line and employ the required number of resources (Stevenson 2007).
Reference List ING 2011, ‘ING Corporate Investments B.V.’, Commercial Loans, https://www.ing.com.au/home-loans/commercial-loan.html
Sprague, C 2008, ‘Cash Flow’, Cash Flow — Research Starters Business p. 1.
Stevenson, HH 2007, ‘Resource requirements’, in JA Timmons
Smoking Ban in the State of Florida Essay argumentative essay help
Florida enacted a policy to regulate indoor tobacco smoking in July 2003. The aim of this policy was to outlaw smoking in some specific enclosures except in private residences and other selected areas.
The state spends about $ 60 million yearly in controlling tobacco and its related diseases. There is room to reduce this amount substantially if the state puts in place an effective smoking ban policy. This paper looks at policy options and suggests the best.
Of the 17.5% of the Florida’s population who are tobacco smokers, 18.5% are male while 16.4% are female. The state has an annual mortality of about 28,600 people because of tobacco related ailments. It also incurs an expense of up to 25% of its revenue from excise taxes to control tobacco. The majority of smokers in Florida agree that smoking bans are justified.
The current policy came into effect after some amendments of a policy on smoking ban. The quest to come up with such a policy started in 1985.
This current policy only affects workplaces and restaurants. Its major aim is to protect people from the effects of secondhand smoke. The policy, however, leaves out other players in the game, the supplier and the retailer.
Three policy options exist from which the administration can choose. These are the Total Ban Policy, the Partial Ban policy and the Liberated Smoking policy.
The total ban policy entails abolishing smoking in all public places and increasing sales tax on cigarettes. As much as this policy is authoritarian, it aims at protecting the interests of the public whose majority are non-smokers. The policy is in work on about 48% of the American population (Taub, 2006).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The rationale of this policy is that since tobacco smoking causes killer lung diseases, it is important to protect the people from such smoke and allow only those who intentionally expose themselves to the effects of the smoke.
The policy is authoritarian and ignores the interests of the smokers. It also suggests increase in taxes, which is likely to lower the profits of tobacco companies and hence make them to oppose the policy.
The partial Ban policy suggests an exemption in smoking ban by licensing some areas or establishments. It also proposes an increase in sales tax and the exemption of some public smoking zones by the municipal authorities.
The proponents of this policy suggest that proper ventilation can mitigate the effects of second hand smoke. The rationale of this policy is that people choose to smoke for various reasons, some of which are justifiable medically.
The Liberated Ban policy suggests a partial ban to all public areas and establishments, an increase of the sales tax to $ 1 per pack, registration of all establishments allowing smoking and these should provide well-ventilated smoking zones.
The rationale of this policy is that people smoke voluntarily and therefore the state should not interfere with their freedom. The only thing the state can do is to restrict the extent to which an individual’s freedom affects others. This policy is likely to face criticism from anti smoking campaigners because it does not hold the interests of the public.
The first policy is inappropriate for Florida because the state’s smokers are aware of the effects of smoking and are willing to stop. The second policy is viable because it provides options that are within reach.
We will write a custom Essay on Smoking Ban in the State of Florida specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More However, it will make the smokers secluded just like the first policy. The third policy changes the approach to the fight against smoking making people to take it as their own problem. It is also economically feasible. This makes it the best policy option for Florida.
In conclusion, the best policy option is that which can bring all the involved parties into harmony and help people to participate in governance by civil obedience and positive involvement in policy enforcement.
Reference List Taub, D. (2006).California Town Makes It Tougher to Smoke in Public. Web.
Business strategies in action Report (Assessment) best essay help: best essay help
Introduction The recent years have been characterized by dramatic business shifts, from equity-based to non-equity based structure of partnership. The great shifts are attributed to research and development activities that have recently dominated the world with an intention of improving scientific and technological knowledge.
The environment of business has also experienced drastic changes, requiring business ventures to take a direction that enhances its competitiveness in a dynamic world.
More over, change is always inevitable since it paves a way for new strategies implementation within business environments. The transition is also responsible for more business productivity and performance (Cantwell and Molero, 2003).
This assessment is aimed at providing a critical assessment of the major causes of business shift from equity-based to non-equity based partnerships. It will also consider the broad changes in the business and technological environment, as well as the features of both equity and non-equity based inter-firm partnerships.
Features of both equity and non-equity based inter-firm partnerships. Two basic models of partnership have been in existence in the business environment. The equity and non-equity based partnerships, though operate in similar business environment, have quite distinct features.
Equity-based partnerships are defined by a linkage of two or more companies forming an organizational unit that is controlled by two or more parent companies. They resemble semi-independent ventures, which are organized hierarchically.
At the same time, they can act independently to perform specific typical functions, including manufacture of products, selling, marketing functions etc. They are mainly characterized by a legalized firm formation that operates indefinitely, where the parent companies share resources, knowledge and collaborate in all activities.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More More over, operations management is shared equally among the firms in the control of the independent firm. The long relationship firms established are geared towards enhancing competitive advantage, access to markets and business sustainability (Contractor, 2002).
On the other hand, non-equity partnerships are characterized by relationships that are informal since are formed on contract foundations. They are usually short-term agreements between ventures of choice by a particular company.
For instance, Magna International Inc, a known distributor of technologically developed automotive systems has joined hands with other companies, specifically those that manufacture automotives, i.e General Motors, Ford Motor, Honda companies etc.
These ventures require minimized kind of commitment unlike the equity-based ones, since are based on the principle of outsourcing. This entails engagement of companies in activities that can create value and primary support, in areas that are hard for operation by a single venture.
Less experience is needed since the organizations in contract do not have to share equally their knowledge, resources and control in addition to market and equity shares. Thus, their formation is simple and their formation is aimed at accomplishing a specific project within a given period of time (Contractor, 2002).
Changes in the business and technological environment Modern developments have paved way for rampant transitions in both the business and technological environment. Competition has dominated the business environment in the recent years due to the increased number of ventures producing similar products.
At the same time, acquiring competitive advantage in the business field has become quite demanding to an extent of overwhelming single businesses in their operations. The fast-paced world today has embraced outsourcing as the best business strategy to gain competitive advantage, a reason for formation of non-equity based joint ventures.
We will write a custom Assessment on Business strategies in action specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More More over, there is an arising need for enhancement of corporate social responsibility in the current environment, which calls for more outgoing strategies that the former (Uddin
Economics of New York Essay essay help online
Introduction New York is one of the globally recognized cities due to its high economic development. The city’s economic growth has undergone several developments from the previous decades to date. This essay highlights most of this progress. The first section explains the city’s overall economic performance.
The second section focuses on the city’s current state with respect to sectoral distribution. The third part highlights the evolution of the city’s economy in the immediate past. The fourth part describes the drivers of the economic changes.
The fifth section focuses on the part played by public authorities in the city’s structural changes. The sixth part is about the city’s main problems and suggested economic strategies that can be applied in addressing the problems. The final part is the conclusion.
The overall performance of New York City’s economy The improvements of New York City’s economic development have benefited both households and firms. This is from 1975 during which New York encountered a serious financial crisis. From that time New York ceased depending so much on debt finance, lowered property based taxation besides improving its financial reports.
Although the overall tax burden has been high, there has been a sharp reduction in the amount of tax used in offsetting short – term loan. Firms and households have also greatly benefited from development in the city’s public transport network which occurred especially towards the end of the nineteenth century.
A location’s attractiveness especially to investment is enhanced by public safety. During 1980s when New York City experienced an economic boom, crime rate was quite high but reduced drastically in 1991 during a recession. This trend went on for the next decade.
Study shows that a sharp decline in the city’s crime rate was experienced in its poorest areas (Okuyama